Home

TNC 320 - heidenhain

1. c Working with the TNCguide 7 Calling the TNCguide There are several ways to start the TNCguide _ LENEE Eiaa Y Press the HELP key if the TNC is not already showing an error Processins tf ne tauro tant ran arte sn he manal mo ok message Coreg tee e ives vests eh eee le ee ay i a Click the help symbol at the lower right of the screen beforehand gt HOD Functions Calibrate the effective radius FE les pis ft cadas ei then click the appropriate soft keys sen Hare ster ne Use the file manager to open a help file chm file The TNC can Touch probe Cyc Merten mine wan a a open any chm file even if it is not saved on the TNC s hard disk P Working with Tol sea comer a diun cree A Set a circle center as datum snema Circle center as dat electing pr we ce A oct Recording me If one or more error messages are waiting for your uritina the i meena pg Nisan attention the TNC shows the help directly associated l introduction tease a tasie gotation wig to n with the error messages To start the TNCguide you first Calipratina IBH eaor NMR tn ta an alc have to acknowledge all error messages compensating tN aes its tec tre Ee oo aI a z When the help system is called on the programming Back FORWARD ti i prrecToRY urNoo tncsuroe tcGUTDE station the TNC starts the internally defined standard iia mee browser usually the Internet Explor
2. ieee es Program run full sequence Programming Tool lengths and radii pepe ie eee RE roo e Oversizes delta values from the tool table TAB and 19 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING T a2 wz 3 E 2 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 0 9995 boc 50 tne TOOL CARE CM ae a E 23 PLANE RESET STAY R2 0 3000 fall 3 i 24 LBL Tool life maximum tool life TIME 1 and maximum 25 END PGM STATI MM ECC Ee E tool life for TOOL CALL TIME 2 SSE 0 00 0 00 0 00 Display of the active tool and the next replacement OE pte tool S IST 12 44 57 F OVR END PGM OFF x 33 7 47 Y 72 5 8 eZ 9 754 C 0 000 S 94 680 al a aciL fl ok tT 3 mm min Our 57 8 M5 STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS STATUS OF COORD 3 xg OVERVIEW STATUS aoa Q PARAM HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 69 dp Tool measurement TT tab 3 x P s f 1 l Programming The TNC only displays the TT tab if the function is active ea ra Saas Ci on your machine 17 LBL 15 PGM LBL cyc M Pos TOOL TT o 18 L IX 1 R FMAX 19 CYCL DEF 11 SCALING Lae 3 WK2 3 m Q 2 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 9 9995 boc BA con dp e FF RESET STAY O DYN fall p Aaa No direct Number of the tool to be measured ad selection any V possible EPEE F Siecore 2 I Ee N Display whether the tool radius or the tool length 33 747 Y 72 578 Z 9 754 is being measured E 000
3. Tool change Call tool drill New depth for drilling New plunging depth for drilling Examples Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern Tool change Call tool reamer Cycle definition REAMING N 20 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern End of main program Beginning of subprogram 1 Entire hole pattern Move to starting point for group 1 Call subprogram 2 for the group Move to starting point for group 2 Call subprogram 2 for the group Move to starting point for group 3 Call subprogram 2 for the group End of subprogram 1 Beginning of subprogram 2 Group of holes 1st hole with active fixed cycle Move to 2nd hole call cycle Move to 3rd hole call cycle Move to 4th hole call cycle End of subprogram 2 N ia eg lt 9 i 8 1 Principle and Overview You can program entire families of parts in a single part program You do this by entering variables called Q parameters instead of fixed numerical values Q parameters can represent information such as Coordinate values Feed rates Spindle speeds Cycle data Q parameters also enable you to program contours that are defined with mathematical functions You can also use Q parameters to make the execution of machining steps depend on logical conditions In conjunction with FK programming you can also combine contours that do not have NC compatible dime
4. hm S N a O Y N Lo q 15 2 Software Numbers Function The following software numbers are displayed on the TNC screen after the MOD functions have been selected 420 Control model Designation of the control managed by HEIDENHAIN NC software Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN NC software Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN NC Kernel Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN PLC software Number or name of the PLC software managed by your machine tool builder Feature Content Level FCL Development level of the software installed on the control see Feature content level upgrade functions on page 7 MOD Functions il 15 3 Entering Code Numbers Application The TNC requires a code number for the following functions Select user parameters 123 Configuring an Ethernet card NET123 Enable special functions for 555343 Q parameter programming HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 15 3 Entering Code Numbers o il 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces Serial interfaces on the TNC 320 The TNC 320 automatically uses the LSV2 transmission protocol for serial data transfer The LSV2 protocol is permanent and cannot be changed except for setting the baud rate machine parameter baudRateLsv2 You can also specify another type of transmission interface The settings described below are therefore effective only for
5. 49 Prepare and measure tools 49 The tool table TOOL T 49 The pocket table TOOL_P TCH 50 1 6 Workpiece Setup 51 Select the correct operating mode 51 Clamp the workpiece 51 Workpiece alignment with 3 D touch probe software option Touch probe function 52 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe software option Touch probe function 53 1 7 Running the First Program 54 Select the correct operating mode 54 Choose the program you want to run 54 Start the program 54 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 13 il 2 1 The TNC 320 56 Programming HEIDENHAIN conversational and ISO formats 56 Compatibility 56 2 2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard 57 Visual display unit 57 Sets the screen layout 58 Operating panel 59 2 3 Operating Modes 60 Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel 60 Positioning with Manual Data Input 60 Programming and Editing 61 Test Run 61 Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block 62 2 4 Status Displays 63 General status display 63 Additional status displays 65 2 5 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels 71 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Function software option 71 HR electronic handwheels I2 14 3 1 Fundamentals 74 Position encoders and reference marks 74 Reference system 74 Reference system on mil
6. Abbreviations used PROJECTED PROPR PROMIN PROROT Projected Principal plane Minor plane Rotation PROMIN we Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Defining the machining plane with Euler angles EULER PLANE Application Euler angles define a machining plane through up to three rotations about the respectively tilted coordinate system The Swiss mathematician Leonhard Euler defined these angles When applied to the machine coordinate system they have the following meanings Precession angle Rotation of the coordinate system around the Z EULPR axis Nutation angle Rotation of the coordinate system around the X EULNU axis already shifted by the precession angle Rotation angle Rotation of the tilted machining plane around the EULROT tilted Z axis Before programming note the following The sequence of the rotations described above is independent of the active tool axis Parameter description for the positioning behavior See Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 342 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function j il orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function Input parameters PROJECTED NC block Rot angle main coordinate plane Rotary angle EULPR around the Z axis see figure at top right Please note Input range 180 0000 to 180 0000 The 0
7. MACHINE oK CANCEL INPUT PGM TIME 6 3 435 15 8 Displaying Operating Times soul Huizes ado HbulAeldsig g SL MOD Functions il 436 ae 12 100 4 100 ZO 26 70 g 020 g 7016 g 16 55 9 020 g 200 130 97252 o 025 a5 g 030 g o15 55 g 020 9 7202 4130 g 250 g 0156 55 CYA 9 016 55 CYA 9 200 430 g2 016 55 g0 9 016 55 Q 72 9 222 130 B77 g 242 45 g 242 35 D g 042 100 g 040 35 Q Or ables and Overviews 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters Application To enable you to set machine specific functions your machine tool builder can define which machine parameters are available as user parameters Furthermore your machine tool builder can integrate additional machine parameters which are not described in the following into the TNC A Refer to your machine manual If you are in the configuration editor for the user parameters you can change the display of the existing parameters In the default setting the parameters are displayed with short explanatory texts To display the actual system names of the parameters press the key for the screen layout and then the SHOW SYSTEM NAME soft key Follow the same procedure to return to the standard display The parameter values are entered in the configuration editor Each parameter object has a name e g CfgDisplayLanguage that gives information about the parameters it contains E
8. activate the tilted working plane function for Manual Operation mode If the tilted working plane function Is not active for Manual Operation mode the original coordinate system Is effective M118 also functions in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation If M118 is active the MANUAL TRAVERSE function is not available after a program interruption 308 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction M140 Standard behavior In the program run modes the TNC moves the tool as defined in the part program Behavior with M140 With M140 MB move back you can enter a path in the direction of the tool axis for departure from the contour Input If you enter M140 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog and asks for the desired path of tool departure from the contour Enter the requested path that the tool should follow when departing the contour or press the MB MAX soft key to move to the limit of the traverse range In addition you can program the feed rate at which the tool traverses the entered path If you do not enter a feed rate the TNC moves the tool along the entered path at rapid traverse Effect M140 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M140 becomes effective at the start of the block Example NC blocks Block 250 Retract the tool 50 mm from the contour Block 251 Move the tool to the limit of the traverse range
9. k il 2 6 2 Fundamentals of Path oO Functions J Programming tool movements for workpiece LL machining a ara You create a part program by programming the path functions for the y 1e individual contour elements in sequence You usually do this by 0 entering the coordinates of the end points of the contour x t elements given in the production drawing The TNC calculates the actual path of the tool from these coordinates and from the tool data and radius compensation D The TNC moves all axes programmed in a single block simultaneously ne T Movement parallel to the machine axes The program block contains only one coordinate The TNC thus moves P the tool parallel to the programmed axis O Depending on the individual machine tool the part program is executed by movement of either the tool or the machine table on which the workpiece is clamped Nevertheless you always program Li path contours as if the tool moves and the workpiece remains N stationary Z Example 50 Block number L Path function straight line at X 100 Coordinate of the end point The tool retains the Y and Z coordinates and moves to the position X 100 See figure Movement in the main planes The program block contains two coordinates The TNC thus moves the tool in the programmed plane Example The tool retains the Z coordinate and moves in the XY plane to the position X 70 Y 50 see figure Three dimensional movement Th
10. 1 Spindle orientation directly by the NC 0 Function inactive 1 to 999 Number of the M function for spindle orientation Geometry filter for culling linear elements Type of stretch filter Off No filter active ShortCut Omit individual points on a polygon Average The geometry filter smoothes corners Maximum distance of the filtered to the unfiltered contour 0 to 10 mm The filtered points lie within this tolerance to the resulting new path Maximum length of the path as a result of filtering 0 to 1000 mm Length over which geometry filtering is active 444 Tables and Overviews il Settings for the NC editor Generate backup files TRUE Generate backup file after editing NC programs FALSE Do not generate backup file after editing NC programs Behavior of the cursor after deletion of lines TRUE Cursor is placed on the preceding line after deletion ITNC behavior FALSE Cursor is placed on the following line after deletion Behavior of the cursor on the first or last line TRUE Cursor jumps from end to beginning of program FALSE Cursor does not jump from end to beginning of program Line break with multiline blocks ALL Always display all lines ACT Only display the lines of the active block completely NO Only display all lines when block is edited Activate help TRUE Always display help graphics during input FALSE Only display help graphics if HELP was activated by pressing the key Behavior of the soft key row after
11. Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes Reset M114 Feed rate for rotary tables in mm min Reset M116 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pre calculate radius compensated contour LOOK AHEAD Contour filter Shortest path traverse of rotary axes Reset M126 Retain the position of the tool tip when positioning the tilted axes TCPM Reset M126 Within the positioning block Points are referenced to the untilted coordinate system Exact stop at nontangential contour transitions when positioning with rotary axes Reset M134 Feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution Reset M136 Selection of tilted axes Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction Suppress touch probe monitoring Delete modal program information Delete basic rotation Option 08 X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 lt x KX X X X option 09 with MC 420 X XIXI XJ X M144 M145 M148 M149 M150 M200 M204 Compensating the machine s kinematics configuration for ACTUAL NOMINAL positions at end of block Reset M144 Retract the tool automatically from the contour at NC stop Reset M148 Suppress limit switch message Laser cutting functions HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 X option 09 with MC 420 k i Comparison Touch probe cycles in the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes Touch probe table for managing 3 D touch probes Calibrating the ef
12. For more information See USB devices on the TNC FCL 2 function on page 109 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 th the AA iii ing wi 3 4 Work j il th the rila nager ing wi 3 4 Work Data transfer to or from an external data medium Before you can transfer data to an external data medium you must set up the data interface see Setting the Data Interfaces on page 422 Depending on the data transfer software you use problems can occur occasionally when you transmit data over a serial interface They can be overcome by repeating the transmission Call the file manager PGM MGT Select the screen layout for data transfer press the WINDOW soft key In the left half of the screen the TNC shows all files in the current directory In the right half of the screen it shows all files saved in the root directory TNC WINDOW Use the arrow keys to highlight the file s that you want to transfer If you wish to copy from the TNC to the external data medium move the highlight in the left window to the file to be transferred Moves the highlight up and down within a window Moves the highlight from the left to the right window and vice versa 106 Program run full sequence Programming 1GB H TNC nc_progN Cast H TNC N File name Bytes Status ft File name Bytes Status tncguide mp 123 h 123 h bak circle sc Fehler_0a BHB_Cycle xml
13. If you want to use TNCremoNT to transfer the CHM files German TNC tncguide de English TNC tncguide en Czech TNC tncguide cs French TNC tncguide fr Italian TNC tncguide it Spanish TNC tncguide es Portuguese TNC tncguide pt Swedish TNC tncguide sv Danish TNC tncguide da Finnish TNC tncguide fi Dutch TNC tncguide nl Polish TNC tncguide pl Hungarian TNC tncguide hu Russian TNC tncguide ru Chinese simplified TNC tncguide zh Chinese traditional TNC tncguide zh tw 130 Programming Programming Aids il 5 1 Entering Data 5 1 Entering Tool Related Data Feed rate F The feed rate F is the speed in millimeters per minute or inches per minute at which the tool center point moves The maximum feed rates can be different for the individual axes and are set in machine parameters Input You can enter the feed rate in the TOOL CALL block and in every positioning block see Creating the program blocks with the path function keys on page 157 In millimeter programs you enter the feed rate In mm min and in inch programs for reasons of resolution in 1 10 inch min Rapid traverse If you wish to program rapid traverse enter F MAX To enter FMAX press the ENT key or the FMAX soft key when the dialog question FEED RATE F appears on the control s screen program the corresponding numerical value e g F30000 Unlike FMAX this rapid traverse remains in effect not only
14. Interrupt the graphic simulation if necessary Shift the soft key row in the Test Run mode or in a Program Run mode respectively until the soft key for detail enlargement appears S Shift the soft key row until the soft key for the detail magnification functions appears Select the functions for detail magnification Press the corresponding soft key to select the workpiece surface see table below To reduce or magnify the blank form press and hold the MINUS or PLUS soft key respectively Restart the test run or program run by pressing the START soft key RESET START returns the workpiece blank to its original state Select the left right workpiece surface is oO oy g Select the front back workpiece surface e Select the top bottom workpiece surface PE vi iQ Shift the sectional plane to reduce or magnify the blank form Select the isolated detail m DETAIL J ie control forgets previously simulated machining operations The TNC then displays machined areas as unmachined areas After anew workpiece detail magnification is selected the The TNC displays the selected workpiece side for each axis and the coordinates of the remaining form during a detail magnification 398 my EE 00 06 19 ple eL Beo Test Run and Program Run il Repeating graphic simulation A part program can be graphically simulated as often as desired either with the
15. Programming graphics Depiction of the traverse paths of an individual NC block after the graphic was deleted by soft key True to scale display of grid Editing contour subprograms in SLII cycles with AUTO DRAW ON Moving the zoom window Programming minor axes Syntax FUNCTION PARAXCOMP Define the behavior of the display and the paths of traverse Syntax FUNCTION PARAXMODE Define the assignment of the parallel axes to be traversed HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Call via ERR key Cause and corrective action cannot be displayed while highlight is on the block Help menu is closed when the operating mode is switched Help menu is closed when F12 Is used for switching Are collected in a list Every error message even if it is displayed more than once must be acknowledged the Delete all function is available Log and powerful filter functions errors keystrokes are available Available No service file is created when the system crashes Not available Not available Not available Works with max 9999 blocks can be set via config datum Not possible after pressing CLEAR GRAPHIC soft key all previously defined NC blocks are displayed Available If error messages occur the cursor is on the CYCL CALL block in the main program Repeat function not available Available Available Call via HELP key Pop up window shows cause and corrective action Operating mode switchover is not allowed key is non
16. Use the axis direction keys to pre position the touch probe to a position near the first contact point Select the probing direction via soft key Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to Its starting point Use the axis direction keys to pre position the touch probe to a position near the second contact point Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to Its starting point Then the TNC shows the measured basic rotation Press SET BASIC ROTATION soft key to select the displayed value as the active rotation Press the END soft key to exit the menu Further information on this topic MDI operating mode See Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations on page 388 Workpiece alignment See Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with 3 D Touch Probe Touch Probe Function Software Option on page 373 52 First Steps with the TNC 320 il Datum setting with 3 D touch probe software option Touch probe function Insert the 3 D touch probe In the MDI mode run a TOOL CALL block containing the tool axis and then return to the Manual Operation mode TOUCH PROBE ATA PROBING E DATUM SET Select the probing functions The TNC displays the available functions in the soft key row Set the datum at a workpiece corner for example P
17. ignmen 12 7 Compensating Workpiece Misal Saving the basic rotation in the preset table After the probing process enter the preset number in which the TNC is to save the active basic rotation in the Number in table input box Press the ENTRY IN PRESET TABLE soft key to save the basic rotation in the preset table Displaying a basic rotation The angle of the basic rotation appears after ROTATION ANGLE whenever PROBING ROT is selected The TNC also displays the rotation angle in the additional status display STATUS POS In the status display a symbol is shown for a basic rotation whenever the TNC is moving the axes according to a basic rotation Canceling a basic rotation Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key Enter a rotation angle of zero and confirm with the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key Terminate the probe function by pressing the END soft key 374 Manual operation Programming aL WE 3 ation Rotation angle Angle of probed surface 1st meas point 1st axis 1st meas point 2nd axis 2nd meas point 1st axis 2nd meas point 2nd axis ATi Number in table 0 S IST 12 38 57 F OVR X 10 857 Y 108 452 Z 9 749 E 0 000 S 85 860 RE aciL H ok T 3 Z 6 F mm min Our 57 8 M 5 b X Yt ENTRY IN SET Y PRESET BASIC i END TABLE ROTATION Manual Operation and Setup il 12 8 Datum Setting with 3 D Touch Probe Touch Probe
18. w lt DA L Z 20 R FMAX M3 Q201 15 DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG 0 1 PLUNGING DEPTH Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP 7SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 72ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH R FMAX M99 Q200 Q2 1 7TOOL PATH OVERLAP Q3 8 s ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q4 8 ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR Q5 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q6 2 7 SET UP CLEARANCE Q7 50 CLEARANCE HEIGHT Q8 0 ROUNDING RADIUS ROTATIONAL DIRECTION ay e F E Ea DIAGNOSIS 2 43 1 3 Programming the First 1 3 Programming the First a Call the menu for special functions FCT contour gt Display the functions for point machining T Select the pattern definition POINT Select point entry Enter the coordinates of the 4 points and confirm each with the ENT key After entering the fourth point save the block with the END key Display the menu for defining the cycle call 07 7 a CYCLE Run the drilling cycle on the define pattern gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX Miscellaneous function M Switch on the spindle and coolant e g M13 Confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block i Retract the tool Press the orange axis key Z in order to get clear in the tool axis and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Confirm with the ENT key gt Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do
19. 296 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il 9 2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control Spindle and Coolant Overview Mo Stop program run Spindle STOP Coolant OFF M1 Optional program STOP Spindle STOP Coolant OFF M2 Stop program run Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Go to block 1 Clear the status display dependent on the clearMode machine parameter M3 Spindle ON clockwise M4 Spindle ON counterclockwise M5 Spindle STOP M6 Tool change Spindle STOP Stop program run Ms Coolant ON Mg Coolant OFF M13 Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON M30 Same as M2 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 297 9 2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program tuto Spindle and Coolant 9 3 Miscellaneouslffinctions for Coordinate Data 9 3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 Scale reference point On the scale a reference mark indicates the position of the scale reference point Machine datum The machine datum is required for the following tasks Defining the limits of traverse software limit switches Moving to machine referenced positions Such as tool change positions Setting the workpiece datum The distance in each axis from the scale reference point to the machine datum is defined by the machine tool builder in a machine parameter Standard behavior The TNC references coordinates to the workpiece datum see Datum
20. Delete network connection Automatically establish network connection whenever the TNC is switched on The TNC marks the Auto column if the connection is established automatically Use the PING function to test your network connection If you press the NETWORK INFO soft key the TNC displays the current network settings 108 MOUNT DEVICE UNMOUNT DEVICE AUTO MOUNT NETWORK INFO Programming Fundamentals File Management USB devices on the TNC FCL 2 function Backing up data from or loading onto the TNC is especially easy with USB devices The TNC supports the following USB block devices Floppy disk drives with FAT VFAT file system Memory sticks with the FAT VFAT file system Hard disks with the FAT VFAT file system CD ROM drives with the Joliet ISO 9660 Tile system The TNC automatically detects these types of USB devices when connected The TNC does not support USB devices with other file systems such as NTFS The TNC displays the USB TNC does not support device error message when such a device is connected device error message if you connect a USB hub In this The TNC also displays the USB TNC does not support case simply acknowledge the message with the CE key In theory you should be able to connect all USB devices with the file systems mentioned above to the TNC It may happen that a USB device is not identified correctly by the control In such cases use another USB device The USB
21. HEIDENHAIN HEIDENHAIN Manual operation Programming User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational TNC 320 NC Software 340 551 04 340 554 04 English en 9 2009 Controls of the TNC Keys on visual display unit Split screen layout Toggle display between machining and programming modes Soft keys for selecting functions on screen Shift between soft key rows Machine operating modes Manual Operation Electronic Handwheel Positioning with Manual Data Input Program Run Single Block Program Run Full Sequence Programming modes Programming and Editing Test Run Program file management TNC functions Select or delete programs and Tiles external data transfer PGM MGT Define program call select datum and point tables PGM CALL Select MOD functions Display help text for NC error messages call TNCguide HELP Display all current error messages Show pocket calculator Navigation keys Move highlight GOTO LO Potentiometer for feed rate and spindle speed Go directly to blocks cycles and parameter functions Cycles subprograms and program section repeats Define touch probe cycles TOUCH PROBE CYCL 0 0 E DEF CALL LBL LBL SET CALL STOP Define and call cycles Enter and call labels for subprogramming and program section repeats Program stop in a program i Tool functions Coordinate axes and numbers Entering
22. Operating times 435 Option number 420 Output of data to the server 244 P Parametric programming See Q parameter programming Part families 226 Path 93 Path contours Cartesian coordinates Circular arc with tangential connection 174 Circular path around circle center CC 171 Circular path with defined radius 172 Overview 166 Straight line 167 Polar coordinates Circular arc with tangential connection 182 Circular path around pole CC a 181 Overview 179 Straight line 180 Path functions Fundamentals 152 Circles and circular arcs 155 Pre position 156 Pin layout for data interfaces 446 Plan view 395 PLANE function 325 Automatic positioning 342 Axis angle definition 340 Euler angle definition 333 Incremental definition 339 Points definition 337 Positioning behavior 342 Projection angle definition 331 Reset 328 Selection of possible solutions 344 Space angle definition 329 Vector definition 335 P PLC and NC synchronization 255 Pocket table 142 Polar coordinates Approach depart contour 160 Fundamentals 76 Programming 179 Positioning With a tilted working plane 300 with manual data input MDI 388 Preset table 360 Confirming probed values 369 Principal axes 75 Probe cycles See User s Manual for Touch Probe Cycles Probing cycles Program Editing 85 Open new
23. Select the tool table for the test run You only need to execute this step if you have not activated a tool table in the Test Run mode Press the PGM MGT key the TNC displays the file in a D MGT management Press the SELECT TYPE soft key The TNC shows a TVPE soft key menu for selection of the file type to be displayed u x O D r r Press the SHOW ALL soft key The TNC shows all saved Tiles in the right window Move the highlight to the left onto the directories Move the highlight to the TNC directory Move the highlight to the right onto the files Move the highlight to the file TOOL T active tool table and load with the ENT key TOOL T receives that status S and is therefore active for the Test Run Press the END key Leave the file manager Sees Further information on this topic Tool management See Entering tool data in the table on page 136 Testing programs See Test Run on page 403 46 RESET START First Steps with the TNC 320 il Choose the program you want to test Press the PGM MGT key the TNC displays the file MGT management Press the LAST FILES soft key The TNC opens a O pop up window with the most recently selected files Use the arrow keys to select the program that you want to test Load with the ENT key Further information on this topic Selecting a program See Working with the File Manager
24. When you create a text file use the following formatting functions P Define output format for texts and variables between the quotation marks 9 3LF Define format for Q parameter 9 characters in total incl decimal point of which 3 are after the decimal point Long Floating decimal number S Format for text variable Separation character between output format and parameter i End of block character HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 tt Additional Functions 7 il EE Additional Functions CALL_PATH M_CLOSE ALL_DISPLAY MM_DISPLAY INCH_DISPLAY L_ENGLISH L_GERMAN L CZECH L_FRENCH L_ITALIAN L_SPANISH L_SWEDISH L_DANISH L_FINNISH L_DUTCH L_POLISH L_PORTUGUE L_HUNGARIA L_RUSSIAN L_SLOVENIAN L_ALL HOUR MIN SEC 242 The following functions allow you to include the following additional information in the protocol log Tile Gives the path for the NC program where you will find the FN16 function Example Measuring program S CALL_PATH Closes the file to which you are writing with FN16 Example M_CLOSE Outputs Q parameter values regardless of MM INCH setting of the MOD function Outputs Q parameter values in millimeters if MM display is set in the MOD function Converts O parameter values to inches if INCH display is set in the MOD function Display text only in English conversational Display text only in German conversational Display text only in Czech conversational Display text
25. X and Y coordinates of an auxiliary point near a straight line Distance of auxiliary point to straight line gt PDY Xand Y coordinates of an auxiliary point near a circular arc PDY Distance of auxiliary point to circular arc Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 T O J O b Oo O S O oe hom 0 O gt O lt O S n O Q hon 0 hom e oe o Q eb ka LL xX LL N n Q a o Q com re 0 co i i Relative data ming Data whose values are based on another contour element are called relative data The soft keys and program words for entries begin with the letter R for Relative The figure at right shows the entries that should be programmed as relative data The coordinates and angles for relative data are always programmed in incremental dimensions You must also enter the block number of the contour element on which the data are based O The block number of the contour element on which the relative data are based can only be located up to 64 positioning blocks before the block in which you program the reference vanced Program Features Software Option If you delete a block on which relative data are based the TNC will display an error message Change the program first before you delete the block Data relative to block N End point coordinates Cartesian Coordinates re
26. 106 F FCL 420 FCL function 7 Feature content level 7 Feed rate 356 Changing 357 for rotary axes M116 346 Input possibilities 83 Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 304 Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution M136 305 F File File File Creating 98 management 93 Calling 95 Copying a file 99 Deleting a file 101 Directories 93 Copying 100 Creating 98 External data transfer 106 File Creating 98 File name 92 File selection 96 File type 91 File renaming 104 Overview of functions 94 Protecting a file 105 Renaming a file 104 Tagging files 103 status 95 FK free contour programming Circular paths 192 Input possibilities Circle data 195 FK Programming 187 Dialog initiation 190 Fundamentals 187 Graphics 189 Input possibilities Auxiliary points 197 Closed contours 196 Direction and length of contour elements 194 End points 193 Relative data 198 Straight lines 191 i Index Index F FK programming Input possibilities FN14 ERROR Displaying error messages 236 FN15 PRINT Formatted output of texts 241 FN18 SYSREAD Read system data 245 FN19 PLC Transfer values to the PLC 204 FN20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization 255 FN23 CIRCLE DATA Calculating a circle from 3 points 231 FN24 CI
27. 1234 In addition you define which columns are transferred to the result set SQL SELECT SQL Commit SOL Update 5A uaa Ma e You can lock the selected rows Other processes can then read these rows but cannot change the table entries You should always lock the selected rows when you are going to make changes SQL SELECT FOR UPDATE Dateiver SQL Server waltung SOL Rollback SOL Insert 3 Read rows from the result set change rows or insert new rows Transfer one row of the result set into the Q parameters of your NC program SQL FETCH Prepare changes in the O parameters and transfer one row from the result set SQL UPDATE Prepare new table row in the O parameters and transfer into the result set as a new row SQL INSERT 4 Conclude transaction f changes insertions were made the data from the result set Is placed in the table file The data is now saved in the file Any locks are canceled and the result set is released SQL COMMIT f table entries were not changed or inserted only read access any locks are canceled and the result set is released SQL ROLLBACK WITHOUT INDEX Multiple transactions can be edited at the same time of read accesses Only this guarantees that changes insertions are not lost that locks are canceled and that result sets are released You must conclude a transaction even if it consists solely HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 259 8 9 Acc
28. 16 3 Technical Information Coordinate transformation Tilting the working plane Interpolation Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 451 il 16 3 Technical Information Positions coordinates circle radii chamfer lengths Tool numbers Tool names Delta values for tool compensation Spindle speeds Feed rates Dwell time in Cycle 9 Thread pitch in various cycles Angle of spindle orientation Angle for polar coordinates rotation tilting the working plane Polar coordinate angle for helical interpolation CP Datum numbers in Cycle 7 Scaling factor in Cycles 11 and 26 Miscellaneous functions M Q parameter numbers Q parameter values Surface normal vectors N and T with 3 D compensation Labels LBL for program jumps Labels LBL for program jumps Number of program section repeats REP Error number with Q parameter function FN14 452 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 5 4 places before and after the decimal point mm O to 32 767 9 5 1 16 characters enclosed by quotation marks with TOOL CALL Permitted special characters amp 99 9999 to 99 9999 2 4 mm O to 99 999 999 5 3 rom O to 99 999 999 5 3 mm min or mm tooth or mm rev O to 3600 000 4 3 s 99 9999 to 99 9999 2 4 mm O to 360 0000 3 4 360 0000 to 360 0000 3 4 5 400 0000 to 5 400 0000 4 4 O to 2999 4 0 0 000 001 to 99 999 999 2 6 O to
29. 80 Structure 79 Structuring 115 Program call Any desired program as subroutine 209 Program defaults 315 Program management see File management Program name See File management File name Program Run Resuming after an interruption 409 Program run Executing 406 Interrupting 407 Mid program startup 410 Optional block skip 414 Overview 405 Program sections copying 88 Programming graphics 189 Programming tool movements 82 Program section repeat 208 Projection in three planes 396 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Q Q parameter programming 222 273 Additional functions 235 Basic arithmetic assign add subtract multiply divide square root 227 Circle calculations 231 If then decisions 232 Programming notes 224 275 276 277 279 281 Trigonometric functions 229 Q parameters Checking 234 Formatted output 241 Local OL parameters 222 Nonvolatile QR parameters 222 Preassigned 282 Transferring values to the PLG 20 204 256 257 R Radius compensation 147 Input 149 Outside corners inside corners 150 Rapid traverse 132 Reference points crossing over 350 Reference system 75 Replacing texts 90 Retraction from the contour 309 Returning to the contour 412 Rotary axis Reducing display M94 348 Shorter path traverse M126 347 S Screen layout 58 Screen output of data 244 Sear
30. Active miscellaneous functions M M tab STAT h No direct List of the active M functions with fixed meaning r selection 20 CYCL DEF 11 1 ack 0 8805 possible 22 CALL LBL 15 REPS 23 PLANE RESET STAY 24 LBL 25 END PGM STAT1 MM lays List of the active M functions that are adapted by your machine manufacturer S IST 12 44 57 F OVR elie END PGM 33 747 72 578 Z 9 754 S Ic 0 000 S 94 680 acr A ok T 3 2 mm min Our 57 8 M5 STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS STATUS OF COORD OVERVIEW STATUS SER Q PARAM 5 N ad ad Y T N 68 Introduction Positions and coordinates POS tab STAT h N gt amp END PGM _Soft key Meaning O o o A Ce a e C 0 000 S 94 680 am T Tool number and name E a n oroe we EEEP STATUS 2 RT Number and name of a replacement tool m a a a Vcoieece UUO OVERVIEW STATUS is Q PARAM Tool axis me Type of position display e g actual position A7 LBL is overview Pem ve cve m Pos fo POS 19 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING RFNOML x pened A 20 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 0 9995 ba Zz 7 500 y 22 CALL LBL 15 REPS c 0 000 Tilt angle of the working plane S kt M V 25 END PGM STAT1 MM el eager gt 25 00000 ad Angle of a basic rotation a eesic rotat 1 64750 i Information on tools TOOL tab ox S I8T 12 44 V 57 F OVR qF
31. Departing on a circular arc tangentially connecting the contour and a straight line DEP LCT 165 6 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates 166 Overview of path functions 166 Straight line L 167 Inserting a chamfer between two straight lines 168 Corner rounding RND 169 Circle center CCl 170 Circular path C around circle center CC 171 Circular path CR with defined radius 172 Circular path CT with tangential connection 174 6 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates 179 Overview 179 Zero point for polar coordinates pole CC 180 Straight line LP 180 Circular path CP around pole CC 181 Circular path CTP with tangential connection 182 Helical interpolation 183 18 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Advanced Programming Features Software Option Fundamentals 187 Graphics during FK programming 189 Initiating the FK dialog 190 Pole for FK programming 191 Free programming of straight lines 191 Free programming of circular arcs 192 Input possibilities 193 Auxiliary points 197 Relative data 198 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 187 7 1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 206 Labels 206 7 2 Subprograms 207 Operating sequence 207 Programming notes 207 Programming a subprogram 207 Calling a subprogram 207 7 3 Program Section Repeats 20
32. E To terminate the block press the END key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 149 il 5 3 Tool Compensation Radius compensation Machining corners E Outside corners If you program radius compensation the TNC moves the tool around outside corners on a transitional arc If necessary the TNC reduces the feed rate at outside corners to reduce machine stress for example at very great changes of direction E Inside corners The TNC calculates the intersection of the tool center paths at inside corners under radius compensation From this point it then starts the next contour element This prevents damage to the workpiece The permissible tool radius therefore is limited by the geometry of the programmed contour 150 Programming Tools Programming Programming Contours i a J a Q gt O 8 6 1 Tool Movements Path functions A workpiece contour is usually composed of several contour elements such as straight lines and circular arcs With the path functions you can program the tool movements for straight lines and circular arcs FK free contour programming Advanced programming features software option If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC and the dimensions given are not sufficient for creating a part program you can program the workpiece contour with the FK free contour programming The TNC calculates the missing data With FK programming you also program tool movements for
33. Exiting the MOD functions Close the MOD functions with the END key or END soft key 418 MODE MODE Code number Control model TNC320 NC software Developer Version NC kernel C_NCK_MLST4_484 PLC software Basis NCK V 2 61 Feature Content Level JL ee USER LICENSE DIAGNOSIS PARAMETER INFO MOD Functions il Overview of MOD functions The functions available depend on the momentarily selected operating mode bia ae Programming i l Display software numbers ma l Y Position display 1 ACTL i S 85 860 1 Enter code number no a z ange eE mm hol R 3 0000 T m Machine specific user parameters if applicable c hae EEE Te 0 0000 4 4 Control model TNC32 M110 z Legal information SNe settusre Developer version bu a PLC software Basis NCK V 2 01 2 Feature Content Level Test run F Display software numbers meoo po E m a z DIAGNOSIS Show active tool table in the test run 0 S IST 12 38 l 57 F O0VR Show active datum table in the test run oo 2 POSITION MACHINE OK CANCEL INPUT PGM TIME FE In all other modes Display software numbers Select position display Unit of measurement mm inches Programming language for MDI Select the axes for actual position capture Display operating times e c 2 po Q am LL O S O ad Q Q Y we LO q HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 419 7 D 2 5
34. Favorites management Configuration of column structure Soft key arrangement Skip block function Selecting a tool from the table Using the cursor in tables Programming special functions with the SPEC FCT key Programming approach and departure motions with the APPR DEP key Pressing the END hard key while the CYCLE DEF and TOUCH PROBE menus are active HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Input via screen keyboard Not permitted Available Available Available Available Available Available Opens the Select file pop up window Not available Not available Not available Slightly different Insert Remove by soft key Selection via split screen menu After editing a value the horizontal arrow keys can be used for positioning within the column Pressing the key opens a soft key row as a submenu To exit the submenu press the SPEC FCT key again then the TNC shows the last active soft key row Pressing the key opens a soft key row as a submenu To exit the submenu press the APPR DEP key again then the TNC shows the last active soft key row Terminates the editing process and calls the file manager Input via ASCII keyboard Permitted Not available Not available Not available Not available Available Available Synchronizes the cursor Available Available Available Slightly different Insert Remove with ASCII keyboard Selection in a pop up window After editing a value the horizontal arrow keys can be
35. HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 1 6 Workpiece e 1 7 Running the First Program 1 7 Running the First Program Select the correct operating mode You can run programs either in the Single Block or the Full Sequence mode Press the operating mode key The TNC goes into the Program Run Single Block mode and the TNC executes the program block by block You have to confirm each block with the NC key Press the operating mode key The TNC goes into the Program Run Full Sequence mode and the TNC executes the program after NC start up to a program break or to the end of the program Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC See Operating Modes on page 60 Running programs See Program Run on page 405 Choose the program you want to run Press the PGM MGT key the TNC displays the file steal management Lest Press the LAST FILES soft key The TNC opens a pop Le up window with the most recently selected files If desired use the arrow keys to select the program that you want to run Load with the ENT key Further information on this topic File management See Working with the File Manager on page 93 Start the program Press the NC start button The TNC executes the G active program Further information on this topic Running programs See Program Run on page 405 54 full sequence BEGIN PGM 113 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X Y 0 2 20 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 FMAX ee DEF 4 a P
36. In the preceding and subsequent contour elements both The corner point is cut off by the rounding arc and is not part of the contour A feed rate programmed in the RND block is effective only in this RND block After the RND block the previous feed rate becomes effective again 6 4 Path vontours caesien Coordinates You can also use an RND block for a tangential contour approach HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 169 il 6 4 Path contours cM sian Coordinates Circle center CCI You can define a circle center for circles that you have programmed with the C key circular path C This is done in the following ways E Entering the Cartesian coordinates of the circle center in the working plane or E Using the circle center defined in an earlier block or E Capturing the coordinates with the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key cc Enter the coordinates for the circle center or a If you want to use the last programmed position enter no coordinates Example NC blocks The program blocks 10 and 11 do not refer to the illustration Duration of effect The circle center definition remains in effect until a new circle center is programmed You can also define a circle center for the secondary axes U Vand W Entering the circle center incrementally If you enter the circle center with incremental coordinates you have programmed it relative to the last programmed position of the tool The only effect of CC is to define a position as circ
37. It then moves on a straight line to the end point Py The arc is tangentially connected both to the last contour element and to the line from Py to Py The radius R uniquely defines the arc Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LCT soft key DEP LCT gt Enter the coordinates of the end point Py Radius R of the circular arc Enter R as a positive value Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Last contour element Pe with radius compensation Center angle 180 Arc radius 8 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program Last contour element Pe with radius compensation Coordinates Py arc radius 8 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program 165 Q lt ao gt O Pwr Oo Q 6 4 Path Contours_citsian Coordinates 6 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Overview of path functions Line L Straight line Coordinates of the end Page 167 points of the straight line Chamfer CHF Chamfer between two Chamfer side length Page 168 oC straight lines Circle Center CC g None Coordinates of the circle Page 170 center or pole Circle C Circular arc around a circle Coordinates of the arc end Page 171 center CC to an arc end point point direction of rotation Circular arc CR CR Circular arc with a certain Coordinates of the arc end Page 172 a radius point arc radius direction of rotation
38. O to 0 9999 mm Cutting direction of the tool for measuring the tool during rotation For tool length measurement Tool offset between stylus center and tool center Default setting No value entered offset tool radius Tool radius measurement tool offset in addition to offsetToolAxis 114104 between upper surface of stylus and lower surface of tool Default O Permissible deviation from tool length L for breakage detection It the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Number of teeth Wear tolerance length Wear tolerance radius Wear tolerance Radius 2 Cutting direction M3 Tool offset radius Tool offset length Breakage tolerance length Breakage tolerance radius Programming Tools Editing tool tables The tool table that is active during execution of the part program is Tool table editing designated TOOL T and must be saved in the directory TNC table Tool name Programming TOOL T can only be edited in one of the machine operating modes AEG e Other tool tables that are to be archived or used for test runs are given any other names with the extension T By default for Test Run and Programming modes the TNC uses the simtool t table which is also stored in the t
39. Page 98 Page 101 Page 101 Page 103 Page 104 Page 105 Page 105 Page 108 Page 105 Page 104 Page 100 Programming Fundamentals File Management il Calling the file manager th the nese 3 4 Work fat Wecauencs Programming Sarr Press the PGM MGT key The TNC displays the file 1GB H MGT management window see figure for default setting WEG ne_pros aside ide eo i 5X TES Tt File name Bytes Status Date Time If the TNC displays a different screen layout press Auto Tast EEA the WINDOW soft key a on acces Fk mm _149 H 418 24 06 2009 12 39 34 D FREE CONTOUR 1985 24 06 2009 09 38 19 PLANE cyel sh 451 oa ea 2e09 13 15 44 T any a oe eas E The narrow window on the left shows the available drives and ne resi 152 24 06 2008 12 38 01 tnceguide STAT H 472 22 06 2009 13 35 20 directories Drives designate devices with which data are stored or STATA H 5203 22 05 2009 13 38 34 transferred One drive is the hard disk of the TNC Other drives are the interfaces RS232 Ethernet which can be used for example for connecting a personal computer A directory is always identified by a DIAGNOSIS folder symbol to the left and the directory name to the right 15 file s 195 5 MB vacant al subdirectories are shown to the right of and below their parent mpa p u a directories A triangle in front of the folder symbol indicates that t
40. Programming Programming Aids il Detailed error messages FK programming Illegal positioning block The TNC displays possible causes of the error and suggestions for Programming solving the problem 402 0009 ERROR FK programming Illegal positioning block Open the error window Information on the error cause and corrective action INFO Position the highlight on the error message and press the MORE INFO soft key The TNC opens a window with information on the error cause and corrective Messages Cause E AAN EE A UOES eSASMe DESoAS ELTA aStion Consonants Lu exclusively perpendicular to the FK plane Leave Info Press the MORE INFO soft key again Bron eater lhe E on deletes tices postion ing blocks Geometry functions that are defined over the gray contouring keys and O moue Geese ae in the Working plane are illegal exception RND gt CHF INTERNAL INFO soft key 2 The INTERNAL INFO soft key supplies information on the error MORE INTERNAL LoG more cymes vette ee END message This information is only required if servicing is needed O BNS Open the error window ea Detailed information about the error message INFO Position the highlight on the error message and press the INTERNAL INFO soft key The TNC opens a window with internal information about the error To leave Details press the INTERNAL INFO soft key again HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 121 4 6 a Messages Clearing
41. SYS DATUM READ me Page 245 Read system data READ FN 19 PLC Eg Page 254 Send values to the PLC PLc FN 20 WAIT FOR Fuze Page 255 Synchronize NC and PLC FOR FN 29 PLC EA Page 256 Transfer up to eight values to the PLC PLC LIST FN 37 EXPORT Ez Page 257 Export local Q parameters or OS EXPORT parameters into a calling program HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 tt Additional Functions j il E Additional Functions FN 14 ERROR Displaying error messages With the function FN 14 ERROR you can call messages under program control The messages are predefined by the machine tool builder or by HEIDENHAIN Whenever the TNC comes to a block with FN 14 in the Program Run or Test Run mode it interrupts the program run and displays a message The program must then be restarted The error numbers are listed in the table below 0 299 FN 14 Error code 0 299 300 999 Machine dependent dialog 1000 1099 Internal error messages see table at right Example NC block The TNC is to display the text stored under error number 254 Error message predefined by HEIDENHAIN 1000 Spindle 1001 Tool axis is missing 1002 Tool radius too small 1003 Tool radius too large 1004 Range exceeded 1005 Start position incorrect 1006 ROTATION not permitted 1007 SCALING FACTOR not permitted 1008 MIRROR IMAGE not permitted 1009 Datum shift not permitted 1010 Feed rate is missing 1011 Input value incorrect 1012 Incorrect sign 1013 Entered angle not
42. Values from the PLC Tool and spindle data Data on operating status Results of measurements from touch probe cycles etc The TNC saves the preassigned Q parameters Q108 Q114 and Q115 Q117 in the unit of measure used by the active program between Q100 and 0199 QS100 and QS199 as calculation parameters in NC programs Otherwise you might receive undesired results Do not use preassigned O parameters or OS parameters Values from the PLC Q100 to Q107 The TNC uses the parameters Q100 to Q107 to transfer values from the PLC to an NC program Active tool radius 0108 The active value of the tool radius is assigned to Q108 Q108 is calculated from Tool radius R tool table or TOOL DEF block Delta value DR from the tool table Delta value DR from the TOOL CALL block The TNC remembers the current tool radius even if the power Is interrupted 282 Programming Q Parameters il Tool axis 0109 The value of Q109 depends on the current tool axis No tool axis defined Q109 1 X axis Q109 0 Y axis 0109 1 Z axis Q9109 2 U axis Q109 6 V axis Q109 7 W axis Q109 8 Spindle status Q110 The value of the parameter Q110 depends on the M function last programmed for the spindle No spindle status defined Q110 1 M3 Spindle ON clockwise Q110 0 M4 Spindle ON counterclockwise Q110 1 M5 after M3 Q110 2 M5 after M4 OLto 3 Coolant on off Q111 M8 Coolant ON O111 1 M9 Coolant OFF 0111
43. axis is the X axis Tilting angle tool axis Tilting angle EULNUT of the coordinate system around the X axis shifted by the precession angle see figure at center right Please note Input range 0 to 180 0000 The 0 axis is the Z axis ROT angle of the tilted plane Rotation EULROT of the tilted coordinate system around the tilted Z axis corresponds to a rotation with Cycle 10 ROTATION Use the rotation angle to simply define the direction of the X axis in the tilted machining plane see figure at bottom right Please note Input range 0 to 360 0000 The 0 axis is the X axis Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 342 Abbreviations used EULER EULPR EULNU EULROT Swiss mathematician who defined these angles Precession angle angle describing the rotation of the coordinate system around the Z axis Nutation angle angle describing the rotation of the coordinate system around the X axis shifted by the precession angle Rotation angle angle describing the rotation of the tilted machining plane around the tilted Z axis EULROT Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Defining the machining plane with two vectors VECTOR PLANE Application You can use the definition of a machining plane via two vectors if your CAD system can calculate the base vector and normal vector of the tilted machining plane A norma
44. e g FUNCTION PARAXMODE X Y W which the TNC is to use to execute the programmed traverse movements Proceed as follows for the definition Show the soft key row with special functions FCT ER Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS fu nctions Sees Select FUNCTION PARAX ane Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE FUNCTION Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE Define the axes for machining Move the principal axis and the parallel axis simultaneously If the PARAXMODE function is active the TNC uses the axes defined in the function to execute the programmed traverse movements If the TNC is to traverse a parallel axis simultaneously with the associated principal axis you can identify the respective axis by additionally entering the character amp The axis identified by the amp character then refers to the axis that is not defined in the PARAXMODE function HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Example NC block Example NC block 10 2 Working the Parallel Axes U V and W 10 2 Working ok the Parallel Axes U V and W FUNCTION PARAXMODE OFF Use the PARAXCOMP OFF function to switch off the parallel axis function The TNC then uses the principal axes defined by the machine manufacturer Proceed as follows for the definition Show the soft key row with special functions FCT eon Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS fu nections Snare Select FUNCTION PARAX m Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE FUNCTION Select FUNC
45. on page 93 Select the screen layout and the view Press the key for selecting the screen layout The TNC shows all available alternatives in the soft key row ProsRAN Press the PROGRAM GRAPHICS soft key In the GRAPHICS left half of the screen the TNC shows the program in the right half it shows the workpiece blank He Select the desired view via soft key Plan view Projection in three planes 3 D view ugg Further information on this topic Graphic functions See Graphics Advanced Graphic Features Software Option on page 394 Running a test run See Test Run on page 403 1 4 Graphically Testing the First Part Advanced Graphic Features Software HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Start the program test RESET Press the RESET START soft key The TNC START simulates the active program up to a programmed break or to the program end Q pe 6 While the simulation is running you can use the soft keys to change views ae Press the STOP soft key The TNC interrupts the test run ee Press the START soft key The TNC resumes the test run after a break Further information on this topic Running a test run See Test Run on page 403 Graphic functions See Graphics Advanced Graphic Features Software Option on page 394 1 4 Graphically Testing the First Part Advanced Graphic Features Soft 48 First Steps with the TNC 320 il 1 5 Tool Setup Select the correct operating mode Pr
46. 0 Overlap factor Q112 The overlap factor for pocket milling pocketOverlap is assigned to Q112 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 d Q Parameters b T N 8 1 i il d Q Parameters assigne i 00 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program Q113 During nesting the PGM CALL the value of the parameter Q113 depends on the dimensional data of the program from which the other programs are called Metric system mm OT1s 0 Inch system inches 0113 1 Tool length Q114 The current value for the tool length is assigned to Q114 The TNC remembers the current tool length even if the power is interrupted Coordinates after probing during program run The parameters Q115 to Q119 contain the coordinates of the spindle position at the moment of contact during programmed measurement with the 3 D touch probe The coordinates refer to the datum point that is active in the Manual operating mode The length of the stylus and the radius of the ball tip are not compensated in these coordinates X axis Q115 Y axis Q116 Z axis Q117 4th axis Q118 Machine dependent 5th axis Q119 Machine dependent 284 Programming Q Parameters il Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 130 Tool length Q115 Tool radius Q116 Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC A axis Q120 B axis Q121 C axis
47. 0 0 Text width 16 TNC table preset pr 07 S IST 12 38 57 F O0VR X 10 857 lY 108 452 Z C 0 009 S 85 860 TEENER ACTL 11 ek FT 3 2 Ss o F mm min Our 57 5 9M 5 BEGIN END PAGE PAGE CHANGE EEEREN f 4 t l PRESET OFFSET z 2 ACTIVATE PRESET END Manual Operation and Setup There are several methods for saving datums and or basic rotations in the preset table E Through probing cycles in the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel modes see Chapter 14 E Through the probing cycles 400 to 402 and 410 to 419 in automatic mode see User s Manual Cycles Chapters 14 and 15 Manual entry see description below HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 thout a 3 D Touch Probe ing wi E T V 12 4 i i Manually saving the datums in the preset table 7 In order to set datums in the preset table proceed as follows Som 0 Select the Manual Operation mode lt W 2 x Y Move the tool slowly until it touches scratches the Q workpiece surface or position the measuring dial correspondingly 0 p Displaying the preset table The TNC opens the gt preset table and sets the cursor to the active table O row os gt Eeg Select functions for entering the presets The TNC O UA displays the available possibilities for entry in the soft key row See the table below for a description of the entry possibilities E T V Select the line in the preset table th
48. 110 14 FLT PDX 10 PDY 0 D15 17 FLT PDX 100 PDY 0 D15 18 FCT DR R10 CLSD CCX 0 CCY 19 FSELECT1 20 DEP LCT X 30 Y Z 100 RS FMAX 21 END PGM HEBEL MM RESET ot A Ba E i 2 WINDOW DETAIL i il 4 6 _ Messages 4 6 Error Messages Display of errors The TNC generates error messages when it detects problems such as Incorrect data input Logical errors in the program Contour elements that are impossible to machine Incorrect use of touch probes When an error occurs it is displayed in red type in the header Long and multi line error messages are displayed in abbreviated form If an error occurs In the background mode the word Error is displayed in red type Complete information on all pending errors is shown in the error window If a rare processor check error should occur the TNC automatically opens the error window You cannot remove such an error Shut down the system and restart the TNC The error message is displayed in the header until it is cleared or replaced by a higher priority error An error message that contains a program block number was caused by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block Open the error window Press the ERR key The TNC opens the error window Ea and displays all accumulated error messages Close the error window Press the END soft key or END EI Press the ERR key The TNC closes the error window 120
49. 29 Cycles 25x for pockets studs and slots Touch probe cycles for datum setting manual and automatic cycles HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Error message is issued Cannot be defined with complex contour formula Real set operation possible Error message is issued Error message is issued Error message is issued Error message is issued Function does not work within SL cycles Not allowed machining of closed contours is more coherent With X Y coordinates independent of machine type With datum shift in X Y independent of machine type Available function Available function Function not available Available function Available function Direct plunging to contour of ridge In limit ranges geometrical conditions of tool contour error messages are triggered if plunging movements lead to unreasonable critical behavior Cycles can only be executed if the tilted working plane function is inactive the datum shift is inactive and rotation with Cycle 10 is inactive Axes that are outside the working plane in the contour description are ignored Restricted definition in complex contour formula is possible Only restricted performance of real set operation possible Radius compensation is canceled program is executed Program is executed M functions are ignored Infeed movements are ignored Function also works within SL cycles APPR DEP blocks are allowed as contour elements Machine dependent with existing rotary
50. 8 FCT DR R1 CLSD CCX CCY 0 y PPR 19 FSELECT1 DEP LCT X 30 Y Z 100 RS FMAX 21 END PGM HEBEL MM N RESET START Programming Programming Aids il Block number display ON OFF C showu OMIT BLOCK NR Shift the soft key row see figure To show block numbers Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to SHOW To omit block numbers Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to OMIT Erasing the graphic CLEAR GRAPHICS Magnifying or reducing a detail Shift the soft key row see figure Erase graphic Press CLEAR GRAPHICS soft key You can select the graphics display by selecting a detail with the frame overlay You can now magnify or reduce the selected detail Select the soft key row for detail magnification reduction second row see figure The following functions are available Show and move the frame overlay Press and hold the desired soft key to move the frame overlay Ez Reduce the frame overlay press and hold the soft key to reduce the detail Enlarge the frame overlay press and hold the soft key to magnify the detail With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key you can restore the original section Confirm the selected area with the WINDOW DETAIL soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Programming Graphics pe O O pe A L vr 6 L 2 5 R FMAX M3 APPR LCT X 10 Y R5 RL F DR R10 CCPR 40 CCPA
51. Circular arc CT ar Circular arc with tangential Coordinates of the arc end Page 174 A connection to the preceding point and subsequent contour elements Corner Rounding RND RND Circular arc with tangential Rounding radius R Page 169 0 connection to the preceding and subsequent contour elements FK Free Contour Straight line or circular path see PathContours FK Free Page 190 Programming with any connection to the Contour Programming preceding contour element Advanced Programming Features Software Option page 187 166 Programming Programming Contours il Straight line L The TNC moves the tool in a straight line from its current position to the straight line end point The starting point is the end point of the preceding block Coordinates of the end point of the straight line if necessary Radius compensation RL RR RO Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks Actual position capture You can also generate a straight line block L block by using the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key In the Manual Operation mode move the tool to the position you wish to capture Switch the screen display to Programming and Editing Select the program block after which you want to insert the L block Press the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key The TNC generates an L block with the actual position coordinates HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 6 4 Path vontours caesien Coordinates i i 6 4 Path contours
52. Data Input 13 1 Programming Executing Simple Machining Operations 13 1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations The Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation is particularly convenient for simple machining operations or pre positioning of the tool It enables you to write a short program in HEIDENHAIN conversational programming or in DIN ISO format and execute it immediately You can also call TNC cycles The program is stored in the file MDI In the Positioning with MDI mode of operation the additional status displays can also be activated Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI Limitation The following functions are not available in the MDI mode FK free contour programming Program section repeats Subprogramming Path compensation The programming graphics Program call PGM CALL The program run graphics Select the Positioning with MDI mode of operation Program the file MDI as you wish To start program run press the machine START key Example 1 A hole with a depth of 20 mm is to be drilled into a single workpiece After clamping and aligning the workpiece and setting the datum you can program and execute the drilling operation in a few lines First you pre position the tool with straight line blocks to the hole center coordinates at a setup clearance of 5 mm above the workpiece surface Then drill the hole with Cycle 200 DRILLING 388 Call
53. EULER Three Euler angles EULER Page 333 precession EULPR nutation EULNU and rotation EULROT VECTOR Norm vector for defining VECTOR Page 335 the plane and base vector a for defining the direction of the tilted X axis POINTS Coordinates of any three POINTS Page 337 points in the plane to be tilted RELATIVE Single incrementally REL _ SPA Page 339 effective spatial angle SA AXIAL Up to three absolute or Page 340 incremental axis angles A B C RESET Reset the PLANE function Page 328 Is HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function j il L uodo a1eMYOS uejd HUO Buji uon9uNny INW1d OUL Z LL Programming Multiple Axis Machining il 326 Define the PLANE function SPEC FCT TILT MACHINING PLANE Show the soft key row with special functions Select the PLANE function Press the TILT MACHINING PLANE soft key The TNC displays the available definition possibilities in the soft key row Selecting functions Select the desired function by soft key The TNC continues the dialog and requests the required parameters Position display As soon as a PLANE function is active the TNC shows the calculated space angle in the additional status display see figure As a rule the TNC internally always calculates with space angles independent of which PLANE function is active HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Manual operation Programming Plane from s
54. GOTO key Making changes to the program Switching the operating mode Selecting a new program 404 Test Run and Program Run il 14 5 Program Run Application In the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC executes a part program continuously to its end or up to a program Stop In the Program Run Single Block mode of operation you must start each block separately by pressing the machine START button The following TNC functions are available in the program run modes of operation Interrupt program run Start program run from a certain block Optional block skip Editing the tool table TOOL T Check and change O parameters Superimpose handwheel positioning Functions for graphic simulation Additional status display HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Program run full sequence TAN BEGIN PGM 113 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 3 Z 52000 L Z 10 RO FMAX M3 L X 50 Y 50 R FMAX CYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 18 9 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG1 F333 10 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 3 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS 13 L Z 2 RO FMAX M99 14 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIRCULAR POCKET 14 5 Program Run OnNOUBRWYNP 0 S IST 12 40 57 F OVR X 33 63 1Y E 0 000 S 2 542 85 860 T DIAGNOSIS ACTL 1 o eS a 3 F mm min Our 57 9 M5 Zz S BEGIN END PAGE PAGE BLOCK TOOL i l t I SCA
55. H f the tool should approach the workpiece in the direction defined by the radius compensation Enter R as a positive value If the tool should approach from the workpiece side Enter R as a negative value Center angle CCA of the arc CCA can be entered only as a positive value Maximum input value 360 Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks 162 Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR radius R 10 End point of the first contour element Next contour element Programming Programming Contours il Approaching on a circular arc with tangential connection from a straight line to the contour APPR LCT The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first contour point Pa ona circular arc The feed rate programmed in the APPR block is effective for the entire path that the TNC traversed in the approach block path Ps to Pa If you have programmed the coordinates of all three principal axes X Y and Z in the approach block the TNC moves the tool from the position defined before the APPR block simultaneously in all three axes to the auxiliary point Py and then only in the working plane from Py to Pa The arc is connected tangentially both to the line Pc Py as well as to the first contour element Once these lines are known the radius then suffices to completely define the tool path Use any path functi
56. HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 a a KA 395 Advanced Graphic Features Software Option r Q re g ae J q Projection in 3 planes Similar to a workpiece drawing the part is displayed with a plan view and two sectional planes A symbol to the lower left indicates whether the display is in first angle or third angle projection according to ISO 6433 selected with MP7310 Details can be isolated in this display mode for magnification see Magnifying details page 398 a z In addition you can shift the sectional planes with the corresponding soft keys Select the soft key for projection in three planes TI Shift the soft key row until the soft key for the functions for shifting the sectional plane appears DIAGNOSIS K 00 06 19 START RESET a rd Lon START SINGLE OFF START Select the functions for shifting the sectional plane The TNC offers the following soft keys Shift the vertical sectional plane to the right i or left shift the vertical sectional plane forward or ei backward a a A Shift the horizontal sectional plane upwards or downwards o The positions of the sectional planes are visible during shifting dvanced Graphic Features Software Option The default setting of the sectional plane is selected such that it lies in the working plane in the work
57. Input range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 Y component of normal vector Y component NY of the normal vector N see figure at center right Input range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 Z component of normal vector Z component NZ of the normal vector N see figure at lower right Input range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 342 NC block Abbreviations used VECTOR Vector BX BY BZ Base vector X Y and Z components NX NY NZ Normal vector X Y and Z components 336 Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Defining the machining plane via three points POINTS PLANE Application A machining plane can be uniquely defined by entering any three points P1 to P3 in this plane This possibility is realized in the POINTS PLANE function Before programming note the following The connection from Point 1 to Point 2 determines the direction of the tilted principal axis X for tool axis Z The direction of the tilted tool axis is determined by the position of Point 3 relative to the connecting line between Point 1 and Point 2 Use the right hand rule thumb X axis index finger Y axis middle finger Z axis see figure at right to remember thumb X axis points from Point 1 to Point 2 index finger Y axis points parallel to the tilted Y axis in the direction of Point 3 Then the middle finger point
58. M2 M30 has the normal effect Label jumped to if FN14 ERROR after the NC CANCEL reaction instead of aborting the program with an error The error number programmed in the FN14 command can be read under ID992 NR14 Value 0 FN14 has the normal effect Label jumped to in the event of an internal server error SQL PLC CFG instead of aborting the program with an error Value 0 Server error has the normal effect Active tool number Prepared tool number Active tool axis 0 X 1 Y 2 Z 6 U 7 V 8 W Programmed spindle speed Active spindle status 1 undetined 0 M3 active 1 M4 active 2 Mb5d after M3 3 Mb after M4 Gear range Coolant status O off 1 on Active feed rate Index of prepared tool Index of active tool Channel number Set up clearance of active fixed cycle Drilling depth milling depth of active fixed cycle Plunging depth of active fixed cycle tt Additional Functions o il 7 Additional Functions Modal condition 35 Data for SOL tables 40 Data from the tool table 50 246 Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Feed rate for pecking in active fixed cycle 1st side length for rectangular pocket cycle 2nd side length for rectangular pocket cycle 1st side length for slot cycle 2nd side length for slot cycle Radius for circular pocket cycle Feed rate for milling in active fixed cycle Direction of rotation for activ
59. OVERVIEW POS STATUS eS Q PARAM Active subprogram Active program section repeat Program called with PGM CALL Current machining time Name of the active main program General program information PGM tab STAT h No direct Name of the active main program aye eee overview Pen Lal cve m Pos e gt Ful Active PGM STAT selection 19 veh oer 11 0 some a possible 22 ae LBL 15 REPS Y maaa 2500 5 00 00 33 23 PLANE RESET STAY N 24 LBL Oo isll Circle center CC pole AS EEN cae ae Current time 12 44 23 _ A poses eaea l Seppe ne S Prog Cast STATIH Dwell time counter pon a PGM 4 XYZ PGM 5 a f S IST 12 44 Machining time when the program was See a ee simulated in the Test Run operating EZY V TAFE F 9 754 Mode C 000 S 94 680 a ser sues Ar A A actL M ok rT 3 26 o F mm min Our 57 8 M 5 COT Current machining time in percent a L STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS STATUS OF lt 4 gt OVERVIEW PoS STATUS fee Q PARAM TRANSF Current time n a a E a ee EEEE EEE Active programs 66 Introduction Program section repeat Subprograms LBL tab SSS Sani Feo run fair sequence STATAN N gt amp No direct Active program section repeats with block ie as overview pan cat cve n pos o gt sel
60. Q122 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 a Q Parameters j il Y Measurement results from touch probe cycles Q see also User s Manual for Touch Probe Cycles Angle of a straight line Q150 A Center in reference axis Q151 Oo Center in minor axis Q152 E Diameter 0153 D Pocket length 0154 A Pocket width Q155 Length of the axis selected in the cycle Q156 Position of the centerline Q157 _ Angle of the A axis 0158 ee Angle of the B axis 0159 Coordinate of the axis selected in the cycle Q160 Center in reference axis Q161 Center in minor axis Q162 Diameter Q163 Pocket length Q164 Pocket width Q165 Measured length Q166 Position of the centerline Q167 _Determined space angle Parameter value Rotation about the A axis Q170 Rotation about the B axis Q171 Rotation about the C axis Q172 286 Programming Q Parameters il d Q Parameters Good Q180 Rework Q181 Scrap 0182 X axis Q185 Y axis Q186 Z axis Q187 Markers for cycles Q188 Reserved Q190 Reserved Q191 Reserved Q192 Reserved Q193 Markers for cycles 0195 Markers for cycles 0196 Markers for cycles machining patterns 0197 Number of the last active measuring cycle 0198 Tool within tolerance Q199 0 0 Tool is worn LTOL RTOL is exceeded Q199 1 0 Tool is broken LBREAK RBREAK is 0199 2 0 exceeded HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 b T N i i 00 Program sequence E The contour of the ellipse is approximated by many short lines defined in Q
61. S 94 680 g EAR A fo ma as n a a z ae actL fl ok fT 3 Z 6 o F mm min Ouvr 57 8 M 5 MIN and MAX values of the individual cutting a a edges and the result of measuring the rotating E pal E A a a a tool DYN dynamic measurement Cutting edge number with the corresponding measured value If the measured value is followed by an asterisk the allowable tolerance in the tool table was exceeded Coordinate transformations TRANS tab STAT h STATUS Name ot the active datum table 17 LBL 15 ta cyc m Pos too tr TRANS COORD 18 L IX 1 R FMAX TRANSF 19 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING Datum table TNC zeroshift d Ei 20 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 0 9995 1 DOC X 0 0000 22 CALL LBL 15 REPS y 0 0000 Active datum number comment from the ie elz s0 0000 fs active line of the active datum number DOC from CAC gpx v a 1 54750 m Cycle 7 A z aaae XYZ Active datum shift Cycle 7 The TNC displays an ETE P pp active datum shift in up to 8 axes L 33 747 Y 72 578 Z 9 754 Mirrored axes Cycle 8 c 0 000 5 194 680 i actL H ok fT 3 z 5 o F mm min Our 57 8 M 5 OST Active basic rotation z a SO _ oo STATUS STATUS TOOL ers STATUS OF lt Active rotation angle Cycle 1 0 OVERVIEW POS STATUS ET Q PARAM Active sca
62. S fixed machine axis X see figure at top right Input range from 359 9999 to 359 9999 Spatial angle B Rotational angle SPB around the fixed machine axis Y see figure at top right Input range from 359 9999 to 359 9999 Spatial angle C Rotational angle SPC around the fixed machine axis Z see figure at center right Input range from 359 9999 to 359 9999 Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 342 Abbreviations used orking Plane Software Option 1 SPATIAL Spatial in space SPA Spatial A rotation about the X axis SPB Spatial B rotation about the Y axis SPC Spatial C rotation about the Z axis re ing Tilt Example NC block 11 2 The PLANE Function 330 Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Defining the machining plane with projection angles PROJECTED PLANE Application Projection angles define a machining plane through the entry of two angles that you determine by projecting the first coordinate plane Z X plane with tool axis Z and the second coordinate plane Y Z with tool axis Z onto the machining plane to be defined Before programming note the following You can only use projection angles if the angle definitions are given with respect to a rectangular cuboid Otherwise distortions could occur on the workpiece Parameter description for the positioning behavior See Specifying t
63. The TNC can manage several pocket tables with any file names To activate a specific pocket table for program run you must select it in the file management of a Program Run mode of operation status M Editing a pocket table in a Program Run operating mode Too Press the TOOL TABLE soft key to select the tool table oes Press the POCKET TABLE soft key to select the TABLE pocket table EDIT Set the EDIT soft key to ON On your machine this DFF on might not be necessary or even possible Refer to your machine manual 142 Pocket table editing Tool number File 8 0 0 eererererneO0QDUAUUNeO DUNe tnc NtableNxtool p tch WKZ 20 WKZ 30 WKZ 1 PROBE Programming Tools il Selecting a pocket table in the Programming and Editing operating mode Call the file manager MGT Press the SHOW ALL soft key to select the file type Select a file or enter a new file name Conclude your entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key RSV ST DOC PLC PL au PS PTYP LOCKED ABOVE LOCKED BELOW LOCKED LEFT LOCKED RIGHT Pocket number of the tool in the tool magazine Tool number Pocket reservation for box magazines Special tool with a large radius requiring several pockets in the tool magazine If your special tool takes up pockets in front of and behind its actual pocket these additional pockets need to be locked in column L
64. The machine tool builder may add some M functions that O are not described in this User s Manual Refer to your machine manual You can enter up to two M functions at the end of a positioning block or in a separate block The TNC displays the following dialog question Miscellaneous function M You usually enter only the number of the M function in the programming dialog Some M functions can be programmed with additional parameters In this case the dialog is continued for the parameter input In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel modes of operation the M functions are entered with the M soft key the start of a positioning block and others at the end Please note that some M functions become effective at regardless of their position in the NC block M functions come into effect in the block in which they are called some M functions are effective only in the block in which they are programmed Unless the M function is only effective blockwise either you must cancel it in a subsequent block with a separate M function or it is automatically canceled by the TNC at the end of the program Entering an M function in a STOP block If you program a STOP block the program run or test run is interrupted at the block for example for tool inspection You can also enter an M function in a STOP block To program an Interruption of program run press the STOP key Enter a miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks
65. a cycle entry TRUE The cycle soft key row remains active after a cycle definition FALSE The cycle soft key row is hidden after a cycle definition Safety check when deleting blocks TRUE Display confirmation question when deleting an NC block FALSE Do not display confirmation question when deleting an NC block Program length for which the geometry is to be checked 100 to 9999 Program length for which the geometry is to be checked 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters Paths for the end user List of drives and or directories Drives or directories entered here are shown in the TNC s file manager Universal Time Greenwich Mean Time Time difference to universal time h 12 to 13 Time difference in hours relative to Greenwich Mean Time HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 445 il 16 2 Pin M and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces 16 2 Pin Layouts and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces RS 232 C V 24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices The interface complies with the requirements of EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation When using the 25 pin adapter block Do not assign RXD XD DTR Signal GND DSR RTS CTR Do not assign Hsg Ext shield i Yeow l Brown C C Gray Pink o oi NI o1 A WY NMI gt NO Ext shield Hsg Ext shield Hsg Hsg When using the 9 pin adapter block Yellow Yellow TXD White DTR Brown Brown Black Black Violet Violet RTS Gra
66. a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle O without stylus length or stylus radius compensation workpiece coordinate system Oriented spindle stop Read values tt Additional Functions b il E Additional Functions Read data of the current tool 950 252 1 O AJ W 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 27 32 34 Tool length L Tool radius R Tool radius R2 Oversize in tool length DL Oversize in tool radius DR Oversize for tool radius DR2 Tool locked TL O not locked 1 locked Number of replacement tool RT Maximum tool age TIME1 Maximum tool age TIME2 Current tool age CUR TIME PLC status Maximum tooth length LCUTS Maximum plunge angle ANGLE TT Number of teeth CUT TT Wear tolerance in length LTOL TT Wear tolerance in radius RTOL TT Direction of rotation DIRECT 0 positive 1 negative TT Offset in plane R OFFS TT Offset in length L OFFS TT Break tolerance for length LBREAK TT Break tolerance in radius RBREAK PLC value Tool type TYPE 0 milling cutter 21 touch probe Corresponding row in the touch probe table Point angle Lift off Programming Q Parameters il Touch probe cycles 990 1 2 Execution status 992 10 11 14 16 Example Assign the value of the active scaling factor for the Z axis to Q25 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Approach behavior 0 standard behavior 1 effective radius set up clearance is zero 0 probe mon
67. a replacement tool if available RT for Replacement Tool see also TIME2 Maximum tool life in minutes This function can vary depending on the Individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more information Tool name Tool length Tool radius R Tool radius R2 Tool length oversize Tool radius oversize Tool radius oversize R2 Tooth length in the tool axis Maximum plunge angle Tool locked Yes ENT No NO ENT Replacement tool Maximum tool age Programming Tools il TIME2 CUR TIME TYPE DOC PLC PTYP LIFTOFF TP_NO T_ANGLE Maximum tool life in minutes during TOOL CALL If the current tool age exceeds this value the TNC changes the tool during the next TOOL CALL see also CUR TIME Current age of the tool in minutes The TNC automatically counts the current tool life CUR_TIME A starting value can be entered for used tools Tool type Press the SELECT TYPE 8rd soft key row the TNC superimposes a window where you can select the type of tool you want You can assign tool types to specify the display filter settings such that only the selected type is visible in the table Comment on tool up to 16 characters Information on this tool that is to be sent to the PLC Tool type for evaluation in the pocket table Definition of whether the TNC should retract the tool in the direction of the positive tool axis at an NC stop in order to avoid leaving dwell marks on the contour I
68. and END block automatically at Working plane in graphic XY by pressing the DEL If you do not wish to define a blank form cancel the dialog key The TNC can display the graphics only if the shortest side is at least 50 um long and the longest side is no longer ela 23 SSS S S Aaa HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 3 2 Creating and Writing ee 3 2 Creating and Wri ng Mibarams Programming tool movements in conversational format To program a block initiate the dialog by pressing a function key In the screen headline the TNC then asks you for all the information Miscellaneous function M necessary to program the desired function 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z xs Vs 2 20 Example of a positioning block ye Start block AX 19 L Z 100 R FMAX M30 20 END PGM 14 MM x 10 Enter the target coordinate for the X axis 2 20 Enter the target coordinate for the Y axis and go to the next question with ENT Enter No radius compensation and go to the next question with ENT Enter a feed rate of 100 mm min for this path contour go to the next question with ENT pa 00 Enter the miscellaneous function M3 spindle ON Pressing the ENT key terminates this dialog Ww The program block window displays the following line fo 2 Programming Fundamentals File Management Possible feed rate input Rapid traverse non modal Exception If defined before an APPR block FMAX is also in effect for mov
69. and editing Define tool data in the program Select coordinate axes or DEF ane enter them into the program Call tool data O 9 Numbers 07 1 a e e o Programming path movements B Decimal point Reverse algebraic sign Polar coordinate input Incremental Approach depart contour P f values put Q parameter programming O parameter status Save actual position or values from Straight line calculator FK free contour programming Io Skip dialog questions delete words z C Circle center pole for polar coordinates o E z Confirm entry and resume dialo Circle with center y g erele vitadius Conclude block and exit entry ce e cry Circular arc with tangential connection Chamfering Corner rounding Special functions smarT NC Show special functions FCT message DEL Abort dialog delete program section Clear numerical entry or TNC error CE Select the next tab in forms Up down one dialog box or button About this Manual The symbols used in this manual are described below About this Manual Do you desire any changes or have you found any errors We are continuously striving to improve documentation for you Please help us by sending your requests to the following e mail address tnc userdoc heidenhain de HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 5 il TNC Model Software and Features TNC Model Software and Features This manual describes functions and features provided by TNCs as of the follow
70. angle between the angle reference axis and the workpiece edge as the rotation angle Cancel the basic rotation or restore the previous basic rotation This is done by setting the rotation angle to the value that you previously wrote down To measure the angle between two workpiece sides Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key Rotation angle If you need the current basic rotation later write down the displayed rotation angle Make a basic rotation with first workpiece edge see Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with 3 D Touch Probe Touch Probe Function Software Option on page 373 Probe the second edge as for a basic rotation but do not set the rotation angle to zero Press the PROBING ROT soft key to display the angle PA between the two workpiece edges as the rotation angle Cancel the basic rotation or restore the previous basic rotation by setting the rotation angle to the value that you wrote down previously 12 8 Datum Setting with 3 D Touch Probe Tou 380 Manual Operation and Setup il Using the touch probe functions with mechanical probes or dial gauges If you do not have an electronic 3 D touch probe on your machine you can also use all the previously described manual touch probe functions exception calibration function with mechanical probes or by simply touching the workpiece with the tool In place of the electronic signal generated automatically by a 3 D touch pr
71. are programmed then ascending order is used as the default setting The TNC places the selected rows in the indicated column E Optional FOR UPDATE keyword The selected rows are locked against write accesses from other processes 264 Programming Q Parameters Equal to Not equal to Less than Less than or equal to Greater than Greater than or equal to Linking multiple conditions Logical AND Logical OR HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 AND OR 8 9 Accessing T with SQL Commands j il V SQL FETCH D SQL FETCH reads the row addressed with INDEX from the result set and Example Row number is transferred in a places the table entries in the bound assigned O parameters The Q parameter SQL FETCH takes into account all columns entered in the Select O command 12 SQL BIND Q882 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS X gt Parameter no for result O parameterinwhichthe 28 SQL BIND 0883 TAB _EXAMPLE MEAS MANT SOL server reports the result 14 SQL BIND Q884 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS Z g 0 No error occurred V 1 Error occurred incorrect handle or index too large e lt gt Data bank SQL access 1D Q parameter with the aoe be handle for identifying the result set also see SQL z SELECT C f gt Data bank Index for SQL result Row number GO SQL FETCH Qi HANDLE SNDE within the result set The table entries of this row are read and are transferred into the bound Q Example Row number is programmed directly
72. as if it were being machined with a cylindrical end mill If a tool table is active you can also simulate the machining operation with a spherical cutter For this purpose enter R2 R in the tool table The TNC will not show a graphic If the current program has no valid blank form definition no program is selected The TNC graphic does not show a radius oversize DR that p has been programmed in the TOOL CALL block A graphic simulation is only possible under certain conditions for program sections or programs in which rotary axis movements are defined The graphic may not be displayed correctly by the TNC 394 Test Run and Program Run il Overview of display modes The TNC displays the following soft keys in the Program Run and Test Run modes of operation Plan view Projection in three planes 3 D view fufa Limitations during program run possible if the microprocessor of the TNC is already occupied with complicated machining tasks or if large areas are being machined Example Multipass milling over the entire blank form with a large tool The TNC interrupts the graphics and displays the text ERROR in the graphics window The machining process is continued however A graphical representation of a running program is not Plan view This is the fastest of the graphic display modes ra Press the soft key for plan view Regarding depth display remember The deeper the surface the darker the shade
73. axes Machine dependent datum shift in rotary axes Function not available Function not available Available function Function not available Available function Circular approach to contour of ridge In limit ranges geometrical conditions of tool contour vertical plunging is used if required No restrictions in connection with coordinate transformations 493 PLANE function TABLE ROT COORD ROT not defined Configured setting is used COORD ROT is used Machine is configured for axis angle All PLANE functions can be used Only PLANE AXIAL is executed Programming an incremental spatial Error message is issued Incremental spatial angle is angle according to PLANE AXIAL interpreted as an absolute value Programming an incremental axis Error message is issued Incremental axis angle is interpreted angle according to PLANE SPATIAL if as an absolute value the machine is configured for spatial angle Special functions for cycle programming FN17 Function available details are Function available details are different different FN18 Function available details are Function available details are different different 494 Comparison Differences in MDI operation Execution of connected sequences Saving modally effective functions Function partially available Function partially available Comparison Differences in programming station Demo version Demo version Copying NC programs Shifting the horizontal soft
74. because this type of programming is considered to be axis value programming and the basic assumption is that axes do not form a Cartesian coordinate system Radius compensation as in L blocks The tool is positioned above the next position to be machined Last positioning block in the working plane must contain both coordinates of the working plane RND block is scaled the result is an ellipse Error message Is issued The incremental rotation angle IPA and the direction of rotation DR must have the same sign Otherwise an error message will be issued Block with RO DEP block PGM CALL Programming of Cycle 10 ROTATION Program selection Consideration of tool radius compensation Tool shape compensation is Supported The tool approaches from the current position of the previous block to the programmed coordinate value If the next block is a linear block it is dealt with in the same way as an additional radius compensation block so that the path will be contour parallel from the next but one linear block The tool is positioned above the last position that has been completely machined Last positioning block in the working plane does not necessarily need to contain both coordinates of the working plane Can cause problems with RND or CHF blocks Error message is issued Error message is issued if a contour element with length 0 is located before the RND or CHF block Contour element with length 0 is ignor
75. errors Clearing errors outside of the error window To clear the error message in the header Press the CE button In some operating modes such as the Editing mode the CE button cannot be used to clear the error since the button is reserved for other functions Clearing more than one error Open the error window DELETE DELETE ALL Clear individual errors Position the highlight on the error message and press the DELETE soft key Clear all errors Press the DELETE ALL soft key If the cause of the error has not been removed the error message cannot be deleted In this case the error message remains in the window Error log The TNC stores errors and important events e g system startup in an error log The capacity of the error log is limited If the log is full the TNC uses a second file If this is also full the first error log is deleted and written to again and so on To view the error history switch between CURRENT FILE and PREVIOUS FILE Open the error window LOG FILES ERROR LOG PREVIOUS FILE CURRENT reel Press the LOG FILES soft key To open the error log press the ERRORLOG FILE soft key If you need the previous log Tile press the PREVIOUS FILE soft key If you need the current log file press the CURRENT FILE soft key The oldest entry is at the beginning of the error log file and the most recent entry is at the
76. exceed 25 characters otherwise the TNC cannot display the entire file name The following characters are not permitted in file names PEE way ese Le A Poe Enter the file name using the screen keyboard see Screen Keyboard on page 112 The space HEX 20 and delete HEX 7F characters are not permitted in file names either The maximum limit for the path and file name together is 256 characters see Paths on page 93 Data backup We recommend saving newly written programs and files on a PC at regular intervals The TNCremoNT data transmission freeware from HEIDENHAIN is a simple and convenient method for backing up data stored on the TNC You additionally need a data medium on which all machine specific data such as the PLC program machine parameters etc are stored Ask your machine manufacturer for assistance if necessary that the TNC always has enough memory space for Take the time occasionally to delete any unneeded files so system files Such as the tool table 92 Programming Fundamentals File Management il 3 4 Working with the File Manager Directories To ensure that you can easily find your files we recommend that you organize your hard disk into directories You can divide a directory into further directories which are called subdirectories With the key or ENT you can show or hide the subdirectories Paths A path indicates the drive and all directories and subdirectori
77. filter X MOD functions User parameters Configuration data Numerical structure OEM help files with service functions X Data medium inspection X Loading of service packs X Setting the system time X Selection of axes for actual position capture X Definition of traverse range limits X Restricting external access X Switching the kinematics X 470 Calling fixed cycles With M99 or M89 X X With CYCL CALL X X With CYCL CALL PAT X X With CYC CALL POS X Special functions Creating backward programs X Datum shift with TRANS DATUM X Adaptive Feed Control AFC X option 45 Global definition of cycle parameters GLOBAL DEF X Pattern definition with PATTERN DEF X X Definition and execution of point tables X X Simple contour formula CONTOUR DEF X X Functions for large molds and dies Global program settings GS X option 44 Expanded M128 FUNCTION TCPM X Status displays Positions spindle speed feed rate X X Larger depiction of position display Manual Operation X Additional status display form view X X Display of handwheel traverse when machining with handwheel X superimposition Display of distance to go in a tilted system X Dynamic display of Q parameter contents definable number X ranges OEM specific additional status display via Python X Graphic display of residual run time X Individual color settings of user interface X HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 4
78. four character substring LEN4 is read from the string parameter QS10 beginning with the third character BEG2 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 11 String Parameters C il 8 11 String Parameters Converting a string parameter to a numerical value The TONUMB function converts a string parameter to a numerical value The value to be converted should be only numerical The OS parameter must contain only one numerical value Otherwise the TNC will output an error message Select Q parameter functions Select the FORMULA function Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the numerical value Confirm with the ENT key Shift the soft key row FORMULA ne Select the function for converting a string parameter to a numerical value TONUMB Enter the number of the O parameter to be converted and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Convert string parameter QS11 to a numerical parameter Q82 278 Programming Q Parameters il Checking a string parameter With the INSTR function you can check whether a string parameter is contained in another string parameter FORMULA INSTR Select Q parameter functions Select the FORMULA function Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the place at which the search text begins Confirm with the ENT key Shift the soft key row Se
79. functional Help menu remains open when F12 is used for switching Are displayed only once Error message to be acknowledged only once Complete log without filter functions available Available A service Tile is automatically created when the system crashes Available Available Available No limitation regarding program length Available Not available If error messages occur the cursor is on the error causing block in the contour subprogram Repeat function available Not available Not available i il Programming OEM cycles Access to table data Via SQL commands Via FN17 FN18 or TABREAD TABWRITE functions Via FN18 functions Not available With the CFGREAD function Available Access to machine parameters Creating Interactive cycles with CYCLE QUERY e g touch probe cycles in Manual Operation mode Comparison Differences in Test Run functionality Display of delta values DR and DL from TOOL CALL block Test Run up to block N Calculation of machining time Are not considered Function not available Each time the simulation is repeated by pressing the START soft key the machining time Is totaled Comparison Differences in Test Run operation Arrangement of soft key rows and soft keys within the rows Zoom function Character set for PROGRAM screen layout Performing a Test Run in Single block mode switching to the Programming mode of operation at any time Machine specific
80. hom 0 D eb Q gt D lt O n O m a hon 0 hom e oe o Q eb ka LL xX LL I N n Q a o Q E e re 0 co HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 195 il Closed contours You can identify the beginning and end of a closed contour with the CLSD soft key This reduces the number of possible solutions for the last contour element ming lt Enter CLSD as an addition to another contour data entry in the first and last blocks of an FK section cso Beginning of contour CLSD End of contour CLSD 3 Example NC blocks vanced Program Features Software Option 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Ad 196 Programming Programming Contours il Auxiliary points For both free programmed straight lines and free programmed circular arcs you can enter the coordinates of auxiliary points that are located on the contour or in its proximity Auxiliary points on a contour The auxiliary points are located on a straight line the extension of a Straight line or on a circular arc X coordinate of an auxiliary point _ P1 or P2 of a Straight line Y coordinate of an auxiliary point P1Y P2Y P1 or P2 of a straight line X coordinate of an auxiliary Pax P2x Pax point iS kl K P1 P2 or P3 of a circular arc Y coordinate of an auxiliary pay pzy Pav point pe Oh P1 P2 or P3 of a circular arc Auxiliary points near a contour
81. il Machining open contours corners M98 Standard behavior The TNC calculates the intersections of the cutter paths at inside corners and moves the tool in the new direction at those points If the contour is open at the corners however this will result in incomplete machining Behavior with M98 With the miscellaneous function M98 the TNC temporarily suspends radius compensation to ensure that both corners are completely machined Effect M98 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed M98 takes effect at the end of block Example NC blocks Move to the contour points 10 11 and 12 in succession HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 9 4 Miscellaneous ung for Contouring Behavior j i 9 4 Miscellaneous run ns for Contouring Behavior Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool at the last programmed feed rate regardless of the direction of traverse Behavior with M103 The TNC reduces the feed rate when the tool moves in the negative direction of the tool axis The feed rate for plunging FZMAX is calculated from the last programmed feed rate FPROG and a factor F FZMAX FPROG x F Programming M103 If you enter M103 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog by asking you the factor F Effect M103 becomes effective at the start of block To cancel M103 program M103 once again without a factor The feed rate reduction is then effec
82. in the individual block but in all blocks until you program a new feed rate S To move your machine at rapid traverse you can also Duration of effect A feed rate entered as a numerical value remains in effect until a block with a different feed rate is reached FMAX is only effective in the block in which it is programmed After the block with FMAX is executed the feed rate will return to the last feed rate entered as a numerical value Changing during program run You can adjust the feed rate during program run with the feed rate override knob F 132 Programming Tools il Spindle speed S The spindle speed S is entered in revolutions per minute rom in a TOOL CALL block Instead you can also define the cutting speed Vc in m min Programmed change In the part program you can change the spindle speed in a TOOL CALL block by entering the spindle speed only To program a tool call press the TOOL CALL key CALL Ignore the dialog question for Tool number with the NO ENT key Ignore the dialog question for Working spindle axis X Y Z with the NO ENT key Enter the new spindle speed for the dialog question Spindle speed S and confirm with END or switch via the VC soft key to entry of the cutting speed Changing during program run You can adjust the spindle speed during program run with the spindle speed override knob S HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ad O eb ad aN o 5 1 Entering Too
83. jump function to force a Jump over this program section The called program must not contain a CALL PGM call into the calling program otherwise an infinite loop will result HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ve O O pe Q Q V V i 7 4 Separate i il Calling any program as a subprogram To select the functions for program call press the CALL PGM CALL key moon Press the PROGRAM soft key for the TNC to start the dialog for defining the program to be called Use the screen keyboard to enter the path name GOTO key or press the PROGRAM soft key for the TNC to display a selection window in which you can select the program to be called Confirm with the END key S O O im Q 2 5 V N S 7 4 Separate 210 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il 7 5 Nesting Types of nesting Subprograms within a subprogram Program section repeats within a program section repeat Subprograms repeated Program section repeats within a subprogram Nesting depth The nesting depth is the number of successive levels in which program sections or subprograms can call further program sections or subprograms Maximum nesting depth for subprograms 8 Maximum nesting depth for main program calls 6 where a CYCL CALL acts like a main program call You can nest program section repeats as often as desired HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 7 5 Nesting 7 5 Nesting e
84. key row HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Programs with more than 100 NC blocks cannot be selected an error message is issued If nesting with PGM CALL results in more than 100 NC blocks there is no test graphic display an error message is not issued Copying to and from the directory TNC is possible with Windows Explorer Clicking the soft key bar shifts the soft key row to the right or to the left Available function Available function Programs can be selected max 100 NC blocks are displayed further blocks are truncated in the display Nested programs can be simulated TNCremo or file manager of programming station must be used for copying Clicking any soft key bar activates the respective soft key row S il 496 HEIDENHAIN DR JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH Dr Johannes Heidenhain Stralse 5 83301 Traunreut Germany 49 8669 31 0 49 8669 5061 E mail info heidenhain de Technical support 49 8669 32 1000 Measuring systems 49 8669 31 3104 E mail service ms Support heidenhain de TNC support lt gt 49 8669 31 3101 E mail service nc support heidenhain de NC programming 49 8669 31 3103 E mail service nc pgm heidenhain de PLC programming 49 8669 31 3102 E mail service plc heidenhain de Lathe controls lt gt 49 8669 31 3105 E mail service lathe support heidenhain de www heidenhain de 3 D Touch Probe Systems from HEIDENHAIN help you to reduce non cutting time For example i
85. miscellaneous functions M Displaying editing the tool table 484 Are considered Available function Each time the simulation is repeated by pressing the START soft key time calculation starts at O Arrangement of soft key rows and soft keys varies depending on the active screen layout Each sectional plane can be selected by individual soft keys Small character set When you switch to the Programming mode of operation the warning No write permission is displayed once a change has been made the error message is cleared and the program is reset to the beginning when you switch back to Test Run mode Lead to error messages if they are not integrated in the PLC Function available via soft key Sectional plane can be selected via three toggle soft keys Medium character set The operating mode can be switched Changes to the program do not influence the position of the cursor Are ignored during Test Run Function not available Comparison Differences in Manual Operation functionality 3 D ROT function Manual deactivation of the Tilt working plane function Jog increment function Preset table Behavior during presetting HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 If the tilted working plane function is deactivated for both operating modes the text fields will be filled with zeros instead of the current rotary axis positions when the 3 D ROT function is next called The positions are entered correctly if only one
86. multiple Function not available Available function machine axes C axis operation spindle motor drives Function not available Available function rotary axis Automatic exchange of milling head Function not available Available function Support of angle heads Function not available Available function Balluf tool identification Function not available Available function Management of multiple tool Function not available Available function magazines Expanded tool management via Python Function not available Available function HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 465 il Comparison User functions Program entry HEIDENHAIN conversational DIN ISO With smarT NC With ASCII editor Position data Nominal positions for lines and arcs in Cartesian coordinates Nominal positions for lines and arcs in polar coordinates Incremental or absolute dimensions Display and entry in mm or inches Paraxial positioning blocks Set the last tool position as pole empty CC block Surface normal vectors LN Spline blocks SPL Tool compensation In the working plane and tool length Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks Three dimensional tool radius compensation Tool table Central storage of tool data Multiple tool tables with any number of tools Flexible management of tool types Filtered display of selectable tools Sorting function Column names Copy function Overwriting relevant tool data Form view Exchange of tool table betwe
87. o 1 h Fehler_ 01 h bak fsck0000 rec ain chm TCHPR42 TXT TCHPR42 bak TCHPR421 TXT TCHPR422 TXT TCHPR423 TXT TCHPR424 TXT TCHPR425 TXT TCHPR426 TXT TCHPR42 TXT TCHPR42 BAK TCHPR42 _01d TXT TCHPR43 TX TCHPR431 TXT 15 filets 195 5 MB vacant 28 file s 195 5 MB vacant HI i 4 pr z DIAGNOSIS Programming Fundamentals File Management If you wish to copy from the external data medium to the TNC move the highlight in the right window to the file to be transferred EO To select another drive or directory press the soft key for choosing the directory The TNC opens a pop up window Select the desired directory in the pop up window by using the arrow keys and the ENT key Transfer several files Press the TAG soft key in the second soft key row see Tagging files page 103 Confirm with the OK soft key or with the ENT key A status window appears on the TNC informing about the copying progress or ENDOW To end data transfer move the highlight into the left E window and then press the WINDOW soft key The standard file manager window is displayed again press the SHOW TREE soft key If you press the SHOW FILES soft key the TNC shows the content of the selected directory p To select another directory in the split screen display HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 th the AA iii ing wi 3 4 Work i il th the ri1gfllanager ing wi 3
88. parameters If you do not enter an index the first row is read n O Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index 8 9 Accessing 266 Programming Q Parameters il SOL UPDATE SQL UPDATE transfers the data prepared in the Q parameters into the row of the result set addressed with INDEX The existing row in the result set is completely overwritten SQL UPDATE takes into account all columns entered in the Select command ER gt Parameter no for result Q parameter in which the SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle index too large value outside of value range or incorrect data format Data bank SQL access ID Q parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT gt Data bank Index for SQL result Row number within the result set The table entries prepared in the Q parameters are written to this row If you do not enter an index the first row is written to n 0 Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index SQL INSERT SQL INSERT generates a new row in the result set and transfers the data prepared in the Q parameters into the new row SQL INSERT takes into account all columns entered in the Select command Table columns not entered in the Select command are filled with default values soL gt Parameter no for result O parameter in which
89. program Q113 Tool length Q114 284 Coordinates after probing during program run 284 Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 130 285 Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC 285 Measurement results from touch probe cycles see also User s Manual for Touch Probe Cycles 286 8 13 Programming Examples 288 Sank 284 9 1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP 296 Fundamentals 296 9 2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control Spindle and Coolant 297 Overview 297 9 3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data 298 Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 298 Moving to positions in a non tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane M130 300 9 4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior 301 Machining small contour steps M97 301 Machining open contours corners M98 303 Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 304 Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution M136 305 Feed rate for circular arcs M109 M110 M111 305 Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 Miscellaneous functions software option 306 Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 Miscellaneous functions software option sacs 308 Retraction from the contour in the too
90. program instructions Starting TNCremo under Windows Click lt Start gt lt Programs gt lt HEIDENHAIN Applications gt lt TNCremo gt When you start TNCremo for the first time TNCremo automatically tries to set up a connection with the TNC HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces S il Data transfer between the TNC and TNCremoNT TNCremoNT OF x Datei Ansicht Extras Hilfe Before you transfer a program from the TNC to the PC a oj x o fn you must make absolutely sure that you have already Steueung saved the program currently selected on the TNC The pane _ arte __ _ atte Datu _ aj TNC saves changes automatically when you switch the See SE Frei B93 MByte mode of operation on the TNC or when you select the file EEH 373 02 08 97 14 51 30 Insgesamt B 1 manager via the PGM MGT key ee z ae CAY11H 384 02 09 97 14 51 30 x Verbindung Protokoll Check whether the TNC is connected to the correct serial port on your PC or to the network E200 1596 06 04 99 15 39 42 sE E CA 201 H 1004 06 04 99 15 39 44 em Once you have started TNCremoNT you will see a list of all files that Eja 9 2x a PARA are stored in the active directory in the upper section of the main E pa a ead a window 1 Using the menu items lt File gt and lt Change directory gt you A212 Se 06 04 99 15 38 40 ol DNC Verbindung aktiv can change the active directory or select ano
91. range 230 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 AJAI A RY BY FA BR O O _ to 9 to 9 64 U axis mirrored 128 V axis mirrored 256 W axis mirrored Combinations sum of individual axes Active scaling factor in X axis Active scaling factor in Y axis Active scaling factor in Z axis Active scaling factor in U axis Active scaling factor in V axis Active scaling factor in W axis 3 D ROT A axis 3 D ROT B axis 3 D ROT C axis Tilted working plane active inactive 1 0 in a Program Run operating mode Tilted working plane active inactive 1 0 in a Manual operating mode X axis Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis Negative software limit switch in axes 1 to 9 Positive software limit switch in axes 1 to 9 Software limit switch on or off O o0n 1 off tt Additional Functions i il E Additional Functions Nominal position in the REF system 240 Current position in the active coordinate system 270 TS triggering touch probe 350 250 1 1 50 51 52 53 54 DD Oo o1f BY Ww X axis Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis X axis Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis Touch probe type Line in the touch probe table Effective length Effective ball radius Rounding radius Center offset reference axis Center offset minor axis Spindle orientation angle in deg
92. right hand window automatically shows all files stored in the highlighted directory Programming Fundamentals File Management il Step 3 Select a file Press the SELECT TYPE soft key Press the SHOW ALL soft key to display all files or Move the highlight to the desired file in the right window Press the ENT key The TNC opens the selected file in the operating mode trom which you called the file manager HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 th the AA iii ing wi 3 4 Work th the i1gfllanager ing wi 3 4 Work Creating a new directory Move the highlight in the left window to the directory in which you want to create a subdirectory Enter the new file name and confirm with ENT NEW ENT Press the YES soft key to confirm or Abort with the NO soft key Creating a new file Select the directory in which you wish to create the new file NEW 7 Enter the new file name with the file extension and confirm with ENT Open the dialog box for creating a new file Enter the new file name with the file extension and NEW ENT confirm with ENT Programming Fundamentals File Management il Copying a single file Move the highlight to the file you wish to copy cory Press the COPY soft key to select the copy function e The TNC opens a pop up window F Enter the name of the destination file and confirm your entry with the ENT key or OK soft key the TNC copies the fil
93. rows until the STATUS soft keys appear Either select the additional status display e g nace positions and coordinates or a use the soft keys to select the desired view With the soft keys or switch over soft keys you can choose directly between the available status displays below is not available unless the associated software A Please note that some of the status information described option is enabled on your TNC HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 2 4 Status E ii Overview After switch on the TNC displays the Overview status form provided Program run full sequence Programming that you have selected the PROGRAM STATUS screen layout or Sy POSITION STATUS The overview form contains a summary of the is L ixe 1 ro Fmax overvar eee ee fa lays 19 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING most important status information which you can also find on the DEF 11 1 SCL 9 9995 at T E 3 WKZ 3 A various detail forms ee aa L t5000 R 3 00 E 0 0 0 ae ane S STAT1 MM DL PGM 0 2500 DR PGM 0 1000 M110 Y 8 0000 am xy iti j 4 0 0000 J Position display aee OVERVIEW asi Sea ce s OOOO a oe 12 44 oe eee eee 00 00 33 dp Bere dt D Tool information 33 747 Y 72 578 Z 9 754 O q 0 000 S 94 680 x Active M functions ar sat N Cey actL M ok rT 3 Z 6 o F mm min Our 57 8 M 5 EERE SNE ESS ST eT e SSeS 2 Active coordinate transformations status status a status starus or a
94. s 195 5 MB vacant 2j PAGE PAGE SELECT COPY SELECT WINDOW LAST N N FILES END t kaa G22 E ee automatically opens a program and asks for the unit of measure for the new program To select the unit of measure press the MM or INCH soft key The TNC automatically starts the workpiece blank definition see Define a workpiece blank on page38s The TNC automatically generates the first and last blocks of the program Afterwards you can no longer change these blocks Further information on this topic File management See Working with the File Manager on page 93 Creating a new program See Creating and Writing Programs on page 9 N t LL eb K re O S Oo k 0 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 37 1 3 Programming the First a Define a workpiece blank Immediately after you have created a new program the TNC starts the Programming dialog for entering the workpiece blank definition Always define the Workpiece blank def maximum Z workpiece blank as a cuboid by entering the MIN and MAX points BLK FORN 8 112 X10 v39 2 20 each with reference to the selected reference point EE OE na a 5 L xose Voa RO FHAX R After you have created a new program the TNC automatically initiates f P75 tm 4 the workpiece blank definition and asks for the required data Working plane in graphic XY Enter the active spindle axis Z is saved as def
95. sb S jm hom eb ad 4 b eb Z ad LLI I LO q f Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate ONS server 432 MOD Functions 15 6 Position Display Types Application In the Manual Operation mode and in the Program Run modes of operation you can select the type of coordinates to be displayed The figure at right shows the different tool positions Starting position Target position of the tool Workpiece datum Machine datum The TNC position displays can show the following coordinates Nominal position the value presently NOML commanded by the TNC Actual position current tool position ACTL Reference position the actual position relative to RFACTL the machine datum Reference position the nominal position relative REF NOML to the machine datum Servo lag difference between nominalandactual LAG positions following error Distance remaining to the programmed position DIST difference between actual and target positions With the MOD function Position display 1 you can select the position display in the status display With the MOD function Position display 2 you can select the position display in the status display HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 lay Types Isp D ItTiION 15 6 Pos i il 4 am eb cab S e Q ma O nD S LO q 15 7 Unit of Measurement Application This MOD fu
96. section up to 65 534 times in succession The total number of times the program section is executed is always one more than the programmed number of repeats Programming a program section repeat E To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key and enter a LABEL NUMBER for the program section you wish to repeat If you want to use a label name press the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry Enter the program section Calling a program section repeat Press the LBL CALL key CALL To call subprograms section repeats Enter the label number of the subprogram to be called then confirm with the ENT key If you want to use a label name press the key to switch to text entry Repeat REP Enter the number of repeats then confirm with the ENT key 208 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il 7 4 Separate Program as Subprogram Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which another program is called with CALL PGM 2 Then the other program is run from beginning to end 3 The TNC then resumes the first calling part program with the BEGIN PGMA block after the program call s Programming notes CALL PGM B No labels are needed to call any program as a subprogram The called program must not contain the miscellaneous functions M2 or M30 If you have defined subprograms with labels in the ENDECA called program you can then use M2 or M30 with the FN 9 IF 0 EQU 0 GOTO LBL 99
97. status L Fixed tool number The tool is always returned to the same pocket in the tool magazine Locked pocket see also column ST Display of the comment to the tool from TOOL T Information on this tool pocket that is to be sent to the PLC Function is defined by the machine tool builder The machine tool documentation provides further information Tool type Function is defined by the machine tool builder The machine tool documentation provides further information Box magazine Lock the pocket above Box magazine Lock the pocket below Box magazine Lock the pocket at left Box magazine Lock the pocket at right HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 on 5 2 Tool Data Tool number Pocket reserv Yes ENT No NOENT Special tool Fixed pocket Yes ENT No NO ENT Pocket locked Yes ENT No NO ENT PLC status Value Tool type for pocket table Lock the pocket above Lock the pocket below Lock the pocket at left Lock the pocket at right b il 5 2 Tool Data Select beginning of table Select end of table Select previous page in table Select next page in table Reset pocket table Reset tool number column T Go to beginning of the line Go to end of the line Simulate a tool change Select a tool from the tool table The TNC shows the contents of the tool table Use the arrow keys to select a tool press OK to transfer it to the pocket table Edit the current field Sort the view p
98. switchover between machining and programming modes Soft key selection keys for machine tool builders Switches soft key rows for machine tool builders USB connection HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Ko HEIDENHAIN Manual operation 003 000 500 000 Ona ain Our 111x nS s e u 0 S IST 10 19 138 S OVR 2 2 Visual Display Unit and Keyjgara 2 2 Visual Display Unit and ke ara Sets the screen layout You select the screen layout yourself In the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation for example you can have the TNC show program blocks in the left window while the right window displays programming graphics You could also display the program structure in the right window instead or display only program blocks in one large window The available screen windows depend on the selected operating mode To change the screen layout Press the SPLIT SCREEN key The soft key row o7 shows the available layout options see Operating Modes page 60 PROGRAM Select the desired screen layout GRAPHICS 58 Introduction il Operating panel The TNC 320 is delivered with an integrated keyboard The figure at right shows the controls and displays of the keyboard 1 File management Calculator MOD function HELP function Programming modes Machine operating modes Initiation of programming dialog Arrow keys and GOTO jump command Numerical input and axis selection Navigation keys OF Ph W N
99. tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program Programming Programming Contours il 6 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Overview With polar coordinates you can define a position in terms of its angle PA and its distance PR relative to a previously defined pole CC Polar coordinates are useful with olar Coordinates Positions on circular arcs Workpiece drawing dimensions in degrees e g bolt hole circles Overview of path functions with polar coordinates Sum Function Path function key Tool movement Required input Page SS Straight line LP P Straight line Polar radius polar angle of Page 180 Q the straight line end point Circular arc CP a P Circular path around circle Polar angle of the arc end Page 181 8 center pole to arc end point point direction of rotation ps Circular arc CTP e P Circular arc with tangential Polar radius polar angle of Page 182 5 connection to the preceding the arc end point A contour element LO Helical interpolation P Combination of a circularand Polar radius polar angle of Page 183 Te a linear movement the arc end point coordinate of the end point in the tool axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 179 il Zero point for polar coordinates pole CC You can define the pole CC anywhere in the part program before blocks containing polar coordinates Set the pole in the same way as you would program the circle center Coordinates Enter Cartesian coordinates for
100. the SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle value outside of value range or incorrect data format Data bank SQL access ID Q parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Example Row number is transferred in a Q parameter m x DQ 3 2 J lt 5 3 ca D TA 5 re Q 3 3 D Q o D O lt 8 9 Accessing T with SQL Commands Example Row number is transferred in a Q parameter 26 T L z e Q O V S T 8 9 Accessing SQL COMMIT SQL COMMIT transfers all rows in the result set back to the table A lock set with SELECT FOR UPDATE is canceled The handle given in the SQL SELECT command loses its validity Parameter no for result O parameter in which the Sat SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle or equal entries in columns requiring unique entries Data bank SQL access ID Q parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT SQL ROLLBACK The execution of SQL ROLLBACK depends on whether INDEX is programmed E f INDEX is not programmed The result set is not written back to the table any changes insertions are discarded The transaction is closed and the handle given in the SQL SELECT command loses its validity Typical application Ending a tr
101. the axis n m to be rotated about Input range 359 9999 to 359 9999 Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 342 Abbreviations used RELATIVE SPA SPB SPC Example NC block 11 2 The PLANE Function HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 339 il amm 2 oa O E z Oo Z SS 0 O wt de O Tilting t 11 2 The PLANE Function Tilting the working plane through axis angle PLANE AXIAL FCL 3 function Application The PLANE AXIAL function defines both the position of the working plane and the nominal coordinates of the rotary axes This function is particularly easy to use on machines with Cartesian coordinates and with kinematics structures in which only one rotary axis is active 340 Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Input parameters axra Axis angle A Axis angle to which the A axis is to SES be moved If entered incrementally it is the angle by which the A axis is to be moved from its current position Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Axis angle B Axis angle to which the B axis is to be moved If entered incrementally it is the angle by which the B axis is to be moved from its current position Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Axis angle C Axis angle to which the C axis is to be moved If entered incrementally it is the angle by which the C axis is to b
102. the contour from the known coordinate data and supports the programming dialog with the interactive programming graphics The figure at upper right shows a workpiece drawing for which FK programming is the most convenient programming method HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 O z cO D L o S W A 36 Featu 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Adva i il uodo 3lemyo n ee4 Burwweibo1d poauenPy Bulwiweib01g 4NO JUOY 39314 Yd S1NO0 UOD Ye 9 9 Programming Programming Contours il 188 Graphics during FK programming If you wish to use graphic support during FK programming select the PROGRAM GRAPHICS screen layout see Programming and Editing on page 61 Incomplete coordinate data often are not sufficient to fully define a workpiece contour In this case the TNC indicates the possible solutions in the FK graphic You can then select the contour that matches the drawing The FK graphic displays the elements of the workpiece contour in different colors Blue The contour element is fully defined Green The entered data describe a limited number of possible solutions select the correct one Red The entered data are not sufficient to determine the contour element enter further data If the entered data permit a limited number of possible solutions and the contour element is displayed in green select the correct contour element as follows Press the SHOW SOLUTION soft ke
103. the pole or if you want to use the last programmed position enter No coordinates Before programming polar coordinates define the pole You can only define the pole in Cartesian coordinates The pole remains in effect until you define a new pole olar Coordinates Example NC blocks Straight line LP The tool moves in a straight line from its current position to the straight line end point The starting point is the end point of the preceding block Polar coordinate radius PR Enter the distance from the pole CC to the straight line end point Polar coordinate angle PA Angular position of the Straight line end point between 360 and 360 6 5 Path Contour The sign of PA depends on the angle reference axis E f the angle from the angle reference axis to PR is counterclockwise PA gt O E f the angle from the angle reference axis to PR is clockwise PA lt 0 Example NC blocks 180 Programming Programming Contours il Circular path CP around pole CC The polar coordinate radius PR is also the radius of the arc PR is defined by the distance from the starting point to the pole CC The last programmed tool position will be the starting point of the arc Polar coordinates angle PA Angular position of the arc end point between 99 999 9999 and 99 999 9999 Direction of rotation DR olar Coordinates Example NC blocks For incremental coordinates enter the same sign for DR gt and
104. the respective newly defined interface Application To set up a data interface select the file management PGM MGT and press the MOD key Press the MOD key again and enter the code number 123 The TNC shows the user parameter GfgSerialInterface in which you can enter the following settings Setting the RS 232 interface Open the RS232 folder The TNC then displays the following settings Setting the baud rate baudRate You can set the BAUD RATE data transfer speed from 110 to 115 200 baud Set the protocol protocol The data communication protocol controls the data flow of a serial transmission comparable to MP5030 of the iITNC 530 Here the BLOCKWISE setting designates a form of data transfer where data is transmitted in blocks This is not to be confused with the blockwise data reception and simultaneous blockwise processing by older TNC contouring controls Blockwise reception of an NC program and simultaneous machining of the program is not possible Standard data transfer STANDARD Packet based data transfer BLOCKWISE Transmission without protocol RAW_DATA 422 Basic data Machine parameter programming W HHAAAA gp 888880 Z2uvcVoOlo a 3 H BAUD 9600 STANDARD A i EVEN 1 Stop Bit ONE se EXT al A Me ea DIAGNOSIS PSS 2 PAGE PAGE VIEW MORE MOD Functions il Set the data bits dataBits By setting the data bits you define whether a charact
105. the rotary axes present on the machine In general there are always two solution possibilities Use the SEQ switch to specify which possibility the TNC should use SEQ positions the master axis so that It assumes a positive angle The master axis is the 1st rotary axis from the tool or the last rotary axis from the table depending on the machine configuration see figure at top righty SEQ positions the master axis so that It assumes a negative angle If the solution you chose with SEQ is not within the machine s range of traverse the TNC displays the Entered angle not permitted error message When the PLANE AXIAL function is used the PLANE RESET switch is nonfunctional If you do not define SEQ the TNC determines the solution as follows 1 The TNC first checks whether both solution possibilities are within the traverse range of the rotary axes 2 I f they are then the TNC selects the shortest possible solution 3 If only one solution is within the traverse range the TNC selects this solution 4 lf neither solution is within the traverse range the TNC displays the Entered angle not permitted error message 344 y SEQ Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Example for a machine with a rotary table C and a tilting table A Programmed function PLANE SPATIAL SPA 0 SPB 45 SPC 0 None None None None None None 90 lt A lt 10 A 0 90 lt A lt 10 A 0 None A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A
106. to the tool datum The machine tool builder The effective length of the touch probe is always usually defines the spindle tip as the tool datum Set the datum In the spindle axis such that for the machine tool table Z 0 ca L To select the calibration function for the touch probe att length press the TOUCH PROBE and CAL L soft keys The TNC then displays a menu window with four input fields Enter the tool axis with the axis key Datum Enter the height of the ring gauge Effective ball radius and Effective length do not require input Move the touch probe to a position just above the ring gauge To change the traverse direction if necessary press a soft key or an arrow key To probe the upper surface of the ring gauge press the machine START button 370 Manual Operation and Setup il Calibrating the effective radius and compensating center misalignment After the touch probe is inserted it normally needs to be aligned exactly with the spindle axis The calibration function determines the misalignment between touch probe axis and spindle axis and computes the compensation The calibration routine varies depending on the entry in the TRACK column of the touch probe table spindle orientation active inactive If the function for orienting the infrared touch probe to the programmed probe direction is active the calibration cycle is executed after you have pressed NC Start once If the function is not active yo
107. tool tool axis Z Spindle speed 2000 rom Retract tool F MAX rapid traverse Move the tool at F MAX to a position above the hole spindle on Positioning with Manual Data Input il 13 1 Programming oj Executing Simple Machining Operations Straight line function See Straight line L on page 167 DRILLING cycle See User s Manual Cycles Cycle 200 DRILLING HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Define DRILLING cycle Set up clearance of the tool above the hole Total hole depth algebraic sign working direction Feed rate for drilling Depth of each infeed before retraction Dwell time after every retraction in seconds Coordinate of the workpiece surface Set up clearance of the tool above the hole Dwell time in seconds at the hole bottom Call DRILLING cycle Retract the tool End of program o i Executing Simple Machining Operations 13 1 Programming Example 2 Correcting workpiece misalignment on machines with rotary tables Use the 3 D touch probe to rotate the coordinate system See Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Operating Modes section Compensating workpiece misalignment in the Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual Write down the rotation angle and cancel the basic rotation Select operating mode Positioning with MDI 7 Select the rotary table axis enter the rotation IV angle and feed rate you wrote down for example L C 2 561 F50 i Conclude entry O Press the machi
108. using the screen keyboard BO screens err a a B The TNC opens a window in which the numeric entry field of the od tapie a a B TNC is displayed with the corresponding letters assigned STA ae a na _ emoe You can move the cursor to the desired character by repeatedly u E pressing the respective key ok CANCEL Wait until the selected character is transferred to the entry field m before you enter the next character e s Use the OK soft key to load the text into the open dialog field je P el Use the abc ABC soft key to select upper or lower case If your machine tool builder has defined additional special characters you can call them with the SPECIAL CHARACTER soft key and insert them To delete individual characters use the BACKSPACE soft key 112 Programming Programming Aids 4 2 Adding Comments Function You can add comments to a part program to explain program steps or make general notes Enter the file name using the screen keyboard see Screen Keyboard on page 112 If the TNC cannot show the entire comment on the screen the gt gt sign is displayed The last character in a comment block must not have any tilde Entering a comment in a separate block Select the block after which the comment is to be inserted Press the SPEC FCT key to select the special functions To select the program functions press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Shift soft key row to the left Press the
109. values from touch probe cycles in datum tables page 368 or see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table page 369 To terminate the probe function press the END soft key Outside circle Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point outside of the circle Select the probe direction by soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Repeat the probing process for the remaining three points See figure at lower right Datum Enter the coordinates of the datum and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key or write the values to a table see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables page 368 or see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table page 369 To terminate the probe function press the END soft key After the probing procedure is completed the TNC displays the coordinates of the circle center and the circle radius PR HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ion Software Option D Touch Probe Touch Probe Funct k ing wi 12 8 Datum Sett k il ion ch Probe Funct Software Option 12 8 Datum Setting with 3 D Touch Probe Tou Measuring Workpieces with a 3 D Touch Probe You can also use the touch probe in the Manual Operation and El Handwheel operating modes to make simple measurements on the workpiece Numerous programmable probe cycles are available for complex measurin
110. was expanded by parameters 0301 Move to clearance height and Q320 setup clearance see User s Manual for Cycles Touch probe cycles 408 to 419 The TNC now also writes to line O of the preset table when the display value is set see User s Manual for Cycles In the machine operating modes Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block datum tables can now also be selected STATUS M The definition of feed rates in fixed cycles can now also include FU and FZ values see User s Manual for Cycles HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 New Functions of Software 340 55x 04 Changed Functions of Software 340 55x 04 Changed Functions of Software 340 55x 04 In Cycle 22 you can now define a tool name also for the coarse roughing tool see User s Manual Cycles The additional status display has been revised The following improvements have been introduced see Additional status displays on page 65 A new overview page with the most important status displays were introduced The tolerance values set in Cycle 32 are displayed The pocket stud and slot milling cycles 210 to 214 were removed from the standard soft key row CYCL DEF gt POCKETS STUDS SLOTS For reasons of compatibility the cycles will still be available and can be selected via the GOTO key With Cycle 25 Contour Train closed contours can now also be programmed Tool changes are now also possible during mid program startup Language dependent tables can now be output
111. with FN16 F Print The soft key structure of the SPEC FCT function was changed and adapted to the ITNC 530 10 Table of Contents HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 First Steps with the TNC 320 introduction Besramming Fundamentals File i Programming Aids Programming Tools Programming Programming Contours Programming Subprograms and rogram Section Repeats 1 Programming Q Parameters 1 Programming Miscellaneous Functions 1 Programming Special Functions Programming Multiple Axis Machining Manual Operation and Setup 1 Positioning with Manual Data Input Test Run and Program Run MOD Functions Tables and Overviews en m ww 11 1 1 Overview 34 1 2 Machine Switch On 35 Acknowledge the power interruption and move to the reference points 35 1 3 Programming the First Part 36 Select the correct operating mode 36 The most important TNC keys 36 Create a new program Tile management 37 Define a workpiece blank 38 Program layout 39 Program a simple contour 40 Create a cycle program 43 1 4 Graphically Testing the First Part Advanced Graphic Features Software Option 46 Select the correct operating mode 46 Select the tool table for the test run 46 Choose the program you want to test 47 Select the screen layout and the view 47 Start the program test 48 1 5 Tool Setup 49 Select the correct operating mode
112. 0 A 0 C 0 C 0 C 0 C 105 C 105 C 105 C 0 C 0 C 135 not prog not prog not prog A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 Error message A 45 C 90 Selecting the type of transformation entry optional On machines with C rotary tables a function is available for specifying the type of transformation COORD ROT specifies that the PLANE function should only rotate the coordinate system to the defined tilting angle The rotary table is not moved the compensation is purely mathematical TABLE ROT specifies that the PLANE function should position the rotary table to the defined tilting angle Compensation results from rotating the workpiece ROT D When the PLANE AXIAL function is used COORD ROT and TABLE ROT are nonfunctional If you use the TABLE ROT function in conjunction with a basic rotation and a tilting angle of 0 then the TNC tilts the table to the angle defined in the basic rotation HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 COORD ROT 345 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function a 11 3 viditlaneous Functions for Rotary Axes 11 3 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 software option 1 Standard behavior The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate of a rotary axis In degrees min in mm programs and also in inch programs The feed rate therefo
113. 12 40 a 270 Programming Q Parameters il Rules for formulas Mathematical formulas are programmed according to the following rules Higher level operations are performed first Ist calculation 5 3 15 2nd calculation 2 10 20 3rd calculation 15 20 35 or Ist calculation 10 squared 100 2nd calculation 3 to the power of 3 27 3rd calculation 100 27 73 Distributive law Law for calculating with parentheses a b ch a b a c HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 anne Formulas Directly o i 8 10terinc Formulas Directly Programming example Calculate an angle with the arc tangent from the opposite side Q12 and adjacent side Q13 then store in Q25 Q To select the formula entering function press the Q key and the FORMULA soft key or use the shortcut Q Press the Q key on the ASCII keyboard 25 Enter the parameter number gt Shift the soft key row and select the arc tangent function a Ea Shift the soft key row and open the parentheses Q 12 Enter Q parameter number 12 Select division O 13 Enter Q parameter number 13 gt E Close parentheses and conclude formula entry Example NC block Programming Q Parameters il 8 11 String Parameters String processing functions You can use the QS parameters to create variable character strings You can output such character strings for example through the FN 16 F PRINT function to create variable
114. 2 Example Bind a Q parameter to a table column Example Cancel binding Programming Q Parameters il SOL SELECT SQL SELECT selects table rows and transfers them to the result set The SQL server places the data in the result set row by row The rows are numbered in ascending order starting from 0 This row number called the INDEX is used in the SOL commands Fetch and Update Enter the selection criteria in the SQL SELECT WHERE option This lets you restrict the number of rows to be transferred If you do not use this option all rows in the table are loaded Enter the sorting criteria in the SQL SELECT ORDER BY option Enter the column designation and the keyword for ascending descending order If you do not use this option the rows are placed In random order Lock out the selected rows for other applications with the SQL SELECT FOR UPDATE option Other applications can continue to read these rows but cannot change them We strongly recommend using this option if you are making changes to the table entries Empty result set If no rows match the selection criteria the SOL server returns a valid handle but no table entries HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 9 Accessing T with SQL Commands j il a Parameter no for result O parameter for the Example Select all table rows handle The SQL server returns the handle for the group of columns and rows selected with the current select comman
115. 4 Manual Operation and Setup il Activating manual tilting To select manual tilting press the 3 D ROT soft key Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the Manual Operation menu item To activate manual tilting press the ACTIVE soft key ACTIVE Enter the tilt angle To reset the tilting function set the desired operating modes in the menu Tilt working plane to Inactive Use the arrow keys to position the highlight on the desired rotary axis To conclude entry press the END key If the tilted working plane function Is active and the TNC moves the machine axes in accordance with the tilted axes the status display shows the symbol If you activate the Tilt working plane function for the Program Run operating mode the tilt angle entered in the menu becomes active In the first block of the part program If you use Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE or the PLANE function in the part program the angle values defined there are in effect Angle values entered in the menu will be overwritten HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Manual operation Programmin Manual operation Inactive F4 4 9 s ra 000 c 25 8 6 H 7 SSES 12 38 5r F OVR COPY PAST OK CANCEL FIELD FIEL ot Ss Er on 2 E D e Working Plane Software Option 1 j sd N j il L uondo BAeMYOS uejd UDOM A hin 6 ZL Manual Operation and Setup il 386 Positioning with Manual
116. 4 Work The TNC in a network If the TNC is connected to a network the directory window displays additional drives see figure All the functions described above selecting a drive copying files etc also apply to network drives provided that you have been granted the corresponding rights To connect the Ethernet card to your network see Ethernet Interface page 427 The TNC logs error messages during network operation see Ethernet Interface page 427 Connecting and disconnecting a network drive To select the program management Press the PGM MGT MGT key If necessary press the WINDOW soft key to set up the screen as it is shown at the upper right To manage the network drives Press the NETWORK soft key second soft key row In the right hand window the TNC shows the network drives available for access With the soft keys described below you can define the connection for each drive Manual operation Programming EHS TNC N GQ nc_prog BO 25x 25X TEST Auto_Tast BO CAD Cast CYCLES Man_Tast PLANE screens SHOW SLTEST test table tnceguide 4 MOUNT UNMOUNT AUTO CONNECT DEVICE DEVICE DISCONN Mount Auto Mount point Mount device N Nde 1pc5323N transfer al A e NETWORK PING INFO DEFINE NETWORK CONNECTN EDIT NETWORK CONNECTN Establish the network connection If the connection is active the TNC marks the Mnt column
117. 5 Calculates and assigns the sine of an angle in degrees g FN 7 COSINE Example FN 7 Q21 COS 05 C0500 ape Calculates and assigns the cosine of an angle in degrees FN 8 ROOT SUM OF SQUARES FNS Example FN 8 Q10 5 LEN 4 SMS Calculates and assigns length from two values FN 13 ANGLE ae Example FN 13 Q20 25 ANG Q1 a Calculates the angle from the arc tangent of two sides or from the sine and cosine of the angle 0 lt angle lt 360 and assigns it to a parameter 230 Programming Q Parameters il 8 5 Circle Calculations Application The TNC can use the functions for calculating circles to calculate the circle center and the circle radius from three or four given points on the circle The calculation is more accurate if four points are used Application These functions can be used if you wish to determine the location and size of a hole or a pitch circle using the programmable probing function FN 23 Determining the CIRCLE DATA from three TNs points OF CIRCLE Example FN 23 Q20 CDATA Q30 The coordinate pairs of three points on a circle must be saved in Q30 and the following five parameters in this case up to Q35 The TNC then saves the circle center of the reference axis X if spindle axis Is Z in parameter Q20 the circle center in the minor axis Y if spindle axis is Z in parameter Q21 and the circle radius in parameter O22 FN 24 Determining the CIRCLE DATA fr
118. 6 is APPEND or M CLOSE called the protocol is called the data is overwritten appended to the existing file Writing to LOG file with FN16 X Displaying parameter contents in the additional status display X Displaying parameter contents during programming O INFO X SQL functions for writing and reading tables X 468 Graphic support 2 D programming graphics Synchronization between block display and graphics REDRAW function Show grid lines as the background 3 D programming graphics Test graphics plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view High resolution view Image data processing Tool display Setting the simulation speed Coordinates of line intersection for projection in 3 planes Expanded zoom functions mouse operation Displaying frame for workpiece blank Displaying the depth value in plan view during mouse over Targeted stop of test run STOP AT N Consideration of tool change macro Program run graphics plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view High resolution view Saving opening of simulation results Datum tables for storing workpiece related datums Preset table for saving reference points presets Pallet management Support of pallet files Tool oriented machining Pallet preset table for managing pallet datums Returning to the contour With mid program startup After program interruption Autostart function Actual position capture Actual positions can be transferred to the NC program En
119. 7 The more calculation steps you define for the lines the smoother the curve becomes E The machining direction can be altered by changing the entries for the starting and end angles in the plane Clockwise machining direction starting angle gt end angle Counterclockwise machining direction starting angle lt end angle The tool radius is not taken into account a Mllprogramming Examples N 88 5 W D O O Q 3 5 Q rTi x Q 3 D V Center in X axis Center in Y axis Semiaxis in X Semiaxis in Y Starting angle in the plane End angle in the plane Number of calculation steps Rotational position of the ellipse Milling depth Feed rate for plunging Feed rate for milling Set up clearance for pre positioning Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Call machining operation Programming Q Parameters il HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 10 Machining operation Shift datum to center of ellipse Account for rotational position in the plane Calculate angle increment Copy starting angle Set counter Calculate X coordinate for starting point Calculate Y coordinate for starting point Programming Examples Move to starting point in the plane Pre position in spindle axis to set up clearance Move to working depth Update the angle Update the counter Calculate t
120. 71 il Comparison Cycles 1 Pecking 2 Tapping 3 Slot milling 4 Pocket milling 5 Circular pocket 6 Rough out SL 7 Datum shift 8 Mirror image 9 Dwell time 10 Rotation 11 Scaling 12 Program call 13 Oriented spindle stop 14 Contour definition 15 Pilot drilling SL 1 16 Contour milling SL I 17 Tapping controlled spindle 18 Thread cutting 19 Working plane 20 Contour data 21 Pilot drilling 22 Rough out Parameter 0401 feed rate factor Parameter 0404 fine roughing strategy 23 Floor finishing 24 Side finishing 25 Contour train 26 Axis specific scaling factor 472 X KX XI XJ X XI XI X XI X X X X X option 08 lt K X X XI XJI XI XIX X X X X X X X X XIXI XIXI X X option 08 with MC 420 X X X XJ X X 27 Contour surface 28 Cylinder surface 29 Cylinder surface ridge 30 3 D data 32 Tolerance with HSC mode and TA 39 Cylinder surface external contour 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 Drilling Reaming Boring Universal drilling Back boring Universal pecking Tapping with floating tap holder Rigid tapping new Bore milling Tapping with chip breaking slot with reciprocating plunge Circular slot Rectangular pocket finishing Rectangular stud finishing Circular pocket finishing Circular stud finishing Circular pattern Linear pattern Multipass
121. 8 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 L Z 100 RO FMAX M2 LBL 10 Q16 Q06 Q10 Q108 FN 0 020 1 FN 0 024 04 Q25 Q5 Q4 013 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT CYCL DEF 7 1 X Q1 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y Q2 CYCL DEF 7 3 Z Q3 CYCL DEF 10 0 ROTATION CYCL DEF 10 1 ROT Q8 L X 0 Y 0 RO FMAX L Z 5 RO F1000 M3 LBL 1 CC Z 0 X 0 LP PR Q16 PA Q24 FQ11 L Y Q7 RO FQ12 FN 1 Q20 020 1 FN 1 Q24 024 025 FN 11 IF Q20 GT Q13 GOTO LBL 99 LP PR Q16 PA Q24 FQ11 L Y 0 RO FQ12 FN 1 Q20 020 1 FN 1 Q24 024 025 FN 12 IF Q20 LT Q13 GOTO LBL 1 LBL 99 CYCL DEF 10 0 ROTATION CYCL DEF 10 1 ROT 0 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT CYCL DEF 7 1 X 0 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y 0 CYCL DEF 7 3 Z 0 LBL 0 END PGM CYLIN HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 10 Machining operation Account for allowance and tool based on the cylinder radius Set counter Copy starting angle in space Z X plane Calculate angle increment Shift datum to center of cylinder X axis Account for rotational position in the plane Pre position in the plane to the cylinder center Pre position in the tool axis Set pole in the Z X plane Move to starting position on cylinder plunge cutting obliquely into the material Longitudinal cut in Y direction Update the counter Update solid angle Finished If finished jump to end Move in an approximated arc for the next lon
122. 8 Label LBL 208 Operating sequence 208 Programming notes 208 Programming a program section repeat 208 Calling a program section repeat 208 7 4 Separate Program as Subprogram 209 Operating sequence 209 Programming notes 209 Calling any program as a Subprogram 210 7 5 Nesting 211 Types of nesting 211 Nesting depth 211 Subprogram within a subprogram 212 Repeating program section repeats 213 Repeating a subprogram 214 7 6 Programming Examples 215 20 8 1 Principle and Overview 222 Programming notes 224 Calling Q parameter functions 225 8 2 Part Familles O Parameters in Place of Numerical Values 226 Function 226 8 3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations 227 Application 227 Overview 227 Programming fundamental operations 228 8 4 Trigonometric Functions 229 Definitions 229 Programming trigonometric functions 230 8 5 Circle Calculations 231 Application 231 8 6 If Then Decisions with Q Parameters 232 Application 2352 Unconditional jumps 232 Programming If Then decisions 232 Abbreviations used 233 8 7 Checking and Changing O Parameters 234 Procedure 234 8 8 Additional Functions 235 Overview 2395 FN 14 ERROR Displaying error messages 236 FN 16 F PRINT Formatted output of text and Q para
123. 80 actL H ok fT mm min Our 57 8 M 5 STATUS STATUS TOOL ae STATUS OF OVERVIEW STATUS ee Q PARAM HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 63 2 4 Status N Information in the status display ACTL X Y Z ORBIS a Ol Actual or nominal coordinates of the current position Machine axes the TNC displays auxiliary axes in lower case letters The sequence and quantity of displayed axes is determined by the machine tool builder Refer to your machine manual for more information The displayed feed rate in inches corresponds to one tenth of the effective value Spindle speed S feed rate F and active M functions Program run started Axis is locked Axis can be moved with the handwheel Axes are moving under a basic rotation Axes are moving in a tilted working plane No active program Program run started Program run stopped Program run is being aborted Introduction il Additional status displays The additional status displays contain detailed information on the program run They can be called in all operating modes except for the Programming and Editing mode of operation To switch on the additional status display Call the soft key row for screen layout Z Screen layout with additional status display In the status right half of the screen the TNC shows the Overview status form To select an additional status display gt Shift the soft key
124. 999 3 0 O to 1999 4 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 5 4 9 99999999 to 9 99999999 1 8 O to 999 3 0 Any text string in quotes 1 to 65 534 5 0 O to 1099 4 0 Tables and Overviews il 16 4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery A buffer battery supplies the TNC with current to prevent the data in RAM memory from being lost when the TNC is switched off If the TNC displays the error message Exchange buffer battery then you must replace the battery Make a data backup before changing the buffer battery To exchange the buffer battery first switch off the TNC The buffer battery must be exchanged only by trained service personnel Battery type 1 Lithium battery tyoe CR 2450N Renata ID 315 878 01 1 The buffer battery is on the main board of the MC 6110 Remove the five screws of the MC 6110 housing cover Remove the cover The buffer battery is at the border of the PCB Exchange the battery The socket accepts a new battery only in the correct orientation o1 A ON gt ae 5 aa k aa b re O os Q rs LLI i fe q HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 453 il Asayeg 1ng oy Buibueysxg p 9L Tables and Overviews il 454 Symbole 3 D touch probes Calibrating Triggering 370 3 D view 397 A Accessories 71 Actual position capture 84 Additional axes 75 Automatic program start 413 Automatic tool measurement 138 B Basi
125. C 320 371 12 6 Calibrating 3 D Touch Probes Probe Function Software Option Displaying calibration values The TNC saves the effective length and effective radius of the touch Tele Selene rosranning probe in the tool table The TNC saves the ball tip center misalignment Selection of the touch probe in the touch probe table in the CAL OF1 principal axis and CAL OF2 File __tne taple tcherope tp TYPE CAL_OF 1 CAL_OF2 CAL_ANG F FMAX DIST minor axis columns You can display the values on the screen by pressing the TOUCH PROBE TABLE soft key f p DIAGNOSIS before using the touch probe regardless of whether you wish to run the touch probe cycle in automatic mode or manual mode Make sure that you have activated the correct tool number The determined calibration values are not considered until a tool is called or called again if required ell T 2j For more information about the touch probe table refer to See ee a A END the User s Manual for Cycle Programming such Probe Function Software Option 12 6 Calibrating 3 D Touch Probe 372 Manual Operation and Setup il 12 7 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with 3 D Touch Probe Touch Probe Function Software Option Introduction The TNC electronically compensates workpiece misalignment by computing a basic rotation For this purpose the TNC sets the rotation angle to the desired angle with respect to the referen
126. CAD Establishes the connection to the selected network xe drive Successful connection is indicated by a check DEVICE mark under Mount Cast s5 CYCLES HA example FHO Fk KEDI Man_Tast PLANE y De screens N HA SHOW SLTEST BO table HA tneguide DIAGNOSIS 2 Separates the connection to a network drive UNMOUNT DEVICE Activates or deactivates the Automount function oe automatic connection of the network drive during MOUNT control start up The status of the function is indicated by a check mark under Auto in the network drive table sb jm hom eb ad 4 eb eb Z ra LLI L LO q l MOUNT UNMOUNT AUTO NETWORK DEFINE EDIT CONNECT PING NETWORK NETWORK DEVICE DEVICE DISCONN INFO CONNECTN CONNECTN Use the ping function to check whether a connection to a particular remote station in the network is available The address is entered as four decimal numbers separated by points dotted decimal notation The TNC displays an overview window with ERT information on the active network connections INFO Configures access to network drives Selectable only DEFINE after entry of the MOD code number NET123 CONNESTN Opens the dialog window for editing the data of an EDIT existing network connection Selectable only after RECI entry of the MOD code number NET123 Configures the network address of the control CONFIGURE Selecta
127. CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG10 F333 10 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 30 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS 13 L Z 2 R FMAX M99 14 CYCL DEF 5 CIRCULAR POCKET ON OUDUYONP wo 0 S IST 12 40 57 F OVR X 33 631 Y 2 942 C 0 000 S 85 860 DIAGNOSIS AcTL 11 oke Ir 3 Z 6 e F mm min Our 57 9 M 5 Z 9 749 TE Introduction 2 4 Status Displays ays General status display Program run full sequence Programming STATA hh 17 LBL 15 overview pom LaL cyc M POS o 18 L IX 1 R FMAX 19 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING RFNOML X 139 500 20 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 0 9995 Y 150 000 7 500 D 22 CALL LBL 15 REPS c 0 000 23 PLANE RESET STAY s 94 580 24 LBL 25 END PGM STAT1 MM A 0 00002 The status display in the lower part of the screen informs you of the current state of the machine tool It is displayed automatically in the following modes of operation Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence except if the screen layout is set to display graphics only and Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI l B 0 ee00e0 C 25 00000 a Basic rotat 1 64760 In the Manual mode and Electronic Handwheel mode the status display appears in the large window O e ad ad Y T N 0 S IST 12 44 57 F OVR END 33 747 Y 72 578 Z 9 754 i E 0 000 S 94 6
128. Cguide is called with the HELP key and the TNC often immediately displays the information specific to the condition from which the help was called context sensitive call Even if you are editing an NC block and press the HELP key you are usually brought to the exact place in the documentation that describes the corresponding function Before you can use the TNCguide you need to download the help files from the HEIDENHAIN home page see Downloading current help files on page 130 The TNC always tries to start the TNCguide in the language that you have selected as the conversational language on your TNC If the files with this language are not yet available on your TNC it automatically opens the English version The following user documentation is available in the TNCguide Conversational Programming User s Manual BHBKlartext chm DIN ISO User s Manual BHBIso chm User s Manual for Cycle Programming BHBtchprobe chm List of All Error Messages errors chm In addition the main chm book file is available with the contents of all existing chm Tiles As an option your machine tool builder can embed O machine specific documentation in the TNCguide These documents then appear as a separate book in the main chm file HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 1 t Index Suchen gt Path Contours 4 b Contour Moveme gt Processing DX gt Programming Mi gt Programming Cy gt Programming Sp gt Programming S
129. DEF 3 5 Y 90 28 CYCL DEF 3 6 F888 29 L X 1 Y 10 RO FMAX 30 L Z 2 R FMAX M99 31 CYCL DEF 3 0 SLOT MILLING m HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 61 Single Block Program 2 3 Operating aces Left program right program structure Left program right status Left program right graphics Advanced Graphic Features software option Graphics Advanced Graphic Features software option Soft keys for selecting the screen layout for pallet tables Pallet Management software option Pallet table Left program blocks right pallet table Left pallet table right status 62 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run In the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC executes a part program continuously to its end or to a manual or programmed stop You can resume program run after an interruption In the Program Run Single Block mode of operation you execute each block separately by pressing the machine START button PGM PROGRAM SECTS PROGRAM STATUS H PROGRAM GRAPHICS GRAPHICS PALLET PROGRAM PALLET PALLET STATUS Program run full sequence asm BEGIN POM 112 MM BLK FORM 1 Z X Z 20 BLK FORM 2 X 100 100 2 0 TOOL CALL 3 Z 52000 L Z 10 R FMAX M3 L X 5 Y 50 R FMAX CYCL DEF 4 POCKET MILLING CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UPZ CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10
130. DENHAIN TNC 320 3 2 Creating and Writing ee 3 2 Creating and Wri ng Mibarams Creating a new part program You always enter a part program in the Programming and Editing mode of operation An example of program initiation Select the Programming and Editing operating mode Press the PGM MGT key to call the file manager MGT Select the directory in which you wish to store the new program Enter the new program name and confirm your entry with the ENT key To select the unit of measure press the MM or INCH soft key The TNC switches the screen layout and initiates the dialog for defining the BLK FORM workpiece blank z Enter spindle axis e g Z Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MIN point and confirm each of your entries with the ENT key Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MAX point and confirm each of your entries with the ENT key P P iuri Scaune Programming Workpiece blank def maximum Z BEGIN PGM 1 MM BLK FORM 2 X 150 Y 100 OOL CALL 5 Z 53500 Z 100 RO FMAX M3 X 30 Y 30 R FMAX ND PGM 1 MM D Er E DIAGNOSIS Programming Fundamentals File Management il Example Display the BLK form in the NC program Program begin name unit of measure Spindle axis MIN point coordinates MAX point coordinates Program end name unit of measure The TNC generates the block numbers as well as the BEGIN
131. Function Software Option Overview The following soft key functions are available for setting the datum on an aligned workpiece PROBING Datum setting In any axis Page 375 ie Setting a corner as datum Page 376 PROBING Setting a circle center as datum Page 377 Datum setting in any axis Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING es POS soft key Move the touch probe to a position near the touch point Select the probe axis and direction in which you wish to set the datum such as Z in direction Z Selection is made via soft keys To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Datum Enter the nominal coordinate and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables page 368 To terminate the probe function press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ion Software Option D Touch Probe Touch Probe Funct ing wi 12 8 Datum Sett i il ion ch Probe Funct Software Option 12 8 Datum Setting with 3 D Touch Probe Tou Corner as datum PROBING i 376 Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING P soft key Position the touch probe near the first touch point on the first workpiece edge Select the probe direction by soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Position the touch probe near the second touch point on the same workpiece edge To probe
132. G Select string functions DECLARE Select the DECLARE STRING function Example NC block 274 Programming Q Parameters il Chain linking string parameters With the concatenation operator string parameter you can make a chain of two or more string parameters SPEC FCT PROGRAM FUNCTIONS STRING FUNCTIONS STRING FORMULA Show the soft key row with special functions Select the menu for defining various plain language functions Select string functions Select the STRING FORMULA function Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the concatenated string Confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the string parameter in which the first substring is saved Confirm with the ENT key The TNC displays the concatenation symbol Confirm your entry with the ENT key Enter the number of the string parameter in which the second substring is saved Confirm with the ENT key Repeat the process until you have selected all the required substrings Conclude with the END key Example QS10 is to include the complete text of QS12 QS13 and QS14 Parameter contents QS12 Workpiece QS13 Status QS14 Scrap QS10 Workpiece Status Scrap HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 11 String Parameters o il m 8 11 String Parameters Converting a numerical value to a string parameter With the TOCHAR function the TNC converts a numerical value to a string parameter This enables you to
133. INSERT COMMENT soft key Enter your comment using the screen keyboard see Screen Keyboard on page 112 and conclude the block by pressing the END key If you have connected a PC keyboard to the USB interface you can insert a comment block by simply pressing the key on the PC keyboard HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Program run full sequence Programming Comment BEGIN PGM 2 3 4 TOOL CALL 5 6 TOOL CALL Q2 1 ag 1 14 CALL LBL 2 BLK FORM 1 Z X 135 4 2 5 BLK FORM 2 X 30 Y 40 Z 0 L Z 20 RO FMAX M3 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLIN Oon cr x w lt a 7 D x o wo 10 L Z 20 R FMAX M3 11 CYCL DEF 14 0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY 12 CYCL DEF 14 1 CONTOUR LABEL1 72 13 CYCL DEF 2 CONTOUR DATA EX11 MM 3 Z 515800 G SET UP CLEARANCE 7DEPTH 3FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG PLUNGING DEPTH DWELL TIME AT TOP SURFACE COORDINATE 72ND SET UP CLEARANCE DWELL TIME AT DEPTH 6 Z 53000 F2222 MILLING DEPTH TOOL PATH OVERLAP ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR SURFACE COORDINATE 7SET UP CLEARANCE CLEARANCE HEIGHT ROUNDING RADIUS ROTATIONAL DIRECTION Pe A Er _ a BEGIN END MOVE MOVE C INSERT WORD WORD gt OVERWRITE 2j E 113 N D z z O 4 2 Addi 2 Functions for editing of the comment p am o o ou Jump to beginning of comment BEGIN k O Jump to end of comment END gt Jump
134. In the Find tab you can search the entire TNCguide for a specific word The left side is active Select the Find tab Activate the Find input field Enter the desired word and confirm with the ENT key the TNC lists all sources containing the word Use the arrow key to highlight the desired source Press the ENT key to go to the selected source You can enter the search word only with a keyboard connected via USB The full text search only works for single words If you activate the Search only in titles function by mouse or by using the cursor and the space key the TNC searches only through headings and ignores the body text HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 129 4 7 Context Sensi vous System elp System 2 O eb ad x vb ad Q Q N a Downloading current help files You ll find the help files for your TNC software on the HEIDENHAIN home page www heidenhain de under Services and Documentation Software TNC 320 help system NC software number of your TNC for example 34056x 02 Select the desired language for example English You will see a ZIP file with the appropriate help files Download the ZIP file and unzip it Move the unzipped CHM files to the TNC in the TNC tncguide en directory or into the respective language subdirectory see also the following table to the TNC then in the Extras gt Configuration gt Mode gt Transfer in binary format menu item you have to enter the extension CHM
135. M130 functions blockwise in straight line blocks without tool radius compensation 300 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il 9 4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior Machining small contour steps M97 Standard behavior The TNC inserts a transition arc at outside corners If the contour steps are very small however the tool would damage the contour In such cases the TNC interrupts program run and generates the error message Tool radius too large Behavior with M97 The TNC calculates the intersection of the contour elements as at inside corners and moves the tool over this point Program M97 in the same block as the outside corner function M120 LA see Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 Miscellaneous functions software option on page 306 Instead of M97 you should use the much more powerful Effect M97 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed finished You may wish to rework the contour with a A corner machined with M97 will not be completely smaller tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 9 4 Miscellaneous ung for Contouring Behavior i il 9 4 Miscellaneous run ns for Contouring Behavior Example NC blocks Large tool radius Move to contour point 13 Machine small contour step 13 to 14 Move to contour point 15 Machine small contour step 15 to 16 Move to contour point 17 Ww 02 Programming Miscellaneous Functions
136. M140 is also effective if the tilted working plane function is active On machines with tilting heads the TNC then moves the tool in the tilted coordinate system With M140 MB MAX you can only retract in positive direction Always define a TOOL CALL with a tool axis before entering M140 otherwise the direction of traverse is not defined HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 9 4 Miscellaneous ung for Contouring Behavior j il 9 4 Miscellaneous run lns for Contouring Behavior Suppressing touch probe monitoring M141 Standard behavior When the stylus is deflected the TNC outputs an error message as soon as you attempt to move a machine axis Behavior with M141 The TNC moves the machine axes even if the touch probe is deflected This function is required if you wish to write your own measuring cycle in connection with measuring cycle 3 in order to retract the stylus by means of a positioning block after it has been deflected Danger of collision If you use M141 make sure that you retract the touch probe in the correct direction M141 functions only for movements with straight line blocks Effect M141 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M141 becomes effective at the start of the block 310 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 Standard behavior At an NC stop the TNC stops all traverse movements The tool stops moving at the point o
137. Machining operation Calculate Z coordinate for pre positioning Copy starting angle in space Z X plane Compensate sphere radius for pre positioning Copy rotational position in the plane Account for allowance in the sphere radius Shift datum to center of sphere Account for starting angle of rotational position in the plane Pre position in the tool axis Set pole in the X Y plane for pre positioning Pre position in the plane Set pole in the Z X plane offset by the tool radius Move to working depth Programming Examples j i a Mllprogramming Examples N 94 Move upward in an approximated arc Update solid angle Inquire whether an arc is finished If not finished return to LBL 2 Move to the end angle in space Retract in the tool axis Pre position for next arc Update rotational position in the plane Reset solid angle Activate new rotational position Unfinished If not finished return to label 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift End of subprogram Programming Q Parameters il 9 1 Entering an Functions M and STOP 9 1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP Fundamentals With the TNC s miscellaneous functions also called M functions you can affect the program run e g a program interruption the machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and oft the path behavior of the tool
138. N SOLUTION 189 O oe cO D o S W A 36 Featu 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Adva i Aa Initiating the FK dialog 2 If you press the gray FK button the TNC displays the soft keys you can Suse to initiate an FK dialog see the following table Press the FK button a second time to deselect the soft keys If you Initiate the FK dialog with one of these soft keys the TNC shows additional soft key rows that you can use for entering known coordinates directional data and data regarding the course of the S contour Oo FKelement Soft key V Straight line with tangential connection FLT E a Straight line without t tial ti rai ine without tangential connection FL 5 g g AS Circular arc with tangential connection Fot LL d Circular arc without tangential connection Fe ty Pole for FK programming FPOL lt lt hom Oo S 0 S gt Oo Pw C Oo Q b hom LL xX LL N hom gt Oo a Oo Q K re 0 190 Programming Programming Contours il Pole for FK programming To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog for defining the pole press the io FPOL soft key The TNC then displays the axis soft keys of the active working plane Enter the pole coordinates using these soft keys The pole for FK program
139. N 1 ADDITION Example FN 1 Q1 Q2 5 Calculates and assigns the sum of two values FN 2 SUBTRACTION Example FN 2 Q1 10 5 Calculates and assigns the difference of two values FN 3 MULTIPLICATION Example FN 3 Q2 3 3 Calculates and assigns the product of two values FN 4 DIVISION Example FN 4 Q4 8 DIV Q2 oe Calculates and assigns the quotient of two values Not permitted Division by 0 7 xn 2 2 D e lt FN 5 SQUARE ROOT Example FN 5 Q20 SQRT 4 i Calculates and assigns the square root of a number Not permitted Calculating the square root of a negative value 7 zZ n To the right of the character you can enter the following Two numbers Two QO parameters A number and a O parameter The Q parameters and numerical values in the equations can be entered with positive or negative signs HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 3 Describing Contours throug athomatical Operations j il 8 3 Describing Contours throualfiiitathematical Operations Programming fundamental operations Example To select the mathematical functions press the ae BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key To select the O parameter function ASSIGN press the FNO X Y soft key 5 Enter the number of the O parameter e g 5 10 ENT gt op 2 Q ot 49 lt a C 49 O ct O O O1 Call the Q parameter functions by pressing the O key To select the mathematical functions p
140. N TABLE 2 405 14 5 Program Run Running a part program Preparation 1 Clamp the workpiece to the machine table 2 Set the datum 3 Select the necessary tables and pallet files status M 4 Select the part program status M Program Run Full Sequence Start the part program with the machine START button Program Run Single Block Start each block of the part program individually with the machine START button 406 Test Run and Program Run il Interrupting machining There are several ways to Interrupt a program run Programmed interruptions Pressing the machine STOP button Switching to program run Single step If the TNC registers an error during program run it automatically interrupts the machining process Programmed interruptions You can program interruptions directly in the part program The TNC interrupts the program run at a block containing one of the following entries 14 5 Program Run STOP with and without miscellaneous function Miscellaneous functions MO M2 or M30 Miscellaneous function M6 defined by the machine tool builder Interruption through the machine STOP button Press the machine STOP button The block that the TNC is currently executing is not completed The NC stop signal in the status display blinks see table If you do not wish to continue the machining process you can reset the TNC with the INTERNAL STOP soft key The NC stop signal in the s
141. NE function but does not change the current axis positions Specify whether the TNC should automatically move the rotary axes to the default setting MOVE or TURN or not STAY see Automatic positioning MOVE TURN STAY entry is mandatory on page 342 To terminate entry press the END key The PLANE RESET function resets the current PLANE function or an active 19 completely angles 0 and function is inactive It does not need to be defined more than once Example NC block Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Defining the machining plane with space angles PLANE SPATIAL Function Spatial angles define a machining plane through up to three rotations around the fixed machine coordinate system The sequence of rotations is firmly specified first around the A axis then B and then C the function corresponds to Cycle 19 if the entries in Cycle 19 are set to space angles Before programming note the following You must always define the three space angles SPA SPB and SPC even if one of them 0 The sequence of the rotations described above is independent of the active tool axis Parameter description for the positioning behavior See Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 342 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function f il Input parameters Spatial angle A Rotational angle SPA around the N
142. OCKET MILLING ONOUDRDWNP CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG1 F333 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS m99 14 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIRCULAR POCKET First Steps with the TNC 320 il 2 1 The TNC 320 N HEIDENHAIN TNC controls are workshop oriented contouring controls that enable you to program conventional machining operations right at the machine in an easy to use conversational programming language They are designed for milling and drilling machine tools as well as machining centers with up to five axes You can also change the angular position of the spindle under program control Keyboard and screen layout are clearly arranged in such a way that the functions are fast and easy to use 2 1 The T Programming HEIDENHAIN conversational and ISO formats The HEIDENHAIN conversational programming format is an especially easy method of writing programs Interactive graphics illustrate the individual machining steps for programming the contour If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC the HEIDENHAIN FK free contour programming performs the necessary calculations automatically Workpiece machining can be graphically simulated either during or before actual machining It is also possible to program the TNCs in ISO format or DNC mode You can also enter and test one program while the control is running another Compatibility The scope of functions of the TNC 320 does no
143. PA 6 5 Path Contours HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 181 il Circular path CTP with tangential connection The tool moves on a circular path starting tangentially from a preceding contour element P gt Polar coordinate radius PR Enter the distance from A are end point to the pole CC gt Polar coordinates angle PA Angular position of the arc end point Example NC blocks olar Coordinates The pole is not the center of the contour arc 6 5 Path Contour 182 Programming Programming Contours il Helical interpolation A helix is a combination of a circular movement in a main plane and a linear movement perpendicular to this plane You program the circular path in a main plane A helix is programmed only in polar coordinates Application Large diameter internal and external threads Lubrication grooves Calculating the helix To program a helix you must enter the total angle through which the tool is to move on the helix in incremental dimensions and the total height of the helix For calculating a helix that is to be cut In an upward direction you need the following data Thread revolutions n Thread revolutions thread overrun at thread beginning and end Total height h Thread pitch P times thread revolutions n Incremental total Number of revolutions times 360 angle for angle IPA beginning of thread angle for thread overrun Starting coordinate Z Pitch P times thread revolutions thread overrun at star
144. PO NPS tall Q a a Q a Q PPR D w First Steps with the TNC 320 il 1 6 Workpiece Setup Select the correct operating mode VWorkpieces are set up In the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel mode ey Press the operating modes key The TNC goes into the Manual Operation mode Further information on this topic Manual mode See Moving the Machine Axes on page 353 Clamp the workpiece Mount the workpiece with a fixture on the machine table If you have a 3 D touch probe on your machine then you do not need to clamp the workpiece parallel to the axes If you do not have a 3 D touch probe available you have to align the workpiece so that it is fixed with its edges parallel to the machine axes HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 1 6 Workpiece i 1 6 Workpiece sei Workpiece alignment with 3 D touch probe software option Touch probe function Insert the 3 D touch probe In the Manual Data Input MDI operating mode run a TOOL CALL block containing the tool axis and then return to the Manual Operation mode in MDI mode you can run an individual NC block independently of the others TOUCH PROBE AA PROBING Select the probing functions The TNC displays the available functions in the soft key row Measure the basic rotation The TNC displays the basic rotation menu To identify the basic rotation probe two points on a straight surface of the workpiece
145. Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Advanced Programm N 00 Programming Programming Contours il HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Pre position the tool in the tool axis Move to working depth d Programming oftware Option ress Featu 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Adv i i Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection ing FK contour section Program all known data for each contour element Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program Features Software Option 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Advanced Programm N 02 Programming Programming Contours il HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth d Programming oftware Option we Featu 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Adv i i Features Software Option 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Ad N 04 Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection FK contour section Program all known data for each contour element Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis
146. Program run full sequence Programming Miscellaneous function M BEGIN PGM 14 MM BLK FORM 1 Z X 0 Z 20 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 9 Z 53500 5 L X 5 Y 5 R FMAX 6 L 2Z 2 R FMAX 7 L Z 6 RO F2000 8 APPR LCT X 12 Y 5 R5 RL F250 60 50 RS x 19 L Z 100 R FMAX M30 20 END PGM 14 MM ES e amm and Q C LL io me 0 eon 6 2 Fundament o i path function with the corresponding soft key BEGIN PGM 1 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X Y 0 2 28 M BLK FORM 2 X 150 Y 100 Z 0 J TOOL CALL 5 Z S3500 L Z 100 R FMAX M3 L X 30 _ Y 30 RO FMAX 6 END PGM 1 MM s J x AWNFO 6 3 Contour Approach and E Departure o Overview Types of paths for contour approach Q and departure 2 The functions for contour approach APPR and departure DEP are Proaran Tun Programming o activated with the APPR DEP key You can then select the desired h Ka ul APPR LT Straight line with tangential connection to an auxiliary point outside the contour on a tangentially connecting line 2 Straight line perpendicular to a contour APPR LN DEP LN lt point a ra 5 Circular arc with tangential connection APPR CT DEP cT e a A s W DIAGNOSIS E las m eee 2 Circular arc with tangential connection APPR LOT DEP LoT E ae APPR LoT en S to the contour Approach and departure A AN Je Approaching and dep
147. QS100 to QS199 range is reserved for internal texts HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 gt gt ee D gt O O 2 T A f il Programming notes You can mix Q parameters and fixed numerical values within a program Q parameters can be assigned numerical values between 999 999 999 and 999 999 999 meaning that up to nine digits plus the algebraic sign are permitted You can set the decimal point at any position Internally the TNC can calculate up to a range of 57 bits before and 7 bits after the decimal point 82 bit data width corresponds to a decimal value of 4 294 967 296 You can assign a maximum of 254 characters to QS parameters same data by the TNC For example Q108 is always assigned the current tool radius see Preassigned Q Parameters page 282 Some Q and OS parameters are always assigned the Principle and Overview 224 Programming Q Parameters il Calling Q parameter functions When you are writing a part program press the O key in the numeric keypad for numerical input and axis selection below the key The TNC then displays the following soft keys gt gt ee D gt O O 2 T A Basic arithmetic assign add subtract T Page 227 multiply divide square root ai Trigonometric functions a Page 229 Function for calculating circles CIRCLE Page 231 It then conditions jumps Page 232 Other functions a Page 235 Ente
148. RCLE DATA Calculating a circle from 4 points 231 Full circle 171 Fundamentals 74 G Graphic simulation 399 Graphics Display modes 395 During programming 118 Detail enlargement 119 Magnification of details 398 H Hard disk 91 Helical interpolation 183 Helix 183 Help files downloading 130 Help system 125 Help with error messages 120 l Indexed tools 140 Information on formats 452 Interrupt machining 407 ITNC 530 56 456 K Keyboard 59 L Local Q parameters defining 225 Look ahead 306 M M functions See Miscellaneous functions M91 M92 298 Machine axes moving the 353 In increments 354 With the electronic handwheel 355 With the machine axis direction buttons 353 Machine parameters For 3 D touch probes 440 Machining time measuring the 400 Mid program startup 410 After power failure 410 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes 346 Miscellaneous functions Entering 296 For contouring behavior 301 For coordinate data 298 For program run control 297 For spindle and coolant 297 MOD function Exiting 418 Overview 419 Select 418 N NC error messages 120 Nesting 211 Network connection 108 Nonvolatile Q parameters defining 225 Normal vector 335 O Open contour corners M98 303 Operating modes 60
149. SQRT 25 SQRT Sine of an angle Example 044 SIN 45 H Cosine of an angle Example 045 COS 45 Tangent of an angle Example 046 TAN 45 a Arc sine Inverse of the sine Determines the angle from the ratio of the side opposite the hypotenuse Example Q10 ASIN 0 75 ASIN Arc cosine Inverse of the cosine Determines the angle from the ratio of the side adjacent to the hypotenuse Example Q11 ACOS Q40 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 da iii Formulas Directly j il 8 10ilterinc Formulas Directly Arc tangent Inverse of the tangent Determines the angle from the ratio of the opposite to the adjacent side Example Q12 ATAN Q50 Powers of values Example Q15 3 3 Constant pi 3 14159 Example Q15 PI Natural logarithm LN of a number Base 2 7183 Example 015 LN Q11 Bee Logarithm of a number base 10 Example Q33 LOG Q22 Exponential function 2 7183 to the power of n Example Q1 EXP Q12 Negate multiplication by 1 me Example Q2 NEG Q1 Truncate decimal places form an integer Example Q3 INT Q42 INT Absolute value of a number Example Q4 ABS Q22 Truncate places before the decimal point form a fraction Example Q5 FRAC Q23 FRAC Check algebraic sign of a number Example Q12 SGN Q50 If result for Q12 1 then Q50 gt 0 If result for Q12 1 then Q50 lt O MRL Calculate modulo value Example 012 400 360 Result Q
150. Setting without a 3 D Touch Probe page 358 Behavior with M91 Machine datum If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be referenced to the machine datum end the block with M91 enter them with respect to the last programmed M91 position If no M91 position is programmed in the active NC block then enter the coordinates with respect to the current tool position If you program Incremental coordinates in an M91 block The coordinate values on the TNC screen are referenced to the machine datum Switch the display of coordinates in the status display to REF see Status Displays page 63 298 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Behavior with M92 Additional machine datum can also define an additional machine based position as a A In addition to the machine datum the machine tool builder reference point For each axis the machine tool builder defines the distance between the machine datum and this additional machine datum Refer to the machine manual for more information If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be based on the additional machine datum end the block with M92 programmed with M91 or M92 The tool length however is not compensated Radius compensation remains the same in blocks that are Effect M91 and M92 are effective only in the blocks in which they are programmed M91 and M92 take effect at the start of block Workpiece datum If you want the coor
151. TION PARAXMODE OFF 322 Example NC block Programming Special Functions il Programming Multiple Axis Machining il 11 1 M tions for Multiple Axis Machining 11 1 Functions for Multiple Axis Machining The TNC functions for multiple axis machining are described in this chapter PLANE M116 M126 M94 324 Define machining in the tilted working plane Feed rate of rotary axes Shortest path traverse of rotary axes Reduce display value of rotary axes Page 325 Page 346 Page 347 Page 348 Programming Multiple Axis Machining il 11 2 The PLANE Function Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 Introduction The machine manufacturer must enable the functions for F tilting the working plane You can only use the PLANE function in its entirety on machines which have at least two rotary axes head and or table Exception PLANE AXIAL can also be used if only a single rotary axis is present or active on your machine The PLANE function is a powerful function for defining tilted working planes in various manners All PLANE functions available on the TNC describe the desired working plane independently of the rotary axes actually present on your machine The following possibilities are available SPATIAL Three space angles SPA SPATIAL Page 329 SPB and SPC NSS PROJECTED Two projection angles PROJECTED Page 331 PROPR and PROMIN and a Was rotation angle ROT
152. TNC provides certain functions for copying program sections within an NC program or into another NC program see the table below 14 h 4 MM BLK FORM 1 Z X 2 20 M BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 i TOOL CALL 9 Z 53500 L Z 100 RO FMAX M13 x 50 Y L Z 2 R FMAX 5 L Z 6 R F2000 APPR LCT X 12 Y 5 R5 RL F250 L 60 D R7 5 11 L X 36 Y 80 12 RND R7 5 T bk 13 L X 50 N 14 RND R7 5 15 L X 84 60 16 L Y 5 17 DEP LCT X 150 Y 50 R5 18 L Z 2 R FMAX 19 L Z 10 R FMAX M30 2 END PGM 14 MM DIAGNOSIS a re 2j CANCEL DELETE COPY INSERT E LAST SELECTION BLOCK BLOCK nies uae To copy a program section proceed as follows OOVNTUDBWUNP SD Select the soft key row containing the marking functions Select the first last block of the section you wish to copy To mark the first last block press the SELECT BLOCK soft key The TNC then highlights the first character of the block and the CANCEL SELECTION soft key appears Move the highlight to the last first block of the program section you wish to copy or delete The TNC shows the marked blocks in a different color You can end the marking function at any time by pressing the CANCEL SELECTION soft key To copy the selected program section press the COPY BLOCK soft key To delete the selected section press the DELETE BLOCK soft key The TNC stores the selected block Using the arrow keys select the block after which you wish to insert the copied delet
153. The functions of the individual keys are described on the inside front cover Machine panel buttons e g NC START or NC STOP are described in the manual for your machine tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 HEIDENHAIN Manual operation 140 003 150 000 m E 360 000 s oF mm nin T 111 0 S IST 10 19 138 S OVR 2 2 Visual Display Unit and Keyjgara 2 3 Operating Modes Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel Programming Manual operation The Manual Operation mode is required for setting up the machine tool In this mode of operation you can position the machine axes O 7 phar manually or by increments set the datums and tilt the working plane The Electronic Handwheel mode of operation allows you to move the 110 857 E i x RFNOML X 139 600 c 0 000 S b machine axes manually with the HR electronic handwheel Y 108 452 2 7 500 4 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout select as described 9 44 j _ r pt previously E 0 000 pL Pem DR PGM g S 85 860 PR aj Window Soft key s N ae z Positions ACTIL L1K T 3 2 6 o PGM CALL POSITION Sunin r EFEX HE Active PGM oz S 15 12 38 a a eee F 0VR Left positions right status display POSITION STATUS Ea Tar e Positioning with Manual Data Input This mode of operation is used for programming simple traversing Positioning with manl data input ey movement
154. Z 20 2 BLK FORM 2 X 10 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 9 Z 53500 4 24 108 RO FMAX M13 TT on 5 L X 5 Y 50 RO FMAX 6 L Z 2 RO FMAX s 7 L 2 6 RO F2000 8 APPR LCT X 12 Y 5 RS RL F250 10 RND R 7 5 Search Replace sE AE here Find text _ CURRENT WORD T E ARNOR E SS LLt OS 4 4 sie ee z150 Replace with REPLACE x 18 L ziz Ro pmax EEn T a wD CANCEL DIAGNOSIS 2 CURRENT REPLACE Sri ESIE WORD FIND REPLACE ALL END CANCEL FIELD FIELD 89 3 2 Creating and Writing ee REPLACE 3 2 Creating and Writing ME ams 10 g 7 H zZ 90 Find Replace any text The find replace function is not possible if a program is protected the program is currently being run by the TNC When using the REPLACE ALL function ensure that you do not accidentally replace text that you do not want to change Once replaced such text cannot be restored If required select the block containing the word you wish to find Select the Search function The TNC superimposes the search window and displays the available search functions in the soft key row Enter the text to be searched for Please note that the search is case sensitive Then confirm with the ENT key Enter the text to be inserted Please note that the entry is case sensitive Start the search process The TNC moves to the next occurrence of the text you are searching for To replace the text and then move to the nex
155. able Error messages are sometimes acknowledged automatically after the error has been corrected Direct editing possible Available function Comparison Differences in Program Run traverse movements Caution Check the traverse movements NC programs that were created on earlier TNC controls may lead to different traverse movements or error messages on a TNC 320 Be sure to take the necessary care and caution when running in programs Please find a list of known differences below The list does not pretend to be complete Handwheel superimposed traverse with M118 M118 in conjunction with M128 Approach Departure with APPR DEP RO is active contour element plane is not equal to working plane Scaling approach departure movements APPR DEP RND Approach departure with APPR DEP Approach departure with APPR DEP if contour elements with length O are defined Effect of Q parameters HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Effective in the active coordinate system which may also be rotated or tilted or in the machine based coordinate system depending on the setting in the 3 D ROT menu for manual operation Function not available If possible the blocks are executed in the defined contour element plane error message for APPRLN DEPLN APPRCT DEPCT Axis specitic scaling factor is allowed radius is not scaled Error message If RO is programmed for APPR DEP LN or APPR DEP CT Contour elements with length O a
156. able directory In the Test Run mode press the TOOL TABLE soft key to edit It To open the tool table TOOL T Select any machine operating mode he Press the TOOL TABLE soft key to select the tool Yeu table EDIT Set the EDIT soft key to ON OFF oN Display only specific tool types filter setting Press the TABLE FILTER soft key fourth soft key row Select the tool type by pressing a soft key The TNC only shows tools of the type selected Cancel filter Press the tool type selected before again or select another tool type the filter function to the requirements of your machine D The machine tool builder adapts the functional range of The machine tool manual provides further information HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 tttttttttttt tt ttt t t Ssssesveesgegggsg0gsgggsgsgs0gggsgsgggsg 139 on 5 2 Tool Data 5 2 Tool Data To open any other tool table Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation Call the file manager G Press the SELECT TYPE soft key to select the file type To show type T files press the SHOW T soft key Select a file or enter a new file name Conclude your entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key When you have opened the tool table you can edit the tool data by moving the cursor to the desired position in the table with the arrow keys or the soft keys You can overwrite the stored values or enter new values at any position The available editin
157. ach object has a key for unique Identification 438 Tables and Overviews il Calling the configuration editor Select the Programming mode of operation Press the MOD key Enter the code number 123 Press the END soft key to exit the configuration editor The icon at the beginning of each line in the parameter tree shows additional information about this line The icons have the following meanings Branch exists but is closed EHS Branch is open Empty object cannot be opened _I nitialized machine parameter Uninitialized optional machine parameter fm Can be read but not edited i Cannot be read or edited HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters il 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters Displaying help texts The HELP key enables you to call a help text for each parameter object or attribute If the help text does not fit on one page 1 2 is then displayed at the upper right for example press the HELP PAGE soft key to scroll to the second page To exit the help text press the HELP key again Additional information such as the unit of measure the initial value or a selection list is also displayed If the selected machine parameter matches a parameter in the TNC the corresponding MP number is shown Parameter list DisplaySettings Settings for screen display Sequence of the displayed axes O to 5 Depends on the available axes Type of position display in the po
158. achining positions HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 DECLARE CONTOUR CONTOUR DEF SEL CONTOUR CONTOUR FORMULA il PATTERN DEF SEL PATTERN See User s Manual for Cycles See User s Manual for Cycles See User s Manual for Cycles See User s Manual for Cycles See User s Manual for Cycles See User s Manual for Cycles Manual operation Programming 14 h BEGIN PGM 14 MM 1 BLK FORM 1 Z X 0 Z 20 2 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 9 Z 53500 4 2 100 RO FMAX NII 5 L X 5 Y 5 R FMAX 6 L Z 2 R FMAX 7 L Z 6 R F2000 8 APPR LCT X 12 Y 5 R5 RL F250 oe T pt x 17 DEP LCT X 150 Y 50 RS 18 L Z 2 RO FMAX 19 L Z 100 R FMAX M30 20 END PGM 14 MM Manual operation BEGIN PGM 14 MM 1 BLK FORM 1 Z X 0 0 Z 20 2 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 9 Z 53500 d eL 2 108 RO FMAX NI 20 END PGM 14 MM 315 Overview of Special Functions A Overview of Special Functions Menu of various conversational functions aa Select the menu for defining various conversational ee Programming FUNCTIONS functions 14 h BEGIN PGM 14 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X Y 0 2 20 1 2 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 9 Z 83580 L Z 100 R FMAX M13 5 L X 5 Y 50 RO FMAX 6 L Z 2 RO FMAX L 2 6 RO F2000 Define the positioning behavior Page 317 e APPR LOT X 12 V 5 RE RL F250 for parallel axes U V W PARAX es De
159. angentially to the previously programmed contour element A transition between two contour elements is called tangential when there is no kink or corner at the intersection between the two contours the transition is smooth The contour element to which the tangential arc connects must be programmed immediately before the CT block This requires at least two positioning blocks cry Coordinates of the arc end point and if necessary Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks coordinates in the CT block and in the contour element A tangential arc is a two dimensional operation the preceding it must be in the same plane of the arc 174 Programming Programming Contours il HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX Pre position the tool Move to working depth at feed rate F 1000 mm min Approach the contour at point 1 on a straight line with tangential connection Move to point 2 Point 3 first straight line for corner 3 Program chamfer with length 10 mm Point 4 2nd straight line for corner 3 1st straight line for corner 4 Program chamfer with length 20 mm Move to last contour point 1 second straight line for corner 4 Depart the contour on a Straight line with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 175 6 4 Path v
160. ansaction solely containing read accesses E f INDEX is programmed The indexed row remains All other rows are deleted from the result set The transaction is not concluded A lock set with SELECT FOR UPDATE remains for the indexed row For all other rows it Is reset Parameter no for result O parameter in which the TALIS SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle Data bank SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT Data bank Index for SQL result Row that is to remain in the result set Either enter the row number directly or program the O parameter containing the index 268 Example Example Programming Q Parameters il 8 10 Entering Formulas Directly Entering formulas You can enter mathematical formulas that include several operations directly into the part program by soft key Press the FORMULA soft key to call the mathematical functions The TNC displays the following soft keys in several soft key rows Addition Example Q10 Q1 Q5 Subtraction Example 025 Q7 Q108 Multiplication Example Q12 5 Q5 Division Example Q25 Q1 Q2 Opening parenthesis Example Q12 Q1 Q2 Q3 Closing parenthesis Example Q12 Q1 Q2 Q3 Square of a value Example Q15 SQ 5 un D AAA A Square root Example 022
161. arting a helix The tool approaches and departs a helix on its extension by moving in a circular arc that connects tangentially to the contour You program helical approach and departure with the APPR CT and DEP CT functions 158 Programming Programming Contours il Important positions for approach and departure Starting point Ps You program this position in the block before the APPR block Ps lies outside the contour and Is approached without radius compensation RO Auxiliary point Py Some of the paths for approach and departure go through an auxiliary point Py that the TNC calculates from your input in the APPR or DEP block The TNC moves from the current position to the auxiliary point Py at the teed rate last programmed If you have programmed FMAX positioning at rapid traverse in the last positioning block before the approach function the TNC also approaches the auxiliary point Py at rapid traverse First contour point Pa and last contour point Pe You program the first contour point Pa in the APPR block The last contour point Pe can be programmed with any path function If the APPR block also contains a Z axis coordinate the TNC will first move the tool to Py in the working plane and then move it to the entered depth in the tool axis End point PN The position Py lies outside of the contour and results from your input in the DEP block If the DEP block also contains a Z axis coordinate the TNC will first move the too
162. at are differently aligned The preset table can contain any number of lines datums To optimize the file size and the processing speed you should use only as many lines as you need for datum management For safety reasons new lines can be inserted only at the end of the preset table Saving the datums in the preset table The preset table has the name PRESET PR and is saved in the directory TNC table PRESET PR is editable in the Manual and E1 Handwheel modes only if the CHANGE PRESET soft key was pressed It is permitted to copy the preset table into another directory for data backup Lines that were written by your machine tool builder are also always write protected in the copied tables You therefore cannot edit them Never change the number of lines in the copied tables That could cause problems when you want to reactivate the table To activate the preset table copied to another directory you have to copy it back to the directory TNC table 360 Comment Manual operation Programming NO a DOC x y Z 1 6476 M 1 6476 0 0 s 1 6476 0 v 4D 0 0 T 0 0 4 amp 0 93 749 a 75 18907 65 34493 67 5 1 3 16382 7 67823 65 87356 2 21 94612 13 93953 65 87356 3 16 87879 3 59437 146 09302 2 4 3 26756 7 73438 133 8237 5 76 18907 65 34493 133 5987 6 0 0 0 2 0 0 146 055 8 0 0 0 g 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 12 0
163. at you want to change the line number is the preset number If needed select the column axis in the preset table DN that you want to change N q conRECT Use the soft keys to select one of the available entry PRESET possibilities see the following table 362 Manual Operation and Setup il Directly transfer the actual position of the tool ES the measuring dial as the new datum This i function only saves the datum in the axis which is currently highlighted Assign any value to the actual position of the tool ENTER the measuring dial This function only saves the PRESET datum in the axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired value in the pop up window Incrementally shift a datum already stored in the CORRECT table This function only saves the datum in the PRESET axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired corrective value with the correct sign in the pop up window If inch display is active enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm thout a 3 D Touch Probe Directly enter the new datum without calculation EDIT of the kinematics axis specific Only use this FIELD function if your machine has a rotary table and you want to set the datum to the center of the rotary table by entering O This function only saves the datum in the axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired value in the pop up window If inch dis
164. ault setting Accept with the ENT key Workpiece blank def Minimum X Smallest X coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 0 Confirm with the ENT key Workpiece blank def Minimum Y Smallest Y coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 0 Confirm with the ENT key Workpiece blank def Minimum Z Smallest Z coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 40 Confirm with the ENT key Workpiece blank def Maximum X Largest X coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 100 Confirm with the ENT key Workpiece blank def Maximum Y Largest Y coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 100 Confirm with the ENT key Workpiece blank def Maximum Z Largest Z coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 0 Confirm with the ENT key The TNC concludes the dialog Er an Example NC blocks Further information on this topic Defining the workpiece blank See page 80 38 First Steps with the TNC 320 il Program layout NC programs should be arranged consistently in a similar manner This makes it easier to find your place and reduces errors Recommended program layout for simple conventional contour machining 1 Call tool define tool axis 2 Retract the tool 3 Pre position the tool in the working plane near the contour
165. bcontours Tool axis in TOOL CALL block defines the working plane Islands are not circumnavigated Reciprocating plunge infeed at reduced feed rate increase in machining time Rough out is always contour parallel Combinations always refer to the defined uncompensated contour At first all pockets are roughed out on the same plane End position clearance height above the last position that is defined before the cycle call Curvature of tangential arcs is derived from the curvature of the target contour To position the circular arc the target contour is systematically searched from end to beginning until a position is found where no collision can occur If this is not possible the arc length is halved until it can be positioned The max width of the arc is three tool radii the max angular length is 0 8 rad To position the circular arc the target contour is systematically searched trom end to beginning until a position is found where no collision can occur If this is not possible the arc length is halved until it can be positioned Max 8192 contour elements in up to 12 subcontours no restrictions for subcontour The axes of the first positioning block in the first subcontour define the working plane Islands are circumnavigated at the current machining depth Configurable via MP7420 With MP7420 you can define whether the uncompensated or compensated contour is to be combined With MP7420 you can
166. ble only after entry of the MOD code number NET123 Deletes an existing network connection Selectable DELETE only after entry of the MOD code number NET123 at 428 MOD Functions Configuring the control s network address Connect the TNC port X26 with a network or a PC In the file manager PGM MGT select the Network soft key Press the MOD key Then enter the keyword NET123 Press the CONFIGURE NETWORK soft key to enter the network setting for a specific device see figure at center right Manual operation Programming Pat h Mount Auto Mount point Mount device 1 PC N Nde 1pc5323 transfer example Network settings f 15 5 Ethernet Interface i ace tT CONTOUE hostnane m It opens the dialog window for the network configuration PLANE DHCP p a TE SHOW IP address j1s j1 247 208 4 t Re Subnet mask fzss zsslo fo table Broadcast Eh Setting Meaning ee A HOSTNAME Name under which the control logs onto the CANCEL network If you use a host name server you must enter the Fully Qualified Hostname here If you do not enter a name here the control uses the so called null authentication ell DIAGNOSIS i aI COPY PASTE OK CANCEL FIELD FIELD DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In the drop down menu set YES Then the control automatically draws its network address IP address subnet mask default router and any broadcast address from a DHCP server in
167. c rotation Measuring in the Manual Operation mode 373 Block Deleting 86 Inserting editing 86 Blocks Buffer battery exchange 453 C Calculating with parentheses 269 Calculator 116 Chamfer 168 Circle calculations 231 Circle center point 170 Circular path 171 172 174 181 182 Code numbers 421 Comments adding 113 Compensating workpiece misalignment By measuring two points of a line 373 Context sensitive help 125 Contour approach 158 With polar coordinates 160 Contour departure 158 With polar coordinates 160 Conversational programming 82 Copying program sections 88 Corner rounding 169 Cylinder 290 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 D Data backup 92 112 Data interface Pin layout 446 setting 422 Data transfer rate 422 423 Data transfer software 425 Datum management 360 Datum setting 358 without a 3 D touch probe 358 Datum setting manual Circle center as datum 377 Corner as datum 376 In any axis 375 Datum table Confirming probed values 368 Datum setting the 78 Dialog 82 Directory 93 98 Copying 100 Creating 98 Deleting 102 E Ellipse 288 Error messages 120 Help with 120 Ethernet interface Connecting and disconnecting network drives 108 Connection possibilities 427 Introduction 427 External data transfer ITNC 530
168. cM sian Coordinates Inserting a chamfer between two straight lines The chamfer enables you to cut off corners at the intersection of two straight lines The line blocks before and after the CHF block must be in the same working plane as the chamfer E The radius compensation before and after the CHF block must be the same E The chamfer must be machinable with the current tool Chamfer side length Length of the chamfer and if sL necessary gt Feed rate F effective only in CHF block Example NC blocks You cannot start a contour with a CHF block A chamfer is possible only in the working plane The corner point is cut off by the chamfer and is not part of the contour A feed rate programmed in the CHF block is effective only in that block After the CHF block the previous feed rate becomes effective again 168 Programming Programming Contours il Corner rounding RND The RND function is used for rounding off corners The tool moves on an arc that is tangentially connected to both the preceding and subsequent contour elements The rounding arc must be machinable with the called tool RND Rounding radius Enter the radius and if necessary oO Feed rate F effective only in RND block Example NC blocks coordinates must lie in the plane of the rounding arc If you machine the contour without tool radius compensation you must program both coordinates in the working plane
169. ce axis in the working plane See figure at right The TNC saves the basic rotation depending on the tool axis in the columns SPA SPB or SPC of the preset table Select the probe direction perpendicular to the angle reference axis when measuring workpiece misalignment To ensure that the basic rotation is calculated correctly during program run program both coordinates of the working plane in the first positioning block You can also use a basic rotation in conjunction with the PLANE function In this case first activate the basic rotation and then the PLANE function Measuring the basic rotation Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point Select the probe direction perpendicular to the angle reference axis Select the axis by soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Position the touch probe at a position near the second touch point To probe the workpiece press the machine START button The TNC determines the basic rotation and displays the angle after the dialog Rotation angle Activate basic rotation Press the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key Terminate the probe function by pressing the END soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 t with 3 D Touch Probe Touch Probe Function Software Option ignmen 12 7 Compensating Workpiece M C il t with 3 D Touch Probe Touch Probe Function Software Option
170. ch function 89 Secondary axes 75 Setting the baud rate 422 423 Software number 420 SPEC FC e314 Special functions 314 Specifications 448 Sphere 292 Spindle speed changing the 357 Spindle speed entering 145 SOL commands 258 Status display 63 Additional 65 General 63 Straight line 167 180 String parameters 273 Structuring programs 115 Subprogram 207 Superimposing handwheel positioning M118 308 Switch off 352 Switch on 350 Synchronize NC and PLC 255 Index j i Index T Table access 258 Teach in 84 167 Test Run Executing 404 Overview 402 Text variables 273 Tilting the working plane 325 382 Manually 382 TNCguide 125 TNCremo 425 TNCremoNT 425 Tool compensation Length 146 Radius 147 Tool data Calling 145 Delta values 135 Entering into tables 136 Entering them into the program 135 Indexing 140 Tool length 134 Tool measurement 138 Tool name 134 Tool number 134 Tool radius 134 Tool table Editing functions 140 Editing exiting 139 Input possibilities 136 Touch probe cycles Manual Operation mode 366 Touch probe functions use with mechanical probes or dial gauges 381 Touch probe monitoring 310 Trigonometric functions 229 Trigonometry 229 458 U Unit of measure selection 80 USB devices
171. chain numerical values with string variables O Select Q parameter functions STRING Select the STRING FORMULA function TN Select the function for converting a numerical value to a string parameter Enter the number or the desired Q parameter to be converted and confirm with the ENT key If desired enter the number of decimal places that the TNC should convert and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Convert parameter Q50 to string parameter QS11 use 3 decimal places 276 Programming Q Parameters il Copying a substring from a string parameter With the SUBSTR function you can copy a definable range from a string parameter O Select Q parameter functions Select the STRING FORMULA function Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the copied string Confirm with the ENT key Select the function for cutting out a substring Enter the number of the QS parameter from which the substring is to be copied Confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the place starting from which to copy the substring and confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of characters to be copied and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Remember that the first character of a text sequence starts internally with the zeroth place Example A
172. compensating center misalignment 371 Displaying calibration values O72 12 7 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with 3 D Touch Probe Touch Probe Function Software Option 373 Introduction 373 Measuring the basic rotation 373 Saving the basic rotation in the preset table 374 Displaying a basic rotation 374 Canceling a basic rotation 374 26 12 8 Datum Setting with 3 D Touch Probe Touch Probe Function Software Option 375 Overview 375 Datum setting in any axis 379 Corner as datum 376 Circle center as datum 377 Measuring Workpieces with a 3 D Touch Probe 378 Using the touch probe functions with mechanical probes or dial gauges 381 12 9 Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 382 Application function 382 Traversing the reference points in tilted axes 384 Position display in a tilted system 384 Limitations on working with the tilting function 384 Activating manual tilting 385 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 13 1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations 388 Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI 388 Protecting and erasing programs in MDI 391 28 14 1 Graphics Advanced Graphic Features Software Option 394 Application 394 Overview of display modes 395 Plan view 395 Projection in 3 planes 396 3 D view 397 Magnifying details 398 Repeating gra
173. complete workpiece or with a detail of it Restore workpiece blank to the detail magnification in RESET which it was last shown FORM Reset detail magnification so that the machined uzNDON workpiece or workpiece blank is displayed as it was FORM programmed with BLK FORM displayed workpiece blank to its originally programmed dimensions even after isolating a detail without TRANSFER DETAIL With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key you return the HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 dvanced Graphic Features Software Option r Q re g ae vr q j il dvanced Graphic Features Software Option 14 1 Graphi Measuring the machining time Program Run modes of operation The timer counts and displays the time from program start to program end The timer stops whenever machining Is interrupted Test Run The timer displays the time that the TNC calculates for the duration of tool movements that are executed at feed rate Dwell times are included in the calculation by the TNC The time calculated by the TNC can only conditionally be used for calculating the production time because the TNC does not account for the duration of machine dependent interruptions such as tool change Activating the stopwatch function S Shift the soft key row until the soft key for the stopwatch functions appears Select the stopwatch functions STORE Select the desired function via soft key e g saving the displayed time Enable ON or disabl
174. connecting removing 109 User parameters General For 3 D touch probes 440 Machine specific 438 V Version numbers 421 Visual display unit 57 W Workpiece blank defining a 80 Workpiece measurement 378 Workpiece positions Absolute 77 Incremental 77 Workspace monitoring 401 404 Writing probed values in datum tables 368 Writing probed values in preset table 369 Overview Tables Fixed cycles 7 14 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 32 200 201 202 203 204 205 Datum shift Mirror image Dwell time Rotation Scaling factor Program call Oriented spindle stop Contour definition Tilting the working plane Contour data SL Il Pilot drilling SL Il Rough out SL Il Floor finishing SL II Side finishing SL II Contour train Axis specific scaling Cylinder surface Cylindrical surface slot Cylinder surface ridge Tolerance Drilling Reaming Boring Universal drilling Back boring Universal pecking HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 o il 206 Tapping with a floating tap holder new 207 Rigid tapping new 208 Bore milling 209 Tapping with chip breaking 220 Circular point pattern 221 Linear point pattern 230 Multipass milling 231 Ruled surface 232 Face milling 240 Centering 241 Single fluted deep hole drilling 247 Datum setting 251 Rectangular pocket complete machining 252 Circular pocket complete machining 253 Key way milling 254 Circular slo
175. crap axis 2 Stud too small scrap axis 1 Stud too small scrap axis 2 Stud too large rework axis 1 Stud too large rework axis 2 TCHPROBE 425 length exceeds max TCHPROBE 425 length below min TCHPROBE 426 length exceeds max TCHPROBE 426 length below min TCHPROBE 430 diameter too large TCHPROBE 430 diameter too small No measuring axis defined Tool breakage tolerance exceeded Enter Q247 unequal O Enter Q247 greater than 5 Datum table Enter Q351 unequal O Thread depth too large Programming Q Parameters il 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 Missing calibration data Tolerance exceeded Block scan active ORIENTATION not permitted 3 D ROT not permitted Activate 3 D ROT Enter a negative value for the depth 0303 not defined in measuring cycle Tool axis not allowed Calculated values incorrect Contradictory measuring points Clearance height entered incorrectly Contradictory type of plunging Machining cycle not permitted Line is write protected Oversize greater than depth No point angle defined Contradictory data Slot position O not permitted Enter infeed unequal O Switchover of Q399 not allowed Tool not defined Tool number not permitted Tool name not allowed Software option not active Kinematics cannot be restored Function not permitted Contradictory workpc blank di
176. ction is not concluded SQL ROLLBACK ee HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 9 Accessing T with SQL Commands i il T L e Q O V gt T 8 9 Accessing SQL BIND SQL BIND binds a Q parameter to a table column The SQL commands Fetch Update and Insert evaluate this binding assignment during data transfer between the result set and the NC program An SQL BIND command without a table or column name cancels the binding Binding remains effective at most until the end of the NC program or subprogram write processes only take into account the columns that were entered in the Select command SQL BIND must be programmed before Fetch Update or Insert commands are programmed You can program a Select command without a preceding Bind command f in the Select command you include columns for which no binding is programmed an error occurs during read write processes program interrupt You can program any number of bindings Read and Parameter no for result O parameter that is Ce bound assigned to the table column Database Column name Enter the table name and column name separated by a period Table name Synonym or path and file name of this table The synonym is entered directly whereas the path and file name are entered in single quotation marks Column designation Designation of the table column as given in the configuration data 26
177. d In case of an error Selection could not be carried out the SOL server returns the code 1 Code 0 Identifies an invalid handle Data bank SQL command text with the following elements SELECT keyword Name of the SQL command Names of the table columns to be transferred Separate column names with a comma See examples Q parameters must be bound to all columns entered here FROM table name Synonym or path and file names of this table The synonym is entered directly whereas the path and table names are entered in single quotation marks see examples of the SOL command names of the table columns to be transferred separate several Example Selection of table rows with the WHERE columns by a comma O parameters must be bound to all columns entered here E Optional WHERE selection criteria A selection criterion consists of a column name condition see table and comparator Link selection criteria with logical AND or OR Program the comparator directly or with a Q parameter A Q parameter is introduced with a colon and placed in single quotation marks see example Example Selection of table rows with the WHERE option T L z e Q O V S T Example Table name defined with path and file name 8 9 Accessing E Optional ORDER BY column name ASC to sort in ascending order or ORDER BY column name DESC to sort in descending order If neither ASC nor DESC
178. d position relative to the workpiece Set the display of the TNC either to zero or to a known position value for each position This establishes the reference system for the workpiece which will be used for the TNC display and your part program If the production drawing is dimensioned in relative coordinates simply use the coordinate transformation cycles see User s Manual for Cycles Cycles for Coordinate Transformation If the production drawing is not dimensioned for NC set the datum at a position or corner on the workpiece which is suitable for deducing the dimensions of the remaining workpiece positions The fastest easiest and most accurate way of setting the datum is by using a 3 D touch probe from HEIDENHAIN See Setting the Datum with a 3 D Touch Probe in the Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual Example The workpiece drawing shows holes 1 to 4 whose dimensions are shown with respect to an absolute datum with the coordinates X 0 Y 0 Holes 5 to 7 are dimensioned with respect to a relative datum with the absolute coordinates X 450 Y 750 With the DATUM SHIFT cycle you can temporarily set the datum to the position X 450 Y 750 to be able to program holes 5 to 7 without further calculations 78 Programming Fundamentals File Management il 3 2 Creating and Writing Programs Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN Conversational A part program consists of a series of program blocks The figure at right ill
179. d the tool table into account Compensation value R DRyo01 cay DR ag where R Tool radius R from the TOOL DEF block or tool table DR TOOL CALL Oversize for radius DR in the TOOL CALL block not taken into account by the position display DR 7AB Oversize for radius DR in the tool table Contouring without radius compensation RO The tool center moves in the working plane along the programmed path or to the programmed coordinates Applications Drilling and boring pre positioning HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 5 3 Togpompensation C il 5 3 Tool Compensation Contouring with radius compensation RR and RL RR The tool moves to the right of the programmed contour RL The tool moves to the left of the programmed contour The tool center moves along the contour at a distance equal to the radius Right or left are to be understood as based on the direction of tool movement along the workpiece contour See figures 148 Programming Tools il Entering radius compensation Radius compensation is entered in an L block Enter the coordinates of the target point and confirm your entry with ENT Ea To select tool movement to the left of the contour RL press the RL soft key or To select tool movement to the right of the contour press the RR soft key or 5 3 Togpompensation To select tool movement without radius compensation or to cancel radius compensation press the ENT key ENT
180. define whether individual pockets are roughed out completely or on the same plane With MP7420 you can define whether the end position is above the last programmed position or whether the tool moves only to clearance height Circular arcs are generated between the starting point of the outermost path of the roughing tool and the center of the first contour element of the path of the finishing tool Max width of the arc tool moves backward on tangential arc from starting point of the path to shortly before next edge contour max arc height finishing allowance safety clearance SLII Cycles 20 to 24 Handling of coordinates and axis values outside the working plane Handling of islands which are not contained in pockets Set operations for SL cycles with complex contour formulas Radius compensation is active during CYCL CALL Paraxial positioning blocks in contour subprogram Miscellaneous functions M in contour subprogram Infeed movements in contour subprogram M110 feed rate reduction for inside corner SLII Contour Train Cycle 25 APPR DEP blocks in contour definition General cylinder surface machining Contour definition Offset definition on cylinder surface Offset definition for basic rotation Circle programming with C CC APPR DEP blocks in contour definition Cylinder surface machining with Cycle 28 Complete roughing out of slot Definable tolerance Cylinder surface machining with Cycle
181. devices appear as separate drives in the directory tree so you can use the file management functions described in the earlier chapters correspondingly HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 th the AA iii ing wi 3 4 Work j il th the rila nager ing wi 3 4 Work In order to remove a USB device you must proceed as follows Select the left window with the arrow key Use the arrow keys to select the USB device to be removed Scroll through the soft key row zv D SoB Select additional functions 2 m 4 Select the function for removing USB devices The Exit the file manager p In order to re establish a connection with a USB device that has been removed press the following soft key P Select the function for reconnection of USB devices X 110 Press the PGM MGT soft key to call the file manager TNC removes the USB device from the directory tree Programming Fundamentals File Management il 4 1 Screen Keyboard O 2 You can enter letters and special characters with the screen keyboard anual oreration progranning gt or if available with a PC keyboard connected over the USB port ot i S ear R TNC nc_prog Cast H i Enter the text with the screen keyboard peT o EEA 2005 32 20 5 CYCLES 111 ABC H 04 2009 14 04 56 rome 1a Ge ze0a 12 20 58 4 Press the GOTO key if you want to enter a text for example a ao EEr Ba eee program name or directory name
182. dinates to always be referenced to the machine datum you can inhibit datum setting for one or more axes If datum setting is inhibited for all axes the TNC no longer displays the SET DATUM soft key in the Manual Operation mode The figure shows coordinate systems with the machine datum and workpiece datum M91 M92 in the Test Run mode In order to be able to graphically simulate M91 M92 movements you need to activate working space monitoring and display the workpiece blank referenced to the set datum see Show the Workpiece in the Working Space Advanced Graphic Features Software Option page 401 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 9 3 Miscelaneous m OTS for Coordinate Data j il 9 3 Miscellaneous Pihctions for Coordinate Data Moving to positions in a non tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane M130 Standard behavior with a tilted working plane The TNC places the coordinates in the positioning blocks in the tilted coordinate system Behavior with M130 The TNC places coordinates in straight line blocks in the untilted coordinate system The TNC then positions the tilted tool to the programmed coordinates of the untilted system Danger of collision Subsequent positioning blocks or fixed cycles are carried out in a tilted coordinate system This can lead to problems in fixed cycles with absolute pre positioning The function M130 is allowed only if the tilted working plane function is active Effect
183. directly enter data on the circular arc or the circle center Enter all known data in the block by using these soft keys The FK graphic displays the programmed contour element in red until sufficient data is entered If the entered data describes several solutions the graphic will display the contour element in green see Graphics during FK programming page 189 z re O pe A O Circular arc with tangential connection If the circular arc connects tangentially to another contour element initiate the dialog with the FCT soft key Features Software Option To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog press the FCT soft key 4 i C Enter all known data in the block by using the soft keys 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Ad 192 Programming Programming Contours il Input possibilities End point coordinates 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Advanced Programming Cartesian coordinates X and Y K 0 6 Polar coordinates referenced to FPOL ca Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 oftware Option Featu j i Direction and length of contour elements ming Length of a straight line Gradient angle of a straight line Chord length LEN of an arc Gradient angle AN of an entry tangent vanced Program Features Software Option Center angle of an arc JEL 8 Caut
184. displayed To display each text individually on the screen program the function M CLOSE at the end of the protocol description file Exporting messages You can also use the FN 16 function in the NC program in order to externally save the files generated with FN 16 Two possibilities are available for this Enter the complete target path in the FN 16 function Specify the target path in the MOD function under Print or Print Test if you always want to save to the same directory on the server All the previously described conventions apply for the protocol description file If you output the same file more than once in the program the TNC appends all texts to the end of the texts already output within the target file 244 Programming Q Parameters il FN 18 SYS DATUM READ Read system data With the function FN 18 SYS DATUM READ you can read system data and store them in Q parameters You select the system data through a group name ID number and additionally through a number and an index If required Program information 10 System jump addresses 13 Machine status 20 Channel data 25 Cycle parameter 30 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 3 Z 103 Q parameter number Number of the active fixed cycle Relevant within NC cycles for inquiry as to whether the Q parameter given under IDX was explicitly stated in the associated CYCLE DEF Label jumped to during M2 M30 instead of ending the current program Value 0
185. distance LEN plus the tool radius gt Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation gt Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LN soft key gt LEN Enter the distance from the last contour element Paa M to PN Always enter LEN as a positive value Example NC blocks Last contour element Pg with radius compensation Depart perpendicular to contour by LEN 20 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program 64 Programming Programming Contours il Departure on a circular path with tangential connection DEP CT The tool moves on a circular arc from the last contour point Pe to the end point Py The path is tangentially connected to the last contour element Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP CT soft key DEP ct gt Center angle CCA of the arc Radius R of the circular arc f the tool should depart the workpiece in the direction of the radius compensation i e to the right with RR or to the left with RL Enter R as a positive value f the tool should depart the workpiece in the direction opposite to the radius compensation Enter R as a negative value Example NC blocks Departing on a circular arc tangentially connecting the contour and a straight line DEP LCT The tool moves on a circular arc from the last contour point Pe to an auxiliary point Py
186. e If you want to depart the contour on a tangential path use the function DEP LCT The block with DEP LCT must contain only coordinates of the working plane Before using the functions listed below you have to cancel M120 and the radius compensation Cycle 32 Tolerance Cycle 19 Working plane PLANE function M114 M128 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 9 4 Miscellaneous ung for Contouring Behavior j il 9 4 Miscellaneous run ns for Contouring Behavior Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 Miscellaneous functions software option Standard behavior In the program run modes the TNC moves the tool as defined in the part program Behavior with M118 M118 permits manual corrections by handwheel during program run Just program M118 and enter an axis specific value linear or rotary axis in millimeters Input If you enter M118 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog for this block by asking you the axis specific values The coordinates are entered with the orange axis direction buttons or the ASCII keyboard Effect Cancel handwheel positioning by programming M118 once again without coordinate input M118 becomes effective at the start of block Example NC blocks You want to be able to use the handwheel during program run to move the tool in the working plane X Y by 1 mm and in the rotary axis B by 5 from the programmed value M118 is effective in a tilted coordinate system if you
187. e DD MM YYYY Date at which the program is to be started To activate the start press the OK soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 413 14 7 Optional Block Skip 14 7 Optional Block Skip Application In atest run or program run the control can skip over blocks that begin with a slash Con To run or test the program without the blocks ii preceded by a slash set the soft key to ON oN To run or test the program with the blocks preceded lore by aslash set the soft key to OFF This function does not work for TOOL DEF blocks After a power interruption the TNC returns to the most recently selected setting Insert the character In the Programming mode you select the block in which the character is to be Inserted Z Select the INSERT soft key REMOVE Erase the character In the Programming mode you select the block in which the character is to be deleted Select the REMOVE soft key C REHovE 414 Test Run and Program Run il 14 8 Optional Program Run Interruption Application The TNC optionally interrupts program run at blocks containing M1 It you use M1 in the Program Run mode the TNC does not switch off the spindle or coolant on Do not interrupt Program Run or Test Run at blocks lt A ore containing M1 Set soft key to OFF Interrupt Program Run or Test Run at blocks containing M1 Set soft key to ON HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 14 8 Optional Program Run Interrup
188. e OFF the measure the machining time function Store displayed time STORE Display the sum of stored time ADD and displayed time OG Clear displayed time oo 20 During the Test Run the TNC resets the machining time as soon as a new BLK FORM is evaluated 400 Test Run and Program Run il 14 2 Show the Workpiece in the Working Space Advanced Graphic Features Software Option Application This MOD function enables you to graphically check the position of the workpiece blank or reference point in the machine s working space and to activate work space monitoring in the Test Run mode of operation This function is activated with the BLANK IN WORKSPACE soft key You can activate or deactivate the function with the SW limit monitoring soft key 2nd soft key row Another transparent cuboid represents the workpiece blank Its dimensions are shown in the BLK FORM table The TNC takes the dimensions from the workpiece blank definition of the selected program The workpiece cuboid defines the coordinate system for input Its datum lies within the traverse range cuboid For a test run It normally does not matter where the workpiece blank is located within the working space However if you activate working space monitoring you must graphically shift the workpiece blank so that it lies within the working space Use the soft keys shown in the table You can also activate the current datum for the Test Run
189. e Switch On Acknowledge the power interruption and move to the reference points Switch on the power supply for control and machine The TNC starts the operating system This process may take several minutes Then the TNC will display the message Power interruption Press the CE key The TNC converts the PLC program The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode Switch on and crossing the reference points can vary depending on the machine tool Your machine manual provides more detailed information Switch on the control voltage The TNC checks operation of the emergency stop circuit and goes into the reference run mode Cross the reference points manually in the displayed sequence For each axis press the machine START button If you have absolute linear and angle encoders on your machine there Is no need for a reference run Further information on this topic Traversing the reference marks See Switch on on page 350 Operating modes See Programming and Editing on page 61 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Manual operation PLOS 1092 9 0 t29 ga 452 l 49 0 8O 860 Bw Saas lee 2S fi 57 F O0OVR TOUCH PROBE A PRESET TABLE 1 2 Machine Switch B 1 3 Programming the First JN 1 3 Programming the First Part Select the correct operating mode You can write programs only in the Programming and Editing mode Press the operating modes ke
190. e fixed cycle Dwell time for active fixed cycle Thread pitch for Cycles 17 18 Milling allowance for active fixed cycle Direction angle for rough out in active fixed cycle Probing angle Probing path Probing feed rate Dimensioning O absolute G90 1 incremental G91 Result code for the last SOL command Tool length Tool radius Tool radius R2 Oversize in tool length DL Oversize in tool radius DR Oversize for tool radius DR2 Tool inhibited 0 or 1 Number of the replacement tool Maximum tool age TIME1 Maximum tool age TIME2 Current tool age CUR TIME Programming Q Parameters il Pocket table data 51 Pocket number of a tool in the tool pocket table 52 Values programmed immediately after TOOL CALL 60 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2i 28 Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Tool no Tool no PLC status Maximum tooth length LCUTS Maximum plunge angle ANGLE TT Number of teeth CUT TT Wear tolerance in length LTOL TT Wear tolerance in radius RTOL TT Rotational direction DIRECT O positive 1 negative TT Offset in plane R OFFS TT Offset in length L OFFS TT Break tolerance for length LBREAK TT Break tolerance in radi
191. e moved from its current position Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 342 Abbreviations used AXTAL Example NC block orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 341 il orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function Overview Independently of which PLANE function you use to define the tilted machining plane the following functions are always available for the positioning behavior Automatic positioning Selection of alternate tilting possibilities Selection of the Type of Transformation Automatic positioning MOVE TURN STAY entry is mandatory After you have entered all parameters for the plane definition you must specify how the rotary axes will be positioned to the calculated axis values The PLANE function is to automatically position the rotary axes to the calculated position values The position of the tool relative to the workpiece is to remain the same The TNC carries out a compensation movement in the linear axes The PLANE function is to automatically position the rotary axes to the calculated position values but only the rotary axes are positioned The TNC does not carry out a compensation movement in the linear axes Y
192. e program block contains three coordinates The TNC thus moves the tool in space to the programmed position Example 154 Programming Programming Contours il Circles and circular arcs e The TNC moves two axes simultaneously on a circular path relative to o the workpiece You can define a circular movement by entering the Besi circle center CC tT When you program a circle the control assigns it to one of the main planes This plane is defined automatically when you set the spindle gt axis during a TOOL CALL Lin os _Spindle axis Main plane _ Z XY also A UV XV UY en Y ZX also WU ZU WX X YZ also VW YW VZ plane by using the function for tilting the working plane see User s Manual for Cycles Cycle 19 WWORKING PLANE or Q parameters see Principle and Overview page 222 You can program circles that do not lie parallel to a main er LL N HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 155 il of Path Functions T z LL N e Direction of rotation DR for circular movements When a circular path has no tangential transition to another contour element enter the direction of rotation as follows Clockwise direction of rotation DR Counterclockwise direction of rotation DR Radius compensation The radius compensation must be in the block in which you move to the first contour element You cannot activate radius compensation in a circle block Activate it b
193. e to the active directory or to the selected destination directory The original file is retained or HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 th the AA iii ing wi 3 4 Work th the iManager ing wi 3 4 Work Copying files into another directory Select a screen layout with two equally sized windows To display directories in both windows press the PATH soft key In the right window Move the highlight to the directory into which you wish to copy the files and display the files in this directory with the ENT key In the left window Select the directory with the files that you wish to copy and press ENT to display the files in this directory Call the file tagging functions TAG Move the highlight to the file you want to copy and tag TAG FILE it You can tag several files in this way if desired MASM E TAG Copy the tagged files into the target directory Additional marking functions see Tagging files page 103 If you have tagged files in both the left and right windows the TNC copies from the directory in which the highlight is located Copying a directory Move the highlight in the right window onto the directory you want to copy Press the COPY soft key the TNC opens the window for selecting the target directory Select the target directory and confirm with ENT or the OK soft key The TNC copies the selected directory and all its subdirectories to the selected target directory 100 Programming F
194. easured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables the workpiece coordinate system If you want to save measured values in the machine based coordinate system REF coordinates press the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table on page 369 Use this function if you want to save measured values in With the ENTER INDATUM TABLE soft key the TNC can write the values measured during a touch probe cycle in a datum table Select any probe function Enter the desired coordinates of the datum in the appropriate input boxes depends on the touch probe cycle being run Enter the datum number in the Number in table input box Press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key The TNC saves the datum in the indicated datum table under the entered number ouch Probe Function Software Option 12 5 Using 3 D Touch Probe 368 Manual Operation and Setup il Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table the machine based coordinate system REF coordinates If you want to save measured values in the workpiece coordinate system press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables on page 368 Use this function if you want to save measured values in With the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key the TNC can write the values measured during a probe cycle in the preset table The meas
195. easurement error CfgT TRoundStylus Coordinates of the stylus center 0 X coordinate of the stylus center with respect to the machine datum 1 Y coordinate of the stylus center with respect to the machine datum 2 Z coordinate of the stylus center with respect to the machine datum Safety clearance above the stylus for pre positioning 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm Set up clearance in tool axis direction Safety zone around the stylus for pre positioning 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm Set up clearance in the plane perpendicular to the tool axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 443 il 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters ChannelSettings Ch NC Active kinematics Kinematics to be activated List of machine kinematics Geometry tolerances Permissible deviation from the radius 0 0001 to 0 016 mm Permissible deviation of the radius at the circle end point compared with the circle start point Configuration of the fixed cycles Overlap factor for pocket milling 0 001 to 1 414 Overlap factor for Cycle 4 POCKET MILLING and Cycle 5 CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING Display the Spindle error message If M3 M4 is not active On Issue error message Off No error message Display the Enter a negative depth error message On Issue error message Off No error message Behavior when moving to wall of slot in the cylinder surface LineNormal Approach on a straight line CircleTangential Approach on a circular path M function for spindle orientation
196. ecial functions FCT ee Select the menu for defining various plain language JES functions PN Select FUNCTION PARAX PARAX FUNCTION Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP PARAXCOMP a i Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP MOVE ine Define the parallel axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Example NC block 10 2 Working 5 the Parallel Axes U V and W j il 10 2 Working ok the Parallel Axes U V and W FUNCTION PARAXCOMP OFF Use the PARAXCOMP OFF function to switch off the parallel axis functions PARAXCOMP DISPLAY and PARAXCOMP MOVE Proceed as follows for the definition Show the soft key row with special functions FCT m Select the menu for defining various plain language EES functions FUNCTION Select FUNCTION PARAX woo Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP FUNCTION Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP OFF If you want to switch OFF off the parallel axis functions only for individual parallel axes then the respective axis must be specifically indicated 320 Example NC blocks Programming Special Functions il FUNCTION PARAXMODE To activate the PARAXMODE function you must always define three axes You can also use the PARAXMODE function in conjunction with the PARAXCOMP function Use the PARAXMODE function to define the axes the TNC is to use for machining You program all traverse movements and contour descriptions in the principal axes X Y and Z independent of your machine Define the three axes in the PARAXMODE function
197. ecifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function 342 11 3 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes 346 Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 software option 1 346 Shorter path traverse of rotary axes M126 347 Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 348 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 25 il 12 1 Switch On Switch Off 350 Switch on 350 Switch off S02 12 2 Moving the Machine Axes 353 To traverse with the machine axis direction buttons 303 Incremental jog positioning 354 Traversing with the HR 410 electronic handwheel 355 12 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M 356 Function 356 Entering values 356 Changing the spindle speed and feed rate 357 12 4 Datum Setting without a 3 D Touch Probe 358 Note 358 Preparation 358 Workpiece presetting with axis keys 359 Datum management with the preset table 360 12 5 Using 3 D Touch Probes Touch Probe Function Software Option 366 Overview 366 Selecting probe cycles 367 Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables 368 Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table 369 12 6 Calibrating 3 D Touch Probes Touch Probe Function Software Option 370 Introduction 370 Calibrating the effective length 370 Calibrating the effective radius and
198. ect the probe direction with the soft keys Same axis but from the opposite direction To probe the workpiece press the machine START button The value displayed as datum is the distance between the two points on the coordinate axis To return to the datum that was active before the length measurement Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING POS soft key Probe the first touch point again Set the datum to the value that you wrote down previously To terminate the dialog press the END key Measuring angles You can use the 3 D touch probe to measure angles in the working plane You can measure the angle between the angle reference axis and a workpiece edge or the angle between two sides The measured angle is displayed as a value of maximum 90 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ion Software Option D Touch Probe Touch Probe Funct p ing wi 12 8 Datum Sett k il Finding the angle between the angle reference axis and a e a workpiece edge p prar PROBING Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING z O ai ROT soft key O Rotation angle If you need the current basic rotation LL later write down the value that appears under Rotation angle z Make a basic rotation with workpiece edge to be _ compared see Compensating Workpiece A Misalignment with 3 D Touch Probe Touch Probe lt i Function Software Option on page 373 Press the PROBING ROT soft key to display the
199. ection number label number and number of 19 CYCL DEF 11 8 SCALING Bik nos LBL fea chone 7 m 20 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 9 9995 5 99 7 ae possible programmed repeats repeats yet to be run Fe ss 23 PLANE RESET STAY fall i i 24 LBL Active subprogram numbers with block number in 25 END PGM STATA MN Ei which the subprogram was called and the label EA moron pana pe number that was called S IST 12 44 Information on standard cycles CYC tab 57 FOUR 2 4 Status Di END PGM M 33 747 Y 72 578 Z 9 754 S Softkey Meaning ees C 0 000 S 94 680 feel PE Aee eklQR T 3 Omm min Our 57 8 M5 No direct Active machining cycle iri er ere a STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS status oF selection OVERVIEW E d STATUS Tz es PARAM z possible i Program run full sequence Programming Active values of Cycle 32 Tolerance STAT h 17 LBL 15 Overview PGM LBL CYC M POS je 18 L IX 0 1 R FMAX CYCLI 19 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING oer 17 20 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 0 9995 cea 21 STOP T 22 CALL LBL 15 REPS 23 PLANE RESET STAY 24 LBL 25 END PGM STAT1 MM HSC MODE TA Pde a S IST 12 44 57 F OUR END PGM 33 747 Y 72 578 Z 9 754 S C 0 000 S 94 680 oa a acr Me oke T mm min Dur 57 8 M5 STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS STATUS OF COORD 5 ag OVERVIEW STATUS TRANSF Q PARAM HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 67
200. ective lengi he left side is active Tool orientation Calibrate the effective radius PROBING Calibrating the effective radius and compensating 3 D data center misalignment 3 D touch probes S e ect th e I ndex ta b gt i Sa naona Measure a basic rotation using a line ma Triggering Managing more tha Set the reference point in any axis PROBING Activate the Keyword input field Accessories an ches at Enter the word for the desired subject and the TNC orc es ae i ray lee s aiue synchronizes the index and creates a list in which you Angie measuring i Seams soe NESE ASCII files DLD can find the subject more easily or Pu ted TE Sus tios MESE pee roo using two PROBING Setting datum points using holes cylindrical studs Automatic tool mea ey U S e th e a rrow key to h ig h ig ht th e d es i red keywo rd a a RESTA Bus datum using four holes cylindrical ae Setting datum points using holes cylindrical studs Back boring Basic rotation Set a circ Measurina durina Z holes cyli Use the ENT key to call the information on the coe a a2 z BACK FORWARD PAGE PAGE DIRECTORY WINDOW selected keyword lt gt I a z WE ca eae You can enter the search word only with a keyboard using uds l Setting datum points using holes cylindrical stud indrical stud connected via USB Full text search
201. ed program section corresponding program using the file manager and then mark the block after which you wish to insert the copied block To insert the section into another program select the To insert the block press the INSERT BLOCK soft key To end the marking function press the CANCEL SELECTION soft key Function Sf Key Switch marking function on Ea Switch marking function oft eS Delete marked block Es Insert block that is stored in the buffer memory rea Copy marked block Fa 88 Programming Fundamentals File Management il The TNC search function With the search function of the TNC you can search for any text within a program and replace it by a new text if required Searching for texts If required select the block containing the word you wish to find 40 END Select the search function The TNC superimposes the search window and displays the available search functions in the soft key row see table of search functions Enter the text to be searched for Please note that the search is case sensitive Start the search process The TNC moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for Repeat the search process The TNC moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for End the search function HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Program run full sequence Programming BEGIN PGM 14 MM 1 BLK FORM 1 Z X Y
202. ed if the contour element with length O is located after the RND or CHF block The algebraic sign of the direction of rotation is used if the sign defined for DR differs from the one defined for IPA Tool radius compensation on circular arc or helix with angular length O Checking the algebraic sign of the depth parameter in fixed cycles Tool change while tool radius compensation is active HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 The transition between the adjacent elements of the arc helix is generated Also the tool axis motion is executed right before this transition If the element is the first or last element to be corrected the next or previous element is dealt with in the same way as the first or last element to be corrected Must be deactivated if Cycle 209 is used Program cancellation with error message The equidistant line of the arc helix is used for generating the tool path No restrictions Tool radius compensation is canceled tool change is performed 491 SLII Cycles 20 to 24 Number of definable contour elements Define the working plane Traverse paths during rough out Contour parallel rough out or paraxial channel milling and rough out Internal consideration of combined contours Rough out strategy if multiple pockets are defined Position at end of SL cycle Tangential arcs for floor finishing Cycle 23 Tangential arcs for side finishing Cycle 24 492 Max 16384 blocks in up to 12 sSu
203. edge feed rate decrease only Reset M109 M110 Feed rate for rotary axes in mm min Reset M116 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pre calculate radius compensated contour LOOK AHEAD Shortest path traverse of rotary axes Reset M126 Moving to position in an untilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Page 297 Page 415 Page 297 Page 297 Page 297 Page 297 Page 297 Page 297 Cycles Manual Page 298 Page 298 Page 348 Page 301 Page 303 Cycles Manual Page 305 Page 346 Page 308 Page 306 Page 347 Page 300 i il M140 Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction Page 309 M141 Suppress touch probe monitoring E Page 310 M148 Retract the tool automatically from the contour at NC stop Page 311 M149 Reset M148 462 Comparison Functions of the TNC 320 and the iTNC 530 Comparison Specifications Axes Input resolution and display step Linear axes Rotary axes Display Memory media for NC PLC programs and system files Program memory for NC programs Block processing time HeROS operating system Windows XP operating system Interpolation Straight line Circle Helix Spline Hardware Comparison Data interfaces 100Basel Fast Ethernet RS 232 C V 24 serial interface RS 422 V 11 serial interface USB interface USB 1 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 5 maximum 1 um 0 001 15 1 inch TFT color flat panel disp
204. ee figure at bottom right 1 SET UP E gt Feed rate F Contour speed at which the tool should be positioned Positioning the rotary axes in a separate block Proceed as follows if you want to position the rotary axes in a separate positioning block option STAY selected Pre position the tool to a position where there is no danger of collision with the workpiece clamping devices during positioning gt Select any PLANE function and define automatic positioning with the STAY option During program execution the TNC calculates the position values of the rotary axes present on the machine and stores them in the system parameters Q120 A axis Q121 B axis and Q122 C axis gt Define the positioning block with the angular values calculated by the TNC NC example blocks Position a machine with a rotary table C and a tilting table A to a space angle of B 45 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting Position at clearance height Define and activate the PLANE function Position the rotary axis with the values calculated by the TNC Define machining in the tilted working plane 11 2 The PLANE Function i i orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function Selection of alternate tilting possibilities SEQ entry optional The position you define for the machining plane is used by the TNC to calculate the appropriate positioning of
205. eforehand in a straight line block see Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates page 166 or approach block APPR block see Contour Approach and Departure page 158 Pre positioning Danger of collision Before running a part program always pre position the tool to prevent the possibility of damaging it or the workpiece 156 Programming Programming Contours il Creating the program blocks with the path function keys The gray path function keys initiate the plain language dialog The TNC asks you successively for all the necessary information and inserts the program block into the part program Example programming a straight line Initiate the programming dialog e g for a straight line Enter the coordinates of the straight line end point e g 20 in X x Enter the coordinates of the straight line end point e g 30 in Y and confirm with the ENT key Select the radius compensation here press the RO soft key the tool moves without compensation 4 Enter the feed rate here 100 mm min and confirm 00 your entry with ENT For programming in inches enter 100 for a feed rate of 10 ipm To move at rapid traverse press the F MAX soft key re or To traverse with the feed rate defined in the TOOL CALL block press the F AUTO soft key Enter a miscellaneous function here M3 and terminate the dialog with ENT The part program now contains the following line HEIDENHAIN TNC 320
206. en TNC 320 and iTNC 530 Touch probe table for managing different 3 D touch probes Creating tool usage file checking the availability Cutting data tables Automatic calculation of spindle speed and feed rate from saved technology tables Fr 466 eely definable tables TAB files X X soft keys X directly editable X X X X gt X lt X error message if pole transfer is ambiguous gt X lt X variable numbering X X X X Sometimes with _ Switchover with split screen layout key Not possible X X ASCII keys X X editable after conversion X X X X X X gt X lt X fixed numbering Sometimes with X Switchover by soft key Not possible Constant contouring speed Relative to the path of the tool center or relative to the tool s cutting edge Parallel operation Creating programs while another program is being run Programming of counter axes Tilting the working plane Cycle 19 PLANE function Machining with rotary tables Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes Cylinder Surface Cycle 27 Cylinder Surface Cycle 28 Cylinder Surface Ridge Cycle 29 Cylinder Surface External Contour Cycle 39 Feed rate in mm min or rev min Traverse in tool axis direction Manual operation 3 D ROT menu During program interruption With handwheel superimpositioning Approaching and departing the contour Via a straight line or arc Entry of feed rates F mm min ra
207. end 122 Programming Programming Aids il Keystroke log The TNC stores keystrokes and important events e g system startup in a keystroke log The capacity of the keystroke log is limited If the keystroke log Is full the control switches to a second keystroke log If this second file becomes full the first keystroke log is cleared and written to again and so on To view the keystroke history switch between CURRENT FILE and PREVIOUS FILE Press the LOG FILES soft key LOG FILES To open the keystroke log file press the KEYSTROKE KEYSTROKE Los LOG FILE soft key eae If you need the previous log Tile press the PREVIOUS FILE FILE soft key ae If you need the current log file press the CURRENT FILE FILE soft key The TNC saves each key pressed during operation in a keystroke log The oldest entry is at the beginning and the most recent entry Is at the end of the file Overview of the buttons and soft keys for viewing the log files Go to beginning of log file BEGIN ie Go to end of log file END Current log file CURRENT ETICE Previous log file PREVIOUS FILE Up down one line Return to main menu HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 4 6 r Messages k il 4 6 _ Messages Informational texts After a faulty operation such as pressing a key without function or entering a value outside of the valid range the TNC displays a green text in the header informing yo
208. end program Programming Programming Contours il air 7 1 Labeling Subprograms and gt tam Section Repeats 7 1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Subprograms and program section repeats enable you to program a machining sequence once and then run it as often as desired Labels The beginnings of subprograms and program section repeats are marked in a part program by labels LBL A LABEL is identified by a number between 1 and 999 or by a name you define Each LABEL number or LABEL name can be set only once in the program with the LABEL SET The number of label names you can enter is only limited by the internal memory Do not use a label number or label name more than once Label O LBL 0 is used exclusively to mark the end of a subprogram and can therefore be used as often as desired 206 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il 72 Subprograms Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which a subprogram is called with CALL LBL 2 The subprogram is then executed from beginning to end The Subprogram end is marked LBL 0 3 The TNC then resumes the part program from the block after the subprogram call CALL LBL 7 2 Subprograms Programming notes A main program can contain up to 254 subprograms You can call subprograms in any sequence and as often as desired A subprogram cannot call itself Write subprograms at the end of the main program beh
209. enerate a 2 D pencil trace graphic of the programmed contour To switch the screen layout to displaying program blocks to the left and graphics to the right press the SPLIT SCREEN key and PROGRAM GRAPHICS soft key Set the AUTO DRAW soft key to ON While you are entering the program lines the TNC generates each path contour you program in the graphics window in the right screen halt If you do not wish to have the TNC generate graphics during programming set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF Even when AUTO DRAW ON is active graphics are not generated for program section repeats Generating a graphic for an existing program Use the arrow keys to select the block up to which you want the graphic to be generated or press GOTO and enter the desired block number To generate graphics press the RESET START soft eee key Additional functions Generate a complete graphic a START Generate programming graphic blockwise START SINGLE START STOP Generate a complete graphic or complete it after RESET START Stop the programming graphics This soft key only appears while the TNC is generating the interactive graphics 118 HEBEL H Programming 6 L 2 5 R FMAX M3 7 APPR LCT X 10 Y 0 R5 RL 8 FPOL X 100 Y 0 FC DR R10 CLSD CCX 0 wo 10 FLT 11 FCT DR R15 CCX 1 0 CCY 0 2 FLT 13 FCT DR R1 CCPR 4 CCPA 112 4 FLT PDX 10 PDY D15 15 FSELECT1 16 FCT DR R5 17 FLT PDX 1 PDY DIS aone
210. ependent function Spindle STOP Coolant ON Coolant OFF Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON Same function as M02 Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modally effective machine dependent function Constant contouring speed at corners Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine tool builder such as tool change position Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below 360 Machine small contour steps Machine open contours completely Blockwise cycle call Automatic tool change with replacement tool if maximum tool life has expired Reset M101 Reduce feed rate during plunging to factor F percentage Reactivate the datum as last defined Machining with second k factor Machining with first k factor Suppress error message for replacement tools with oversize Reset M107 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 X XJ X X XI XJ X X X gt X lt k il M109 M110 M111 M112 M113 M114 M115 M116 M117 M118 M120 M124 M126 M127 M128 M129 M130 M134 M135 M136 M137 M138 M140 M141 M142 M143 476 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge increase and decrease feed rate Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge feed rate decrease only Reset M109 M110 Enter contour transition between two contour elements Reset M112
211. er or otherwise a browser adapted by HEIDENHAIN For many soft keys there is a context sensitive call through which you can go directly to the description of the soft key s function This functionality requires using a mouse Proceed as follows 4 7 Context Sensitiv Select the soft key row containing the desired soft key Click with the mouse on the help symbol that the TNC displays just above the soft key row The mouse pointer turns into a question mark Move the question mark to the soft key for which you want an explanation and click The TNC opens the TNCguide If no specific part of the help is assigned to the selected soft key the TNC opens the book file main chm in which you can use the search function or the navigation to find the desired explanation manually Even if you are editing an NC block context sensitive help is available Select any NC block Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the block Press the HELP key The TNC start the help system and shows a description for the active function does not apply to auxiliary functions or cycles that were integrated by your machine tool builder 126 Programming Programming Aids Navigating in the TNCguide It s easiest to use the mouse to navigate in the TNCguide A table of contents appears on the left side of the screen By clicking the rightward pointing triangle you open subordinate sections and by clicking the respective entry you open the individual pages I
212. er is transmitted with 7 or 8 data bits Parity check parity The parity bit helps the receiver to detect transmission errors The parity bit can be formed in three different ways No parity NONE There is no error recognition Even parity EVEN Here there is an error if the receiver finds that it has received an odd number of set bits Odd parity ODD Here there is an error if the receiver finds that it has received an even number of set bits Setting the stop bits stopBits The start bit and one or two stop bits enable the receiver to synchronize to every transmitted character during serial data transmission Setting the handshake flowControl By handshaking two devices control data transfer between them A distinction is made between software handshaking and hardware handshaking No dataflow checking NONE Handshaking is not active Hardware handshaking RIS_CTS Transmission stop is active through RTS Software handshaking KON_XOFF Transmission stop is active through DC3 XOFF HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces f il 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces Settings for data transfer with the TNCserver PC software Enter the following settings in the user parameters seriallnterfaceRS232 definition of data blocks for the serial ports RS232 Data transfer rate in baud Has to match the setting in TNCserver Communications protocol BLOCKWISE Data bits in each transferred 7 b
213. ernet Protocol TCP IP Properties 2 x p Prerequisite eee The network card must already be installed on the PC and ou can get IF settings assigned automatically if your network supports rea dy for operation this capability Othenvise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IF settings If the PC that you want to connect the TNC to is already integrated in your company network then keep the PC s Obtain an IP address automatically network address and adapt the TNC s network address Use the following IP address accordingly IP address 160 1 180 subnet mask 250 255 0 To open Network Connections click lt Start gt lt Control Panel gt Default gateway lt Network and Dial up Connections gt and then Network Connections Right click the lt LAN connection gt symbol and then lt Properties gt in the menu that appears Double click lt Internet Protocol TCP IP gt to change the IP settings see figure at top right If it is not yet active select the lt Use the following IP address gt option Advanced In the lt IP address gt input field enter the same IP address that you entered for the PC network settings on the ITNC e g 160 1 180 1 Enter 255 255 0 0 in the lt Subnet mask gt input field Confirm the settings with lt OK gt Save the network configuration with lt OK gt You may have to restart Windows now f Obtain ONS server address automatically
214. es under which a file is saved The individual names are separated by a backslash W The path including all drive characters directories and the file name cannot exceed 256 characters Example th the AA iii ing wi The directory AUFTR1 was created on the TNC drive Then in the AUFTR1 directory the directory NCPROG was created and the part program PROG1 H was copied into it The part program now has the following path TNC AUFTR1 NCPROG PROG1 H Bm NCPROG The chart at right illustrates an example of a directory display with 1 WZTAB different paths KAR25T 3 4 Work HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 th the iManager ing wi 3 4 Work Copy a file Display a specific file type Create new file Display the last 10 files that were selected Delete a file or directory Tag a file Rename a file Protect a file against editing and erasure Cancel file protection Manage network drives Select the editor Sort files by properties Copy a directory Delete directory with all its subdirectories Display all the directories of a particular drive Rename directory Create a new directory 94 Overview Functions of the file manager COPY acl era SELECT TYPE IC a m Z E x J y a O par m O 4 A zZ v a o m 9 4 E NET SELECT EDITOR SORT COPY DIR NEW i aa Page 99 Page 96
215. essing T with SQL Commands T O Q O Y gt T 8 9 Accessing Result set The selected rows are numbered in ascending order within the result set starting from 0 This numbering is referred to as the index The index is used for read and write accesses enabling a row of the result set to be specifically addressed It can often be advantageous to sort the rows in the result set Do this by specifying the table column containing the sorting criteria Also select ascending or descending order SQL SELECT ORDER BY The selected rows that were transferred to the result set are addressed with the HANDLE All following SOL commands use the handle to refer to this set of selected columns and rows When concluding a transaction the handle is released SQL COMMIT or SQL ROLLBACK It is then no longer valid You can edit more than one result set at the same time The SQL server assigns a new handle for each Select command Binding Q parameters to columns The NC program does not have direct access to the table entries in the result set The data must be transferred in Q parameters In the other direction the data is first prepared in the Q parameters and then transferred to the result set Specify with SQL BIND which table columns are mapped to which Q parameters The Q parameters are bound assigned to the columns Columns that are not bound to Q parameters are
216. example with an L block The position of the transformed tool axis does not change in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the table and therefore the workpiece by 90 for example the coordinate system does not rotate f you press the Z axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode the tool moves In Z direction In calculating the transformed coordinate system the TNC considers only the mechanically influenced offsets of the particular tilting table the so called translational components Machine with swivel head You must bring the tool into the desired position for machining by positioning the swivel head for example with an L block The position of the transformed tool axis changes in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the swivel head of your machine and therefore the tool in the B axis by 90 for example the coordinate system rotates also If you press the Z axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode the tool moves In X direction of the machine based coordinate system In calculating the transformed coordinate system the TNC considers both the mechanically influenced offsets of the particular swivel head the so called translational components and offsets caused by tilting of the tool 3 D tool length compensation e Working Plane Software Option 1 j de N q HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 383 il 12 9 ritin Worki
217. f Y is defined the TNC retracts the tool from the contour by 0 1 mm provided that this function was activated in the NC program with M148 see Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 on page 311 Reference to the number of the touch probe in the touch probe table Point angle of the tool Is used by the Centering cycle Cycle 240 in order to calculate the centering depth from the diameter entry HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Maximum tool age for TOOL CALL Current tool life Tool type Tool description PLC status Tool type for pocket table Retract tool Y N Number of the touch probe Point angle on 5 2 Tool Data o il 5 2 Tool Data Tool table Tool data required for automatic tool measurement For a description of the cycles for automatic tool measurement see the User s Manual for Cycle Programming CUT LTOL RTOL R2TOL DIRECT R OFFS L OFFS LBREAK RBREAK 138 Number of teeth 20 teeth maximum Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R2 for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range
218. f interruption Behavior with M148 builder The machine tool builder defines in a machine parameter the path that the TNC is to traverse for a LIFTOFF command A The M148 function must be enabled by the machine tool The TNC retracts the tool by up to 30 mm in the direction of the tool axis if in the LIFTOFF column of the tool table you set the parameter Y for the active tool see Tool table Standard tool data on page 136 LIFTOFF takes effect in the following situations An NC stop triggered by you An NC stop triggered by the software e g if an error occurred in the drive system When a power interruption occurs Danger of collision Remember that especially on curved surfaces the surface can be damaged during return to the contour Back the tool off before returning to the contour In the CfgLiftOff machine parameter define the value by which the tool is to be retracted In the CfgLiftOff machine parameter you can also switch off the function Effect M148 remains in effect until deactivated with M149 M148 becomes effective at the start of block M149 at the end of block HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 9 4 Miscellaneous ung for Contouring Behavior i il JOIAeYyag Hunnozuo 104 a SNODUE IISIW p 6 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il 312 A Overview of Special Functions 10 1 Overview of Special Functions Press the SPEC FCT and the corresponding soft keys to access further special functi
219. fective length Calibrating the effective radius Measuring a basic rotation using a line Datum setting in any axis Setting a corner as datum lt x KI XIXI KL X X Setting a circle center as datum Setting a center line as datum Measuring a basic rotation using two holes cylindrical studs Setting the datum using four holes cylindrical studs X XJ X X X X X X X X Setting the circle center using three holes cylindrical studs Support of mechanical touch probes by manually capturing the current position By soft key By hard key Writing measured values in preset table X X Writing measured values in datum tables X X 478 Comparison Touch probe cycles for automatic workpiece inspection 0 Reference plane 1 Polar datum 2 Calibrate TS 3 Measuring 4 Measuring in 3 D 9 Calibrate TS length 30 Calibrate TT 31 Measure tool length 32 Measure tool radius 33 Measure tool length and radius 400 401 402 403 404 405 408 409 410 A11 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 Basic rotation Basic rotation from two holes Basic rotation from two studs Compensate a basic rotation via a rotary axis Set basic rotation Compensating workpiece misalignment by rotating the C axis Slot center datum Ridge center datum Datum from inside of rectangle Datum trom outside of rectangle Datum from inside of circle Datum from outside of circle Datum at outside corner Da
220. fer to your machine manual With the RESTORE POS AT N feature block scan you can start a part program at any block you desire The TNC scans the program blocks up to that point Machining can be graphically simulated If you have interrupted a part program with an INTERNAL STOP the TNC automatically offers the interrupted block N for mid program Startup Mid program startup must not begin in a subprogram All necessary programs tables and pallet files must be selected in a program run mode of operation status M If the program contains a programmed interruption before the startup block the block scan is interrupted Press the machine START button to continue the block scan After a block scan return the tool to the calculated position with RESTORE POSITION Tool length compensation does not take effect until after the tool call and a following positioning block This also applies if you have only changed the tool length startup Result parameters that are written to from these The TNC skips all touch probe cycles in a mid program cycles might therefore remain empty You may not use mid program startup if the following occurs after a tool change in the machining program The program is started in an FK sequence The stretch filter is active Pallet management is used The program is started in a threading cycle Cycles 17 18 19 206 207 and 209 or the subsequent program block Touch probe cycles 0 1 and 3 are
221. fine string functions STRING Page 273 17 DEP LCT X 15 Y 50 R5 FUNCTIONS Adding comments INSERT Page 113 19 L Z 100 R FMAX M30 20 END PGM 14 MM 316 Programming Special Functions 10 2 Working with the Parallel Axes U V and W Overview Your machine must be configured by the machine O manufacturer if you want to use parallel axis functions The axes U V and W are secondary axes parallel to the principal axes X Y and Z respectively Principal axes and parallel axes are permanently assigned to each other X U A Y V B Z W C The TNC provides the following functions for machining with the parallel axes U V and W PARAXCOMP Define the TNC s Page 320 behavior when Hodi positioning parallel axes PARAXMODE Define the axes the TNC Page 321 is to use for machining PARAXMODE After the TNC is started up the standard configuration is always effective Parallel axis functions are automatically reset by the following functions Selection of a program End of program M2 or M30 Program cancellation PARAXCOMP remains active PARAXCOMP OFF or PARAXMODE OFF You must deactivate the parallel axis functions before switching the machine kinematics HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 10 2 Working 5 the Parallel Axes U V and W i il 10 2 Working ok the Parallel Axes U V and W FUNCTION PARAXCOMP DISPLAY Use the PARAXCOMP DISPLAY function to activate the display function for parallel axis movements The TNC con
222. g functions are illustrated in the table below If the TNC cannot show all positions in the tool table in one screen page the highlight bar at the top of the table will display the gt gt or lt lt symbols Select beginning of table BEGIN Select end of table Select previous page in table Select next page in table PAGE HEEE Find the text or number FIND Move to beginning of line BEGIN r H Z m m D Move to end of line r H zZ m Copy highlighted field FIELD Insert copied field PASTE FIELD Add the entered number of lines tools at the APPEND end of the table N LINES Insert a line with definable tool number aS LINE Delete current line tool DELETE LINE ae fea ea 140 Programming Tools il Sort the tools according to the content of a a column Show all drills in the tool table an Show all cutters in the tool table ae Show all taps thread cutters in the tool table EGA Show all touch probes in the tool table Ee Leaving the tool table Call the file manager and select a file of a different type such as a part program HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 on 5 2 Tool Data j il 5 2 Tool Data Pocket table for tool changer The machine tool builder adapts the functional range of O the pocket table to the requirements of your machine The machine tool manual provides further information For automatic tool changing you need the pocket table TOOL_P TCH
223. g tasks see User s Manual Cycles Chapter 16 Checking workpieces automatically With a 3 D touch probe you can determine position coordinates and from them dimensions and angles on the workpiece To find the coordinate of a position on an aligned workpiece Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING os POS soft key Move the touch probe to a position near the touch point Select the probe direction and axis of the coordinate Use the corresponding soft keys for selection To probe the workpiece press the machine START button The TNC shows the coordinates of the touch point as reference point Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane Find the coordinates of the corner point See Corner as datum on page 376 The TNC displays the coordinates of the probed corner as reference point 378 Manual Operation and Setup il Measuring workpiece dimensions Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING a POS soft key Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point A Select the probing direction by soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button If you will need the current datum later write down the value that appears in the Datum display Datum Enter 0 To terminate the dialog press the END key Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING POS soft key Position the touch probe at a position near the second touch point B Sel
224. gitudinal cut Longitudinal cut in Y direction Update the counter Update solid angle Unfinished If not finished return to LBL 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift End of subprogram 291 8 13 Programming Examples Program sequence This program requires an end mill E The contour of the sphere is approximated by many short lines in the Z X plane defined in 014 The smaller you define the angle increment the smoother the curve becomes You can determine the number of contour cuts through the angle increment in the plane defined in Q18 E The tool moves upward in three dimensional cuts The tool radius is compensated automatically 3 Programming Examples N 92 Center in X axis Center in Y axis Starting angle in space Z X plane End angle in space Z X plane Angle increment in space Radius of the sphere Starting angle of rotational position in the X Y plane End angle of rotational position in the X Y plane Angle increment in the X Y plane for roughing Allowance in sphere radius for roughing Set up clearance for pre positioning in the tool axis Feed rate for milling Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Programming Q Parameters il Call machining operation Reset allowance Angle increment in the X Y plane for finishing Call machining operation Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 10
225. gram section between LBL 2 and this block block 20 is repeated twice The program section between LBL 1 and this block block 15 is repeated once i i 7 5 Nesting Repeating a subprogram Example NC blocks Program execution 1 Main program UPGREP is executed up to block 11 2 Subprogram 2 is called and executed 3 Program section between block 10 and block 12 is repeated twice Subprogram 2 is repeated twice 4 Main program SPGREP is executed from block 13 to block 19 End of program 2 Beginning of program section repeat 1 Subprogram call The program section between LBL 1 and this block block 10 is repeated twice Last block of the main program with M2 Beginning of subprogram End of subprogram 14 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il 76 Programming Examples S Q x Lu Program sequence Pre position the tool to the workpiece surface e Enter the infeed depth in incremental values E Contour milling E Repeat downfeed and contour milling Sem Tool call Retract the tool Pre position in the working plane Pre position to the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 215 il Examples D z 7 6 N 16 Set label for program section repeat Infeed depth in incremental values in space Contour approach Contour Contour departure Retract tool Return jump to LBL 1 section i
226. gt Programming Q gt MOD Functions gt Test Run and Pr gt Tables and Over b iTNC 530 with W gt Overview tables b Pilot smarT NC y Touch Probe Cycli gt Basics 3 gt Working With To f Touch probe cyc vy Introduction Selecting pr Recording me Writing the Writing the vy Calibrating a Introduction Calibrating Calibrating Displaying c Managing mor gt Compensating Setting the Dix I 2 BACK FORWARD PAGE PAGE a E TNCguide The following touch probe cycles are available in the manual modet Calibrate the effective length CAL L Calibrating the effective length uy Calibrate the effective radius PROBING Calibrating the effective radius and compensating I center misalignment Me bi rotat gal Set le center as dat Set ter 1 datu PROBING aim using two PROBING Measure a basic rotation holes cylindrical studs Set the datum using four holes cylindrical PROBING studs ig_2J Set a circle center using three PROBING holes cylindrical studs q ec DIRECTORY Setting datum points using holes cylindrical stud Setting datum points using holes cylindrical studs Setting datum points using holes cylindrical studs WINDOW TNCGUIDE TNCGUIDE QUIT EXIT 125 4 7 Context Sensi vous System
227. hanced file management Creating multiple directories and subdirectories Sorting function Mouse operation Selection of target directory by soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 X X X Blockwise Only in plan view X X X X X X in continuous jog mode X X KKK KK XK o il Programming aids Help graphics for cycle programming X can be switched oft X via config datum Animated help graphics when PLANE PATTERN DEF function is X selected Help graphics for PLANE PATTERN DEF X Context sensitive help function for error messages X X TNCguide Browser based help system X X Context sensitive call of help system X Calculator X scientific X standard Comment blocks in NC program X input via screen X input via ASCII keyboard keyboard Structure blocks in NC program X input via screen X input via ASCII keyboard keyboard Structure view in test run X Structure view for large programs X Dynamic Collision Monitoring DCM Collision monitoring in Automatic operation X option 40 Collision monitoring in Manual operation X option 40 Graphic depiction of the defined collision objects X option 40 Collision checking in the Test Run mode X option 40 Fixture monitoring X option 40 Tool carrier management X option 40 CAM support Loading of contours from DXF data X option 42 Loading of machining positions from DXF data X option 42 Offline filter for CAM files X Stretch
228. he current X coordinate Calculate the current Y coordinate Move to next point Unfinished If not finished return to LBL 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift Move to set up clearance End of subprogram j i ae Examples N Program sequence E This program functions only with a spherical cutter The tool length refers to the sphere center The contour of the cylinder is approximated by many short line segments defined in Q13 The more line segments you define the smoother the curve becomes E The cylinder is milled in longitudinal cuts here parallel to the Y axis E The machining direction can be altered by changing the entries for the starting and end angles in space Clockwise machining direction starting angle gt end angle Counterclockwise machining direction starting angle lt end angle E The tool radius is compensated automatically Center in X axis Center in Y axis Center in Z axis Starting angle in space Z X plane End angle in space Z X plane Cylinder radius Length of the cylinder Rotational position in the X Y plane Allowance for cylinder radius Feed rate for plunging Feed rate for milling Number of cuts Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Call machining operation Reset allowance Call machining operation 90 Programming Q Parameters il 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 3
229. he positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 342 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 PROMIN orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function k il orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function Input parameters PROJECTED NC block Proj angle 1st coordinate plane Projected angle of the tilted machining plane in the 1st coordinate plane of the fixed machine coordinate system Z X for tool axis Z see figure at top right Input range from 89 9999 to 89 9999 The 0 axis is the principal axis of the active machining plane X for tool axis Z See figure at top right for positive direction Proj angle 2nd coordinate plane Projected angle in the 2nd coordinate plane of the fixed machine coordinate system Y Z for tool axis Z see figure at top right Inout range from 89 9999 to 89 9999 The 0 axis is the minor axis of the active machining plane Y for tool axis Z ROT angle of the tilted plane Rotation of the tilted coordinate system around the tilted tool axis corresponds to a rotation with Cycle 10 ROTATION The rotation angle is used to simply specify the direction of the principal axis of the machining plane X for tool axis Z Z for tool axis Y see figure at bottom right Inout range 360 to 360 Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 342
230. here t l hoal C2 EE gs END are further subdirectories which can be shown with the or ENT keys The wide window on the right shows you all files that are stored in the selected directory Each file is shown with additional information illustrated in the table below File name Name with max 25 characters Type File type of Bytes File size in bytes Status File properties E Program is selected in the Programming mode of operation 5 Program is selected in the Test Run mode of operation M Program is selected in a Program Run mode of operation ka File is protected against erasing and editing a File is protected against erasing and edition because It is being run Date Date that the file was last edited Time Time that the file was last edited HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 95 ing wi th the iManager ing wi 3 4 Work Selecting drives directories and files PGM Call the file manager MGT Use the arrow keys or the soft keys to move the highlight to the desired position on the screen Moves the highlight from the left to the right window and vice versa PAGE pase Moves the highlight one page up or down within a t window Step 1 Select drive Move the highlight to the desired drive in the left window To select a drive press the SELECT soft key or press the ENT key ENT Step 2 Select a directory Move the highlight to the desired directory in the left hand window the
231. ight line without radius compensation Position loop resolution Signal period of the position encoder 1024 Cycle time of position controller 3 ms Cycle time of speed controller 600 us Maximum 100 m 8937 inches Maximum 100 000 rom analog soeed command signal Linear and nonlinear axis error backlash reversal spikes during circular movements thermal expansion Stick slip friction One each RS 232 C V 24 max 115 kilobaud Expanded data interface with LSV 2 protocol for remote operation of the TNC through the data interface with the HEIDENHAIN software TNCremo Ethernet interface 100BaseT Approx 2 to 5 megabaud depending on file type and network load 3 x USB 1 1 Operation 0 C to 45 C Storage 30 C to 70 C Tables and Overviews il Electronic handwheels One HR 410 portable handwheel or E One HR 130 panel mounted handwheel or E Up to three HR 150 panel mounted handwheels via HRA 110 handwheel adapter Touch probes m TS 220 3 D touch trigger probe with cable connection or TS 440 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission E TS 444 Battery free 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission m TS 640 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission TS 740 High precision 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission TT 140 3 D touch trigger probe for workpiece measurement Rotary table machining Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes Feed rate in mm min
232. ignators However you can select rows based on the contents of a column Rows can only be deleted in the table editor not by an NC program Cell The part of a column in a row Table entry Content of a cell Result set During a transaction the selected columns and rows are managed in the result set You can view the result set as a sort of intermediate memory which temporarily assumes the set of selected columns and rows result set Synonym This term defines a name used for a table instead of its path and file name Synonyms are specified by the machine manufacturer in the configuration data 258 Programming Q Parameters il A Transaction In principle a transaction consists of the following actions Address table file select rows and transfer them to the result set Read rows from the result set change rows or insert new rows Conclude transaction If changes insertions were made the rows from the result set are placed in the table file Other actions are also necessary so that table entries can be edited in an NC program and to ensure that other changes are not made to copies of the same table rows at the same time This results in the following transaction sequence 1 AQ parameter is specified for each column to be edited The Q parameter is assigned to a column it is bound SQL BIND 2 Address table file select rows and transfer them to the result set ioe SQL Select Reeds SQL Fetch
233. ind the block with M2 or M30 If subprograms are located before the block with M2 or M30 they will be executed at least once even if they are not called Programming a subprogram To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key SET Enter the subprogram number If you want to use a label name press the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry To mark the end press the LBL SET key and enter the label number 0 Calling a subprogram To call a subprogram press the LBL CALL key CALL Label number Enter the label number of the subprogram you wish to call If you want to use a label name press the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry Repeat REP Ignore the dialog question with the NO ENT key Repeat REP is used only for program section repeats CALL LBL 0 is not permitted Label O is only used to mark the end of a subprogram HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 207 il 7 3 m Section Repeats 7 3 Program Section Repeats Label LBL The beginning of a program section repeat is marked by the label LBL The end of a program section repeat is identified by CALL LBL n REPn BEGINIEGNES Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the end of the program section CALL LBL n REPn 2 Ihen the program section between the called LBL CALL LBL n REPn is repeated the number of times entered after REP 3 The TNC then resumes the part program after the last repetition Programming notes You can repeat a program
234. ing NC software numbers TNC 320 340 551 04 TNC 320 Programming Station 340 554 04 The machine tool builder adapts the usable features of the TNC to his machine by setting machine parameters Some of the functions described in this manual may therefore not be among the features provided by the TNC on your machine tool TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include Tool measurement with the TT Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the features of your machine Many machine manufacturers as well as HEIDENHAIN offer programming courses for the TNCs We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas with other TNC users All of the cycle functions touch probe cycles and fixed cycles are described in a separate manual Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this User s Manual ID 679 220 xx User s Manual for Cycle Programming Software options The TNC 320 features various software options that can be enabled by your machine tool builder Each option is to be enabled separately and contains the following respective functions Additional axis for 4 axes and open loop spindle Additional axis for 5 axes and open loop spindle Cylinder surface interpolation Cycles 27 28 and 29 Feed rate in mm min for rotary axes M116 Tilting the machining plane plane functions Cycle 19 and 3 D ROT sof
235. ing to an auxiliary point see Important positions for approach and departure on page 159 Traverse feed rate automatically calculated in TOOL CALL pause Move at the programmed feed rate unit of measure is mm min or 1 10 inch min With rotary axes the TNC interprets the feed rate in degrees min regardless of whether the program is written in mm or inch oe Define the feed per revolution units in mm rev or inch rev Caution In inch programs FU cannot be combined with M136 FU Define the tooth feed units in mm tooth or inch tooth The number of teeth must be defined in the tool table in the CUT column Ignore the dialog question FZ NO ENT End the dialog immediately Abort the dialog and erase the block DEL 0 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 3 2 Creating and Writing ee 3 2 Creating and Writing Mi orams Actual position capture The TNC enables you to transfer the current tool position into the program for example during E Positioning block programming E Cycle programming To transfer the correct position values proceed as follows Place the input box at the position in the block where you want to insert a position value Select the actual position capture function In the t soft key row the TNC displays the axes whose positions can be transferred gt Select the axis The TNC writes the current position of the selected axis into the active input box 84 Programming Fundamentals Fi
236. ion Danger to the workpiece and tool Gradient angles that you defined incrementally IAN are referenced to the direction of the last positioning block by the TNC Programs that contain incremental gradient angles and were created on an IITNC 530 or on earlier TNCs are not compatible Example NC blocks 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Ad 194 Programming Programming Contours il Circle center CC radius and direction of rotation in the FC FCT block The TNC calculates a circle center for free programmed arcs from the data you enter This makes it possible to program full circles in an FK program block If you wish to define the circle center in polar coordinates you must use FPOL not CC to define the pole FPOL is entered in Cartesian coordinates and remains in effect until the control encounters a block in which another FPOL is defined T O J O b Oo conventionally is then no longer valid as a pole or circle center for the new FK contour If you enter conventional polar coordinates that refer to a pole from a CC block you have defined previously then you must enter the pole again in a CC block after the FK contour ap A circle center that was calculated or programmed Circle center in Cartesian coordinates Circle center in polar coordinates RAJ be a Rotational direction of an arc DR DR Radius of an arc A Example NC blocks O O Q
237. ion for error messages Graphic support for the programming of cycles Comment blocks in the NC program Plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Magnification of details Graphic simulation of real time machining in plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Display of the current machining time in the Program Run modes nominal position to continue machining 449 16 3 Technical Information 16 3 Technical Information Datum tables Touch probe cycles Components Program memory Input resolution and display step Input range Interpolation Block processing time 3 D straight line without radius compensation Axis feedback control Range of traverse Spindle speed Error compensation Data interfaces Ambient temperature 450 Multiple datum tables for storing workpiece related datums Calibrate touch probe Compensation of workpiece misalignment manual or automatic Datum setting manual or automatic Automatic workpiece measurement Cycles for automatic tool measurement Main computer with TNC keyboard and integrated 15 1 inch TFT color flat panel display with soft keys 300 MB on compact flash memory card CFR Up to 0 1 um for linear axes Up to 0 0001 for angular axes Maximum 999 999 999 mm or 999 999 999 Linear in 4 axes Circular in 2 axes Circular in 3 axes with tilted working plane Software option 1 Helical superimposition of circular and straight paths 6 ms 3 D stra
238. ion values 358 Manual Operation and Setup il Workpiece presetting with axis keys Fragile workpiece If the workpiece surface must not be scratched you can lay a metal shim of known thickness d on it Then enter a tool axis datum value that is larger than the desired datum by the value d ey Select the Manual Operation mode x Y Move the tool slowly until it touches scratches the workpiece surface z Select the axis Zero tool in spindle axis Set the display to a known workpiece position here 0 or enter the thickness d of the shim In the tool axis offset the tool radius Repeat the process for the remaining axes If you are using a preset tool set the display of the tool axis to the length L of the tool or enter the sum Z L d The TNC automatically saves the datum set with the axis keys in line O of the preset table HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 thout a 3 D Touch Probe ing wi E T Y 12 4 j il thout a 3 D Touch Probe ing wi E T V z 12 4 Datum management with the preset table You should definitely use the preset table if Your machine is equipped with rotary axes tilting table or swivel head and you work with the function for tilting the working plane Your machine is equipped with a spindle head changing system Up to now you have been working with older TNC controls with REF based datum tables You wish to machine identical workpieces th
239. is thus described through two coordinates and a position in space through three coordinates Coordinates that are referenced to the datum are referred to as absolute coordinates Relative coordinates are referenced to any other known position reference point you define within the coordinate system Relative coordinate values are also referred to as Incremental coordinate values 74 lt Programming Fundamentals File Management Reference system on milling machines When using a milling machine you orient tool movements to the Cartesian coordinate system The illustration at right shows how the Cartesian coordinate system describes the machine axes The figure illustrates the right hand rule for remembering the three axis directions the middle finger points in the positive direction of the tool axis from the workpiece toward the tool the Z axis the thumb points in the positive X direction and the index finger in the positive Y direction The TNC 320 can control up to 5 axes optionally The axes U V and W are secondary linear axes parallel to the main axes X Y and Z respectively Rotary axes are designated as A B and C The illustration at lower right shows the assignment of secondary axes and rotary axes to the main axes Designation of the axes on milling machines The X Y and Z axes on your milling machine are also referred to as tool axis principal axis 1st axis and minor axis 2nd axis The assignment of the
240. ition at which the program run was interrupted When a program run is interrupted the TNC stores The data of the last defined tool Active coordinate transformations e g datum shift rotation mirroring The coordinates of the circle center that was last defined Note that the stored data remain active until they are reset e g If you select a new program The stored data are used for returning the tool to the contour after manual machine axis positioning during an interruption RESTORE POSITION soft key Resuming program run with the START button You can resume program run by pressing the machine START button if the program was interrupted in one of the following ways The machine STOP button was pressed Programmed interruption Resuming program run after an error If the error message is not blinking Remove the cause of the error To clear the error message from the screen press the CE key Restart the program or resume program run where It was interrupted If the error message is blinking Press and hold the END key for two seconds This induces a TNC system restart Remove the cause of the error Start again If you cannot correct the error write down the error message and contact your repair service agency HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 14 5 Program Run o il 14 5 Program Run Mid program startup block scan The RESTORE POS AT N feature must be enabled and Ci adapted by the machine tool builder Re
241. itive helo system TNCguide was introduced see Calling the TNCguide on page 126 The FUNCTION PARAX function for defining the behavior of the parallel axes U V and W was introduced see Working with the Parallel Axes U V and W on page 317 The conversational languages Estonian Korean Latvian Norwegian Romanian Slovak and Turkish were introduced see Parameter list on page 440 Individual characters can now be deleted by using the backspace key see Coordinate axes and numbers Entering and editing on page 3 The PATTERN DEF function for defining point patterns was introduced see User s Manual for Cycles The SEL PATTERN function makes It possible to select point tables see User s Manual for Cycles With the CYCL CALL PAT function cycles can now be run in connection with point tables see User s Manual for Cycles The DECLARE CONTOUR function can now also define the depth of the contour see User s Manual for Cycles New Cycle 241 for Single Fluted Deep Hole Drilling was introduced see User s Manual for Cycles The new fixed cycles 251 to 257 were introduced for milling pockets studs and slots see User s Manual for Cycles Touch probe cycle 416 Datum on Circle Center was expanded by parameter Q320 safety clearance see User s Manual for Cycles Touch probe cycles 412 413 421 and 422 Additional parameter Q365 type of traverse see User s Manual for Cycles Touch probe cycle 425 Measure Slot
242. itoring off 1 probe monitoring on Block scan active 1 yes 0 no Search phase Number of the last FN14 error Real execution active 1 execution 2 simulation tt Additional Functions j i EE Additional Functions FN 19 PLC Transfer values to the PLC The function FN 19 PLC transfers up to two numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC Increments and units 0 1 um or 0 0001 Example Transfer the numerical value 10 which means 1 um or 0 001 to the PLC 254 Programming Q Parameters il FN 20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization This function may only be used with the permission of your machine tool builder With function FN 20 WAIT FOR you can synchronize the NC and PLC with each other during a program run The NC stops machining until the condition that you have programmed in the FN 20 block is fulfilled The TNC can check the following PLC operands Marker N O to 4999 Inout I O to 31 128 to 152 64 to 126 first PL 401 B 192 to 254 second PL 401 B Output 0 O to 30 32 to 62 first PL 401 B 64 to 94 second PL 401 B Counter C 48 to 79 Timer ING O to 95 Byte B O to 4095 Word W O to 2047 Double word D 2048 to 4095 The TNC 320 uses an extended interface for communication between the PLC and NC This is a new symbolic Application Programmer Interface API The familiar previous PLC NC interface is also available and can be used if desired The machine tool builder decides
243. its character Type of parity checking EVEN Number of stop bits 1 stop bit Specify type of handshake Alo Ch File system for file operations FE1 Setting the operating mode of the external device fileSystem and Transfer directory are not available in the FE2 and The functions Transfer all files Transfer selected file FEX modes PC with HEIDENHAIN data transfer LSV2 software TNCremoNT Non HEIDENHAIN devices suchas FEX printers scanners punchers PC without TNCremoNT HEIDENHAIN floppy disk units FE1 n 424 MOD Functions il Software for data transfer For transfer of files to and from the TNC we recommend using the HEIDENHAIN TNCremo data transfer software With TNCremo data transfer is possible with all HEIDENHAIN controls via the serial interface or the Ethernet interface charge from the HEIDENHAIN Filebase www heidenhain de lt Services and Documentation gt lt Software gt lt PC Software gt lt INCremoNT gt You can download the current version of TNCremo free of System requirements for TNCremo PC with 486 processor or higher Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Vista operating system 16 MB RAM 5 MB free memory space on your hard disk An available serial interface or connection to the TCP IP network Installation under Windows Start the SETUP EXE installation program with the File Manager Explorer Follow the setup
244. k parity 423 Setting the stop bits stopBits 423 Setting the handshake flowControl 423 Settings for data transfer with the TNCserver PC software 424 Setting the operating mode of the external device fileSystem 424 Software for data transfer 425 15 5 Ethernet Interface 427 Introduction 427 Connection possibilities 427 Connecting the control to the network 428 15 6 Position Display Types 433 Application 433 15 7 Unit of Measurement 434 Application 434 15 8 Displaying Operating Times 435 Application 435 30 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters 438 Application A38 16 2 Pin Layouts and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces 446 RS 232 C V 24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices 446 Non HEIDENHAIN devices 447 Ethernet interface RJ45 socket 447 16 3 Technical Information 448 16 4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery 453 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 31 il 1 1 Overview This chapter is intended to helo TNC beginners quickly learn to handle the most important procedures For more information on a respective topic see the section referred to in the text The following topics are included in this chapter Machine Switch On Programming the First Part Graphically Testing the Program Setting Up Tools Workpiece Setup Running the First Program 34 First Steps with the TNC 320 il 1 2 Machin
245. k il 5 2 Tool Data 5 2 Tool Data Requirements for tool compensation You usually program the coordinates of path contours as they are dimensioned in the workpiece drawing To allow the TNC to calculate the tool center path i e the tool compensation you must also enter the length and radius of each tool you are using Tool data can be entered either directly in the part program with TOOL DEF or separately in a tool table In a tool table you can also enter additional data for the specific tool The TNC will consider all the data entered for the tool when executing the part program Tool numbers and tool names Each tool is identified by a number between 0 and 32767 If you are working with tool tables you can also enter a tool name for each tool Tool names can have up to 16 characters The tool number O is automatically defined as the zero tool with the length L 0 and the radius R 0 In tool tables tool TO should also be defined with L 0 and R 0 Tool length L You should always enter the tool length L as an absolute value based on the tool reference point The entire tool length is essential for the TNC in order to perform numerous functions Involving multi axis machining Tool radius R You can enter the tool radius R directly 134 L1 ES L2 Programming Tools il Delta values for lengths and radii Delta values are offsets in the length and radius of a tool A positive delta value describes a to
246. king plane rotation In addition the columns A to W can be used to define datums in the rotary and parallel axes Rotary axis offsets defined by machine parameters do not influence the axis positions that were defined in the Tilt working plane function MP7500 bit 3 defines whether the current rotary axis position referenced to the machine datum Is taken into account or whether a position of 0 is assumed for the first rotary axis usually the C axis i il Handling of preset table Editing the preset table in the Programming mode of operation Preset tables that depend on the range of traverse Entry of comment in DOC column Definition of feed rate limitation Possible Not available Via online keyboard Feed rate limitation can be defined separately for linear and rotary axes Comparison Differences in Manual Operation operation Character set for POSITION screen layout Capturing the position values from mechanical probes Exiting the touch probe functions menu Exiting the preset table Multiple editing of tool table TOOL T or pocket table tool_p tch 486 Small position display Actual position capture by soft key Only via the END soft key Only via the BACK END soft keys Soft key row that was last active before exiting IS active Not possible Available Via ASCII keyboard Only one feed rate limitation can be defined for linear and rotary axes Large position display Actual p
247. l axis direction M140 309 Suppressing touch probe monitoring M141 310 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 311 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 23 il 10 1 Overview of Special Functions 314 Main menu for SPEC FCT special functions 314 Program defaults menu 315 Functions for contour and point machining menu 315 Menu of various conversational functions 316 10 2 Working with the Parallel Axes U V and W 317 Overview 317 FUNCTION PARAXCOMP DISPLAY 318 FUNCTION PARAXCOMP MOVE 319 FUNCTION PARAXCOMP OFF 320 FUNCTION PARAXMODE 321 FUNCTION PARAXMODE OFF 322 24 11 1 Functions for Multiple Axis Machining 324 11 2 The PLANE Function Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 S20 Introduction 325 Define the PLANE function 327 Position display O27 Reset the PLANE function 328 Defining the machining plane with space angles PLANE SPATIAL 329 Defining the machining plane with projection angles PROJECTED PLANE 331 Defining the machining plane with Euler angles EULER PLANE 333 Defining the machining plane with two vectors VECTOR PLANE 335 Defining the machining plane via three points POINTS PLANE 337 Defining the machining plane with a single incremental space angle PLANE RELATIVE 339 Tilting the working plane through axis angle PLANE AXIAL FCL 3 function 340 Sp
248. l calculate the tool path for a tool radius of 0 mm and a radius compensation RR The radius compensation is necessary to set the direction of contour approach and departure in the APPR DEP LN and APPR DEP CT functions In addition you must program both coordinates in the working plane in the first traverse block after APPR 6 3 Contour Appro 160 Programming Programming Contours il Approaching on a straight line with tangential connection APPR LT The tool moves on a straight line trom the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first contour point Pa on a Straight line that connects tangentially to the contour The auxiliary point Py is separated trom the first contour point Pa by the distance m gt Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps gt Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LT soft key APPR LT gt Coordinates of the first contour point Pa te gt LEN Distance from the auxiliary point Py to the first contour point Pa Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks Approaching on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour point APPR LN The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first contour point Pa on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour element The auxiliary point Py is separated by the distance LEN plus the tool radius from the first contour poi
249. l to Py in the working plane and then move it to the entered height in the tool axis APPR Approach 6 3 Contour Approa DEP Departure L Line C Circle T Tangential smooth connection N Normal perpendicular When moving from the present position to the auxiliary point Py the TNC does not check whether the programmed contour will be damaged Use the test graphics to check With the APPR LT APPR LN and APPR CT functions the TNC moves the tool from the present position to the auxiliary point Py at the feed rate that was last programmed With the APPR LCT function the TNC moves to the auxiliary point Py at the feed rate programmed with the APPR block If no feed rate is programmed before the approach block the TNC generates an error message HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 159 il Polar coordinates You can also program the contour points for the following approach departure functions over polar coordinates APPR LT becomes APPR PLT APPR LN becomes APPR PLN APPR CT becomes APPR PCT APPR LCT becomes APPR PLCT DEP LCT becomes DEP PLCT Select by soft key an approach or departure function then press the orange P key ch and Departure Radius compensation The tool radius compensation is programmed together with the first contour point Pa in the APPR block The DEP blocks automatically discard the tool radius compensation Contour approach without radius compensation If you program the APPR block with RO the TNC wil
250. l with the length L 0 Caution Danger of collision If you cancel a positive length compensation with TOOL CALL 0 the distance between tool and workpiece will be reduced After TOOL CALL the path of the tool in the spindle axis as entered in the part program is adjusted by the difference between the length of the previous tool and that of the new one For tool length compensation the control takes the delta values from both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account Compensation value L DLto oL caLL DETAg Where L is the tool length L from the TOOL DEF block or tool table DL TOOL CALL is the oversize for length DL in the TOOL CALL 0 block not taken into account by the position display DL tap is the oversize for length DL in the tool table 146 Programming Tools il Tool radius compensation The NC block for programming a tool movement contains RL or RR for radius compensation R or R for radius compensation in single axis movements RO if there is no radius compensation Radius compensation becomes effective as soon as a tool is called and is moved with a straight line block in the working plane with RL or RR S The TNC automatically cancels radius compensation if yOu program a Straight line block with RO depart the contour with the DEP function program a PGM CALL select a new program with PGM MGT For radius compensation the TNC takes the delta values from both the TOOL CALL block an
251. lative to block N Polar coordinates relative to block N a apa NE Rx N RY N Example NC blocks 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Ad 98 Programming Programming Contours il Data relative to block N Direction and distance of the contour element Angle between a straight line and another element or between the entry tangent of the arc and another element Straight line parallel to another contour element T O J O b Nm Oo Distance from a Straight line to a parallel contour T x lt D O 09 Z O O O O 2A D Data relative to block N Circle center CC O oes O Oo hom 0 OD gt D lt O hom O Oo om 0 hom O Par c Oo Q S LL xX LL l N dm O Par c o Q os re 0 Cartesian coordinates of the circle center relative to block N Polar coordinates of the circle center relative to block N Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 199 il ing Features Software Option Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection FK contour section Program all known data for each contour element Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 6 6
252. lay CompactFlash memory card 300 MB 6ms Yes No 4 axes 3 axes Yes No Compact in operating panel 18 maximum 0 1 um 0 0001 15 1 inch TFT color flat panel display optional 19 inch TFT Hard disk 25 GB 3 6 ms MC 420 0 5 ms MC 422 C Yes Option 5 axes 3 axes Yes Yes option with MC 420 Modular in electrical cabinet XI XJ X X j il Comparison Accessories Machine operating panel MB 420 MB 620 HSCI Electronic handwheels HR 410 HR 420 HR 520 530 550 HR 130 HR 150 via HRA 110 Touch probes TS 220 TS 440 TS 444 TS 449 TT 449 TS 640 TS 740 TT 1380 TT 140 Industrial PC IPC 61xx Comparison PC software Programming station software TNCremoNT for data transfer with TNCbackup for data backup TNCremoPlus data transfer software with live screen RemoTools SDK 1 2 Function library for developing your own applications for communicating with HEIDENHAIN controls virtualTNC Control component for virtual machines ConfigDesign Software for configuring the control 464 Available Available Available Limited functionality available Not available Available X X X XxX X X Available Available Available Available Available Not available X X X X X X X XXX X X Comparison Machine specific functions Switching the traverse range Function not available Available function Central drive 1 motor for
253. lays the following soft keys FN 9 IF EQUAL JUMP me Example FN 9 IF Q1 EQU Q3 GOTO LBL UPCAN25 goTo If the two values or parameters are equal jump to the given label FN 10 IF UNEQUAL JUMP co Example FN 10 IF 10 NE Q5 GOTO LBL 10 GoTo If the two values or parameters are unequal jump to the given label FN 11 IF GREATER JUMP ma Example FN 11 IF Q1 GT 10 GOTO LBL 5 GOTO If the first value or parameter is greater than the second jump to the given label FN 12 IF LESS JUMP Example FN 12 IF Q5 LT 0 GOTO LBL ANYNAME GoTo If the first value or parameter is less than the second jump to the given label 232 Programming Q Parameters il Abbreviations used IF l If EQU Equal NE Not equal GT Greater than LT s Less than GOTO Go to HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 th Q Parameters ions WI 8 6 If Then i j il The TNC opens a pop up window in which you can enter the desired range for display of the Q parameters or string parameters 9 8 7 Checking and Changing Q Parameters oc Procedure Som oO You can check Q parameters when writing testing and running Program run Programming programs in all operating modes and except in the test run edit them EX4 H O If you are in a program run interrupt it if required for example by 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X50 Veie0 Z ua D pressing the machine STOP button and the INTERNAL STOP soft 5 SSTARTING ANGLE o am key If you are in a test run interru
254. le center The tool does not move to this position The circle center is also the pole for polar coordinates Programming Programming Contours il Circular path C around circle center CC Before programming a circular arc you must first enter the circle center CC The last programmed tool position will be the starting point of the arc Move the tool to the circle starting point Enter the coordinates of the circle center Enter the coordinates of the arc end point and if necessary Direction of rotation DR Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M working plane If you program circular arcs that do not lie in the active working plane for example C Z X DR with a tool axis Z and at the same time rotate this movement then the TNC moves the tool in a spatial arc which means a circular arc in 3 axes S The TNC normally makes circular movements in the active Example NC blocks Full circle For the end point enter the same point that you used for the starting point The starting and end points of the arc must lie on the circle Input tolerance up to 0 016 mm selected through the circleDeviation machine parameter Smallest possible circle that the TNC can traverse 0 0016 um HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 6 4 Path vontours Caesien Coordinates k i 6 4 Path contours c Mlsian Coordinates Circular path CR with defined radius The tool moves on a circular path with the radi
255. le Management il Editing a program You cannot edit a program while it is being run by the TNC in a machine operating mode While you are creating or editing a part program you can select any desired line in the program or individual words in a block with the arrow keys or the soft keys Go to previous page PA Qo E Go to next page v D Qo m o m o H zZ Go to beginning of program Go to end of program m Change the position of the current block on the screen Press this soft key to display additional program blocks that are programmed before the current block Change the position of the current block on the screen Press this soft key to display additional program blocks that are programmed after the current block Move from one block to the next Select individual words in a block To selecta certain block press the GOTO key enter the desired block number and confirm with the ENT key Or Enter any number and press the N LINES soft key to jump up or down the entered number of lines HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 O O O J Sem Q N ap 3 2 Creating and Writing Pe grams Set the selected word to zero Erase an incorrect number Clear a non blinking error message Delete the selected word NO Pal Delete the selected block DEL O Erase cycles and program sections DEL O Insert the block that you last edited or INSERT de
256. lect the function for checking a string parameter Enter the number of the QS parameter in which the text to be searched for is saved Confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the OS parameter to be searched and confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the place starting from which the TNC is to search the substring and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Remember that the first character of a text sequence starts internally with the zeroth place If the TNC cannot find the required substring it will save the total length of the string to be searched counting starts at 1 in the result parameter If the substring is found in more than one place the TNC returns the first place at which it finds the substring Example Search through QS10 for the text saved in parameter QS13 Begin the search at the third place HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 11 String Parameters k il m 8 11 String Parameters Finding the length of a string parameter The STRLEN function returns the length of the text saved in a selectable string parameter FORMULA STRLEN Select Q parameter functions Select the FORMULA function Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the ascertained string length Confirm with the ENT key Shift the soft key row Select the function for finding the text length of a string parameter Enter the numbe
257. leted Ea Inserting blocks at any desired location Select the block after which you want to insert a new block and initiate the dialog Editing and inserting words Select a word in a block and overwrite it with the new one The plain language dialog is available while the word is highlighted To accept the change press the END key If you want to insert a word press the horizontal arrow key repeatedly until the desired dialog appears You can then enter the desired value 86 Programming Fundamentals File Management il Looking for the same words in different blocks To use this function set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF To select a word in a block press the arrow keys repeatedly until the highlight is on the desired word Select a block with the arrow keys The word that is highlighted in the new block is the same as the one you selected previously TNC shows a progress display window You then have the option of canceling the search via soft key If you have started a search in a very long program the Finding any text To select the search function press the FIND soft key The TNC displays the Find text dialog prompt Enter the text that you wish to find To find the text press the EXECUTE soft key O O J Sem Q N ap HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 87 il 3 2 Creating and Writing Pe grams Marking copying deleting and inserting program sections The
258. light to the file you wish to rename RENAME eec bv File sorting Select the renaming function Enter the new file name the file type cannot be changed To rename Press the OK soft key or the ENT key Select the folder in which you wish to sort the files SORT 104 Select the SORT soft key Select the soft key with the corresponding display criterion Programming Fundamentals File Management il Additional functions Protecting a file Canceling file protection Move the highlight to the file you want to protect re To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS soft key PROTECT To activate file protection press the PROTECT soft a key The file now has status P UNPROTECT To cancel file protection press the UNPROTECT soft ia key Select the editor Move the highlight in the right window onto the file you want to open T To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key eF To select the editor with which to open the selected EDITOR file press the SELECT EDITOR soft key Mark the desired editor Press the OK soft key to open the file Connecting removing a USB device Move the highlight to the left window pE To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Shift the soft key row Search for a USB device In order to remove the USB device move the cursor to the USB device Remove the USB device tN LA
259. ling factor factors Cycles 11 26 The TNC displays an active scaling factor in up to 6 axes Scaling datum For further information refer to the User s Manual for Cycles Coordinate Transformation Cycles 70 Introduction 2 5 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Function software option With the various HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probe systems you can Automatically align workpieces Quickly and precisely set datums Measure the workpiece during program run Measure and inspect tools User s Manual for Cycle Programming Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this User s Manual ID 679 220 xx All of the touch probe functions are described in the TS 220 TS 640 and TS 440 touch trigger probes These touch probes are particularly effective for automatic workpiece alignment datum setting and workpiece measurement The TS 220 transmits the triggering signals to the TNC via cable and is a cost effective alternative for applications where digitizing is not frequently required The TS 640 see figure and the smaller TS 440 feature infrared transmission of the triggering signal to the TNC This makes them highly convenient for use on machines with automatic tool changers Principle of operation HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes feature a wear resisting optical switch that generates an electrical signal as soon as the stylus is deflected This sig
260. ling machines 75 Designation of the axes on milling machines 75 Polar coordinates 76 Absolute and incremental workpiece positions 77 Setting the datum 78 3 2 Creating and Writing Programs 79 Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN Conversational 79 Define the blank BLK FORM 79 Creating a new part program 80 Programming tool movements in conversational format 82 Actual position capture 84 Editing a program 85 The TNC search function 89 Data backup 92 3 4 Working with the File Manager 93 Directories 93 Paths 93 Overview Functions of the file manager 94 Calling the file manager 95 Selecting drives directories and files 96 Creating a new directory 98 Creating a new file 98 Copying a single file 99 Copying files into another directory 100 Copying a directory 100 Choosing one of the last files selected 101 Deleting a file 101 Deleting a directory 102 Tagging Tiles 103 Renaming a file 104 File sorting 104 Additional functions 105 Data transfer to or from an external data medium 106 The TNC in a network 108 USB devices on the TNC FCL 2 function 109 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 15 il 4 1 Screen Keyboard 112 Enter the text with the screen keyboard 112 4 2 Adding Comments 113 Function 113 Entering a comment in a
261. lized input is not necessary The TNC calculates the normal so you can enter values between 9 999999 and 9 999999 The base vector required for the definition of the machining plane is defined by the components BX BY and BZ see figure at right The normal vector is defined by the components NX NY and NZ The base vector defines the direction of the X axis In the tilted machining plane and the normal vector determines the direction of the tool axis and at the same time is perpendicular to it Before programming note the following The TNC calculates standardized vectors from the values you enter Parameter description for the positioning behavior See Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 342 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function j il orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function Input parameters X component of base vector X component BX of the By base vector B see figure at top right Inout range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 Y component of base vector Y component BY of the base vector B see figure at top right Inout range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 Z component of base vector Z component BZ of the base vector B see figure at top right Inout range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 X component of normal vector X component NX of the normal vector N see figure at center right
262. logs You can assign a linear sequence of characters letters numbers special characters and spaces up to a length of 256 characters to a string parameter You can also check and process the assigned or imported values by using the functions described below As in Q parameter programming you can use a total of 2000 OS parameters see also Principle and Overview on page 222 The STRING FORMULA and FORMULA O parameter functions contain various functions for processing the string parameters Assigning string parameters Page 274 Chain linking string parameters Page 274 Converting a numerical value to a string Page 276 parameter Copying a substring from a string Page 277 parameter Converting a string parameter to a ee Page 278 numerical value Checking a string parameter lt lt Page 279 Finding the length of a string parameter aon Page 280 Comparing alphabetic priority ae Page 281 arithmetic operation is always a string When you use the FORMULA function the result of the arithmetic operation is always a numeric value When you use a STRING FORMULA the result of the HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 11 String Parameters C il 8 11 String Parameters Assigning string parameters You have to assign a String variable before you use it Use the DECLARE STRING command to do so Show the soft key row with special functions FCT Ea Select the menu for defining various plain language OSTIN functions STRIN
263. lue Effect M94 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M94 becomes effective at the start of block Programming Multiple Axis Machining il 12 1 Switch On Switch Off 12 1 Switch On Switch Off Switch on depending on the machine tool Refer to your machine D Switch on and crossing over the reference points can vary tool manual Switch on the power supply for control and machine The TNC then displays the following dialog TNC is started TNC message that the power was interrupted clear the message The PLC program of the TNC is compiled automatically Switch on external dc voltage The TNC checks the functioning of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit Cross the reference points manually in the displayed sequence For each axis press the machine START button or x Cross the reference points in any sequence Press and hold the machine axis direction button for each axis until the reference point has been traversed can leave out crossing the reference marks In such a case the TNC is ready for operation immediately after the machine control voltage is switched on D If your machine is equipped with absolute encoders you 350 Manual Operation and Setup il The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 12 1 Switch On Switch Off i i 12 1 Switch On Switch Off Crossing the reference point in a tilted working
264. m Measuring position not allowed HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 tt Additional Functions k il EE Additional Functions 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 240 Kinematic access not possible Meas pos not in traverse range Preset compensation not possible Tool radius too large Plunging type is not possible Plunge angle incorrectly defined Angular length is undefined Slot width is too large Scaling factors not equal Tool data inconsistent Programming Q Parameters il FN 16 F PRINT Formatted output of text and Q parameter values messages from the NC program Such messages are With FN 16 you can also output to the screen any displayed by the TNC in a pop up window The function FN 16 F PRINT transfers Q parameter values and texts in a selectable format through the data interface for example to a printer If you save the values internally or send them to a computer the TNC saves the data in the file that you defined in the FN 16 block To output the formatted texts and Q parameter values create a text file with the TNC s text editor In this file you then define the output format and O parameters you want to output Example of a text file to define the output format TEST RECORD IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY DATE 2d 2d 4d DAY MONTH YEAR4 TIME 2d 2d 2d HOUR MIN SEC NO OF MEASURED VALUES 1 X1 9 3LF Q31 Y1 49 3LF Q32 Z1 9 3LF Q33
265. meter values 241 FN 18 SYS DATUM READ Read system data 245 FN 19 PLC Transfer values to the PLC 254 FN 20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization 255 FN29 PLC Transferring values to the PLC 256 PINS 7 EXPORT sie 257 8 9 Accessing Tables with SOL Commands 258 Introduction 258 A Transaction 259 Programming SOL commands 261 Overview of the soft keys 261 SOL BIND 262 SOL SELECT ics 263 SOL FETCH sca 266 SOL UPDATE 267 SOL INSERT 267 SOL COMMIT 268 SOL ROLLBACK 268 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 21 il 8 10 Entering Formulas Directly 269 Entering formulas 269 Rules for formulas 27 Programming example 272 8 11 String Parameters 273 String processing functions 273 Assigning string parameters 2 4 Chain linking string parameters 2795 Converting a numerical value to a string parameter 276 Copying a substring from a string parameter 277 Converting a string parameter to a numerical value 278 Checking a string parameter 279 Finding the length of a string parameter 280 Comparing alphabetic priority 281 8 12 Preassigned Q Parameters 282 Values from the PLC Q100 to Q107 282 Active tool radius Q108 282 Tool axis Q109 283 Spindle status Q110 283 Coolant on off Q111 283 Overlap factor Q112 283 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the
266. milling Ruled surface Face milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Option 08 Option 08 Option 08 X XI XI X X XIXI X X X XI X X XI X X X X X OK X X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X X option 09 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X X XI XI X X X X X X X XI X X X X X X X X X i il 240 241 247 Zale 252 253 254 256 257 262 263 264 265 267 270 474 Centering Single lip deep hole drilling Datum setting Rectangular pocket complete Circular pocket complete Slot complete Circular slot complete Rectangular stud complete Circular stud complete Thread milling Thread milling countersinking Thread drilling milling Helical thread drilling milling Outside thread milling Contour train data for defining the behavior of Cycle 25 X KX KL XI X X X X X X X X X X XI XIXI X X XI X X X X XI X X XI X Comparison Miscellaneous functions M00 M01 M02 M03 M05 M06 M08 M09 M13 M14 M30 M89 M90 M91 M92 M94 M97 M98 M99 M101 M102 M103 M104 M105 M106 M107 M108 Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Optional program STOP STOP program run Spindle STOP Coolant OFF CLEAR status display depending on machine parameter Go to block 1 Spindle ON clockwise Spindle ON counterclockwise Spindle STOP Tool change STOP program run machine d
267. ming remains active until you define a new one using FPOL Free programming of straight lines Straight line without tangential connection To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key FL To initiate the dialog for free programming of straight lt i lines press the FL soft key The TNC displays additional soft keys Enter all known data in the block by using these soft keys The FK graphic displays the programmed contour element in red until sufficient data is entered If the entered data describes several solutions the graphic will display the contour element in green see Graphics during FK programming page 189 Straight line with tangential connection If the straight line connects tangentially to another contour element initiate the dialog with the FLT soft key To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key FLT To initiate the dialog press the FLT soft key Enter all known data in the block by using the soft keys HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 O z cO D o S W A 36 Featu 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Adva j il 2 Free programming of circular arcs Circular arc without tangential connection To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key DE 7 i gt To initiate the dialog for free programming of circular arcs press the FC soft key The TNC displays soft keys with which you can
268. mpossible jumps E Violation of the machine s working space The following functions are also available Blockwise test run E Interrupt test at any block E Optional block skip Functions for graphic simulation Measuring the machining time E Additional status display HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 403 il 14 4 Test Run Running a program test If the central tool file is active a tool table must be active status S to run a program test Select a tool table via the file manager PGM MGT in the Test Run mode of operation With the BLANK IN WORK SPACE function you activate work space monitoring for the test run see Show the Workpiece in the Working Space Advanced Graphic Features Software Option page 401 Select the Test Run operating mode Call the file manager with the PGM MGT key and select the file you wish to test or Go to the program beginning Select line O with the GOTO key and confirm your entry with the ENT key The TNC then displays the following soft keys Reset the blank form and test the entire program RESET Test the entire program fee Test each program block individually START Halt program test soft key only appears once you have me started the program test You can interrupt the program test and continue it again at any point even within a machining cycle In order to continue the test the following actions must not be performed Selecting another block with the arrow keys or the
269. n e workpiece alignment e datum setting e workpiece measurement e digitizing 3 D surfaces with the workpiece touch probes TS 220 with cable TS 640 with infrared transmission e tool measurement e wear monitoring e tool breakage monitoring with the tool touch probe TT 140 679 222 20 Ver00 SWO4 1 9 2009 FW Printed in Germany ACCA AA UA OA AANT
270. n language in MDI mode ISO Program entry in DIN ISO in MDI mode Display of cycles TNC_STD Display cycles with comments TNC_PARAM Display cycles without comments HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 441 il DisplaySettings NC and PLC conversational language settings NC conversational language ENGLISH GERMAN CZECH FRENCH ITALIAN SPANISH PORTUGUESE SWEDISH DANISH FINNISH DUTCH POLISH HUNGARIAN RUSSIAN CHINESE CHINESE TRAD SLOVENIAN ESTONIAN KOREAN LATVIAN NORWEGIAN ROMANIAN SLOVAK TURKISH LITHUANIAN PLC conversational language See NC conversational language Language for PLC error messages 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters See NC conversational language Language for online help See NC conversational language DisplaySettings Behavior during control startup Acknowledge the Power interrupted message TRUE Start up of the control is not continued until the message has been acknowledged FALSE The Power interrupted message does not appear Display of cycles TNC_STD Display cycles with comments TNC_PARAM Display cycles without comments 442 Tables and Overviews il ProbeSettings Configuration of probing behavior Manual operation Including basic rotation TRUE Including active basic rotation during probing FALSE Always move on paraxial path during probing Automatic mode Multiple measurements in probing functions 1 to 3 Probings per probing process Automatic mode Confidence interval of multiple meas
271. nal is transmitted to the control which stores the current position of the stylus as an actual value HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic an 2 5 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Hand cis 2 5 Accessories TT 140 tool touch probe for tool measurement The TT 140 is a triggering 3 D touch probe for tool measurement and inspection Your TNC provides three cycles for this touch probe with which you can measure the tool length and radius automatically either with the spindle rotating or stopped The TT 140 features a particularly rugged design and a high degree of protection which make it insensitive to coolants and swarf The triggering signal is generated by a wear resistant and highly reliable optical switch HR electronic handwheels Electronic handwheels facilitate moving the axis slides precisely by hand A wide range of traverses per handwheel revolution is available Apart from the HR 130 and HR 150 integral handwheels HEIDENHAIN also offers the HR 410 portable handwheel 72 Introduction il 2 er 3 1 Fun 3 1 Fundamentals Position encoders and reference marks The machine axes are equipped with position encoders that register the positions of the machine table or tool Linear axes are usually equipped with linear encoders rotary tables and tilting axes with angle encoders When a machine axis moves the corresponding position encode
272. nce you delete directories they cannot be undeleted Move the highlight to the directory you want to delete DELETE 102 To select the erasing function press the DELETE soft key The TNC inquires whether you really intend to delete the directory and all its subdirectories and files To confirm press the OK soft key or To cancel deletion press the CANCEL soft key Programming Fundamentals File Management il Tagging files Tag a single file EA Tag all files in the directory Tas Untag a single file Ee Untag all files Bons Copy all tagged files COPY TAG py gg oo Some functions such as copying or erasing files can not only be used for individual files but also for several files at once To tag several files proceed as follows Move the highlight to the first file To display the tagging functions press the TAG soft key Tag a file by pressing the TAG FILE soft key n Move the highlight to the next file you wish to tag Only works via soft keys Do not use the arrow keys To tag further files press the TAG FILES soft key etc COPY TAG To copy the tagged files press the COPY TAG soft SS key or ae eE Delete the tagged files by pressing END to end the DX tagging function and then the DELETE soft key to delete the tagged files HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 th the AA iii ing wi 3 4 Work j il th the rila nager ing wi 3 4 Work Renaming a file Move the high
273. nction determines whether the coordinates are displayed in millimeters metric system or inches To select the metric system e g X 15 789 mm set the Change mm inches function to mm The value is displayed to 3 decimal places To select the inch system e g X 0 6216 inches set the Change mm inches function to inches The value is displayed to 4 decimal places If you would like to activate the inch display the TNC shows the feed rate in inch min In an inch program you must enter the feed rate larger by a factor of 10 434 MOD Functions il 15 8 Displaying Operating Times Application The MACHINE TIME soft key enables you to see various types of operating times Manual operation Programming Overview PGM LBL CYC M POS r NEE Opar ating ines 0 Control on Operating time of the control since being ee aaa e 5 485 260 put into service ae te aa 16 Time warten vor 36 51 48 Satna a l C 5 0 Machine on Operating time of the machine tool since a being put into service at amp Program run Duration of controll ration since bein e j eee REP ogra uration of controlled opera g A a a ae put INtO service F mm min Our 57 8 M5 O7 S LSied2 Se 57 F OVR time displays The machine tool manual provides further A The machine tool builder can provide further operating information HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 sT 4 x qv E DIAGNOSIS a POSITION
274. ne START button The rotation of the table corrects the misalignment 390 Positioning with Manual Data Input il Protecting and erasing programs in MDI The MDI file is generally intended for short programs that are only needed temporarily Nevertheless you can store a program if necessary by proceeding as described below Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation Press the PGM MGT key program management to call the file manager Mark the MDI file cory To select the file copying function press the COPY Eee soft key HOLE Enter the name under which you want to save the current contents of the MDI file Copy the file Press the END soft key to close the file manager For more information see Copying a single file page 99 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 13 1 Programming oj Executing Simple Machining Operations i i suoijei9doc Buluiyose j y ajdwisg buiynoexy pue Burwiweibold L EL Positioning with Manual Data Input il 392 ie d Ay ee Gl m mM Test Run and Program Run dvanced Graphic Features Software Option 14 1 Graphi 14 1 Graphics Advanced Graphic Features Software Option Application In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run mode the TNC provides the following three display modes Using soft keys select whether you desire Plan view Projection in three planes 3 D view The TNC graphic depicts the workpiece
275. ng Plane Software Option 1 Traversing the reference points in tilted axes The TNC automatically activates the tilted working plane if this function was enabled when the control was switched off Then the TNC moves the axes in the tilted coordinate system when an axis direction key is pressed Position the tool in such a way that a collision is excluded during the subsequent crossing of the reference points To cross the reference points you have to deactivate the Tilt Working Plane function see Activating manual tilting page 385 Danger of collision Be sure that the function for tilting the working plane is active in the Manual Operation mode and that the angle values entered in the menu match the actual angles of the tilted axis Deactivate the Tilt Working Plane function before you cross the reference points Take care that there is no collision Retract the tool from the current position first if necessary Position display in a tilted system The positions displayed in the status window ACTL and NOML are referenced to the tilted coordinate system Limitations on working with the tilting function The probing function for basic rotation is not available if you have activated the working plane function in the Manual Operation mode The actual position capture function is not allowed if the tilted working plane function is active PLC positioning determined by the machine tool builder is not possible 38
276. ng into a program neither the TNC nor the PLC will execute any functions that ensure a safe Start If you use the GOTO block number key for going into a subprogram the TNC will skip the end of the subprogram LBL 0 In such cases you must always use the mid program startup function HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 411 il Returning to the contour workpiece contour in the following situations With the RESTORE POSITION function the TNC returns to the 14 5 Program Run Return to the contour after the machine axes were moved during a program interruption that was not performed with the INTERNAL STOP function Return to the contour after a block scan with RESTORE POS ATN for example after an interruption with INTERNAL STOP Depending on the machine if the position of an axis has changed after the control loop has been opened during a program interruption To select a return to contour press the RESTORE POSITION soft key Restore machine status if required To move the axes in the sequence that the TNC suggests on the screen press the machine START button To move the axes in any sequence press the soft keys RESTORE X RESTORE Z etc and activate each axis with the machine START key To resume machining press the machine START key 412 its h Mid program startup in full sequence rosannins actL fl o kR T 3 z 6 139 600 80 000 Y 150 000 E Z 7 500 E 0 000 S 94 680 isll XYZ ns E KYZ eaa
277. ng system This means that deviations from the theoretical tool radius can be compensated Use LA Look Ahead after M120 to define the number of blocks maximum 99 that you want the TNC to calculate in advance Note that the larger the number of blocks you choose the higher the block processing time will be Input If you enter M120 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog for this block by asking you the number of blocks LA that are to be calculated in advance 306 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Effect M120 must be located in an NC block that also contains radius compensation RL or RR M120 is then effective from this block until radius compensation is canceled with RO M120 LAO is programmed or M120 is programmed without LA or another program is called with PGM CALL the working plane is tilted with Cycle 19 or the PLANE function M120 becomes effective at the start of block Restrictions After an external or internal stop you can only re enter the contour with the function RESTORE POS AT N Before you start the block scan you must cancel M120 otherwise the TNC will output an error message When using the path functions RND and CHF the blocks before and after RND or CHF must contain only coordinates in the working plane If you want to approach the contour on a tangential path you must use the function APPR LCT The block with APPR LCT must contain only coordinates of the working plan
278. ngths and radii 135 Entering tool data into the program 135 Entering tool data in the table 136 Pocket table for tool changer 142 Calling tool data 145 5 3 Tool Compensation 146 Introduction 146 Tool length compensation 146 Tool radius compensation 147 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 17 il 6 1 Tool Movements 152 Path functions 152 FK free contour programming Advanced programming features software option 152 Miscellaneous functions M 152 Subprograms and program section repeats 152 Programming with Q parameters 153 6 2 Fundamentals of Path Functions 154 Programming tool movements for workpiece machining 154 6 3 Contour Approach and Departure 158 Overview Types of paths for contour approach and departure 158 Important positions for approach and departure 159 Approaching on a straight line with tangential connection APPR LT 161 Approaching on a Straight line perpendicular to the first contour point APPR LN 161 Approaching on a circular path with tangential connection APPR CT 162 Approaching on a circular arc with tangential connection from a straight line to the contour APPR LCT 163 Departing on a straight line with tangential connection DEP LT 164 Departing on a straight line perpendicular to the last contour point DEP LN 164 Departure on a circular path with tangential connection DEP CT 165
279. not included in the read write processes If anew table row is generated with SQL INSERT the columns not bound to Q parameters are filled with default values 260 SOL Q5 SELECT Tabelle ABC Dateiver waltung SOL FETCH Q1 HANDLE Q 1234 Q5 Handle fur selektierte Daten SQL Server Programming Q Parameters Programming SQL commands This function can only be programmed if you have entered the code number 555343 Program SOL commands in the Programming mode Call the SQL functions by pressing the SQL soft key sal Select an SOL command via soft key see overview or press the SQL EXECUTE soft key and program the SOL command Overview of the soft keys SOL EXECUTE Program a Select command EXECUTE SQL BIND me Bind a Q parameter to a table column BIND SOL FETCH a Read table rows from the result set and save them In Q FETCH parameters SQL UPDATE ze Save data from the Q parameters in an existing table UPDATE row in the result set SOL INSERT Save data from the Q parameters in a new table row in INSERT the result set SOL COMMIT Transfer table rows from the result set into the table COMMIT and conclude the transaction SQL ROLLBACK If INDEX is not programmed Discard any changes insertions and conclude the transaction If INDEX is programmed The indexed row remains in the result set All other rows are deleted from the result set The transa
280. not activate the radius compensation gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX Miscellaneous function M Enter M2 to end the program and confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block Example NC blocks Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Define machining positions A 4 First Steps with the TNC 320 il 1 3 Programming the First T Further information on this topic E Creating a new program See Creating and Writing Programs on page 79 E Cycle programming See User s Manual for Cycles HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Define the cycle Spindle and coolant on call cycle Retract in the tool axis end program Oo Y N o S a o LL Kan Q hom g O eb S gt O lt T 0 mar N LL eb man re a j O ao g w q Opti 1 4 Graphically Testing the First Part Advanced Graphic Features Software Option Select the correct operating mode You can test programs only in the Test Run mode gt Press the operating modes key The TNC goes into i Me Test RUN TOGE Tove e L Z 10 R FMAX M3 L X 50 Y 50 R FMAX CYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING CYCL DEF 4 1 SE Further information on this topic GYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 19 Operating modes of the TNC See Operating Modes on page 60 2 Testing programs See Test Run on page 403
281. nsions with Q parameters Principle and Overview 222 Programming Q Parameters il Q parameters are designated by letters and a number between 0 and 1999 Parameters that take effect in different manners are available Please refer to the following table Freely applicable parameters as long as no overlapping with SL cycles can occur globally effective for all programs stored in the TNC memory Parameters for special TNC functions Parameters that are primarily used for cycles globally effective for all programs stored in the TNC memory Parameters that are primarily used for OEM cycles globally effective for all programs stored in the TNC memory This may require coordination with the machine manufacturer or Supplier Parameters that are primarily used for call active OEM cycles globally effective for all programs that are stored in the TNC memory Parameters that are primarily used for Def active OEM cycles globally effective for all programs that are stored in the TNC memory Freely applicable parameters globally effective for all programs stored in the TNC memory Q0 to Q99 Q100 to Q199 Q200 to Q1199 Q1200 to Q1399 Q1400 to 91499 Q1500 to Q1599 Q1600 to Q1999 QS parameters the S stands for string are also available on the TNC and enable you to process texts In principle the same ranges are available for QS parameters as for Q parameters see table above Note that for the QS parameters the
282. nt Pa Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LN soft key APPR LN gt Coordinates of the first contour point Pp dt Length Distance to the auxiliary point Py Always enter LEN as a positive value Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR distance Py to Pa LEN 15 End point of the first contour element Next contour element Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR End point of the first contour element Next contour element 161 Q lt ao gt O Pwr Oo Q fe ch and Departure 6 3 Contour Appro Approaching on a circular path with tangential connection APPR CT The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first contour point Pa following a circular arc that is tangential to the first contour element The arc from Py to Pa is determined through the radius R and the center angle CCA The direction of rotation of the circular arc is automatically derived from the tool path for the first contour element gt Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR CT soft key 7G gt Coordinates of the first contour point Pa gt Radius R of the circular arc
283. ntegrated Pocket Calculator Operation Program run full sequence The TNC features an integrated pocket calculator with the basic mathematical functions Programming 1GB h S Oo Pw amp 2 Q BEGIN PGM 1GB MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X Y 0 Z 40 2 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 Machine hole pattern ID 27943KL1 4 TOOL CALL 1 Z 4500 5 cCYCL DEF 262 THREAD MILLING Use the CALC key to show and hide the on line pocket calculator The calculator is operated with short commands through the alphabetic keyboard The commands are shown in a special color in Q335 10 NOMINAL DIAMETER Q239 1 5 gt THREAD PITCH Q201 18 DEPTH OF THREAD Q355 08 gt THREADS PER STEP Q253 750 F PRE Oe ee X z Q351 1 gt CLIMB OR UP the calculator window ar eS UP a m Q203 0 SURFACE COORI Q204 50 32ND SET UP CL Q207 500 FEED RATE FOF aS BaN eel elele EY E 6 L Z 100 R FMAX z E 7 TOOL CALL 1 Z 54500 8 L Z 100 R FMAX ane aan eee see 9 CYCL DEF 203 UNIVERSL DRII E Q200 2 3SET UP CLEARK yay sort 17x PI o Addition Q201 5 DEPTH Q2 6 250 FEED RATE FOk Q202 0 PLUNGING DEPTH Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Subtraction e ot Gees 3 Q213 0 3NR OF BREAKS H Q205 0 MIN PLUNGING DEPTH re Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH Multiplication Q208 500 RETRACTION FEED RATE Di
284. nter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Confirm with the ENT key Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Activate the radius compensation Contirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX Confirm the Miscellaneous function M with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block Preposition the tool in the working plane Press the orange X axis key and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 20 Press the orange Y axis key and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 20 Confirm with the ENT key Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX Confirm the Miscellaneous function M with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block Move the tool to workpiece depth Press the orange Y axis key and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 5 Confirm with the ENT key Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation Feed rate F Enter the positioning feed rate e g 3000 mm min and confirm with the ENT key Miscellaneous function M Switch on the spindle and coolant e g M13 Confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block 40 First Steps with the TNC 320 il Move to the contour P
285. oZ S IST 12 44 Bz 57 F OVR me 33 631 Y 72 542 2 9 999 C 0 000 S 94 680 Ea F Omm7min Ouvr 57 8 M5 SSS 2 RESTORE MANUAL INTERNAL POSITION TRAVERSE STOP Test Run and Program Run il 14 6 Automatic Program Start a Application P f 1 l Programming The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool bee fe ge ee rei gt F builder for use of the automatic program start function ETET o T O Refer to your machine manual pia Cee ANE UN Prnon jx 128 700 fe __ 0 080 ae Pa 20 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 0 9995 Z 7 500 A 22 CALL LBL 15 REPS is 2 s E uke a EMITT MODE 23 PLANE RESET SIou a S 24 LBL Caution Danger for the operator 25 END PGM STAT EE jza em am p teene _ AN Current time mA a ez q The autostart function must not be used on machines that o aa do not have an enclosed working space oe Eo 1 Autostart active No b 00 00 26 e In a Program Run operating mode you can use the AUTOSTART soft E 5 key see figure at upper right to define a specific time at which the z z0 000 S 55 365 z program that is currently active in this operating mode is to be started aay Sap ACTL 11 ekeQ mm min Our 57 8 M 5 a O q Show the window for entering the starting time see s EG figure at center right OK EXD CANCEL FIELD FIELD Time h min sec Time of day at which the program is to be started Dat
286. obe during probing you can manually initiate the trigger signal for capturing the probing position by pressing a key Proceed as follows PROBING POS ZZZ Select any touch probe function by soft key Move the mechanical probe to the first position to be captured by the TNC Confirm the position Press the actual position capture soft key for the TNC to save the current position Move the mechanical probe to the next position to be captured by the TNC Confirm the position Press the actual position capture soft key for the TNC to save the current position If required move to additional positions and capture as described previously Datum In the menu window enter the coordinates of the new datum confirm with the SET DATUM soft key or write the values to a table see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables page 368 or see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table page 369 To terminate the probe function press the END key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ion Software Option D Touch Probe Touch Probe Funct ing wi 12 8 Datum Sett i il 12 9 ritin Working Plane Software Option 1 12 9 Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 Application function the TNC and the machine tool by the machine tool builder With some swivel heads and tilting tables the machine tool builder determines whether the entered angles are interp
287. oft key or the key on SECTION the ASCII keyboard Enter the structuring text with the alphabetic keyboard If necessary change the structure depth with the soft key Selecting blocks in the program structure window If you are scrolling through the program structure window block by block the TNC at the same time automatically moves the corresponding NC blocks in the program window This way you can quickly skip large program sections HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 z SSA LANCA Programming Comment BEGIN PGM EX11 MM zh 2 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 135 4 2 5 3 BLK FORM 2 X 30 Y 40 Z 0 4 TOOL CALL 3 Z S1500 5 L Z 20 RO FMAX M3 6 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 15 DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 1 PLUNGING DEPTH DWELL TIME AT TOP SURFACE COORDINATE oo Q204 50 72ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH oon a zo7 Woz D x z wo wo X 3 TOOL CALL 6 Z S3000 F2222 10 L Z 20 RO FMAX 11 CYCL DEF 14 0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY 12 CYCL DEF 14 1 CONTOUR LABEL1 7 2 13 CYCL DEF 2 CONTOUR DATA MILLING DEPTH TOOL PATH OVERLAP ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR SURFACE COORDINATE 7SET UP CLEARANCE CLEARANCE HEIGHT ROUNDING RADIUS z ROTATIONAL DIRECTION 14 cae fee 2 gt ul noun we t i TET TT Ey 1 Er ican DIAGNOSIS pe ai MOVE MOVE INSERT peas PENY OVERWRITE a 115 4 3 Structuri Programs 4 4 I
288. ogram startup to select the point of interruption Error message FK programming Undefined starting position The menu for returning must be selected with the RESTORE POSITION soft key The order of axis approach cannot be recognized a fixed sequence of axes is always displayed on the screen After position has been reached positioning mode must be exited with the RESTORE POSITION soft key Only possible if startup position has already been approached Medium character set Editing is possible right after switching to the Programming mode of operation Switching the operating mode is allowed Switching the operating mode is allowed modal information is saved program run can be continued by pressing NC start GOTO allowed Menu for returning is selected automatically The order of axis approach is displayed on the screen by highlighting the corresponding axes The positioning mode is automatically exited after the position has been reached Possible in all operating states j il Error messages Editing O parameter contents after program run was interrupted by switching to the Single block mode of operation Manual traverse during program interruption and with active M118 488 Error messages e g limit switch messages are still active after the error has been corrected and must be acknowledged separately The INTERNAL STOP soft key must also be pressed to cancel the program Function not avail
289. ogramming Manual operation Tools are set up in the Manual Operation mode o Press the operating modes key The TNC goes into the Manual Operation mode 1 5 Tool Se X 10 85 7p Y 108 452 2 C 3 Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC See Operating Modes on page 60 9 749 i pt 0 009 Prepare and measure tools 85 860 Clamp the required tools in their chucks When measuring with an external tool presetter Measure the tools note down the length and radius or transfer them directly to the machine through a transfer program When measuring on the machine Place the tools into the tool changer see page 50 AcTL we r 3 2 a F mm min Ouvr 57 8 M5 OA S TSI 12 37 57 F O0OVR TOUCH PRESET 3D ROT TOOL M S F PROBE TABLE TABLE i 3 LO oD The tool table TOOL T In the tool table TOOL T permanently saved under TNC TABLE save Tool table editing Progranming the tool data such as length and radius but also further tool specific Tool name File tne tableNtool t information that the TNC needs to conduct its functions To enter tool data in the tool table TOOL T proceed as follows a Display the tool table TEH EDIT Edit the tool table Set the EDITING soft key to ON oFF on t ttt tt ttt tt t ttt tt t S9essesseasgsgsgsggsggsgggsss0cses0gg0ss With the upward or downward arrow keys you can select the tool n
290. ol oversize DL DR DR2 gt 0 If you are programming the machining data with an allowance enter the oversize value in the TOOL CALL block of the part program A negative delta value describes a tool undersize DL DR DR2 lt 0 An undersize is entered in the tool table for wear Delta values are usually entered as numerical values In a TOOL CALL block you can also assign the values to O parameters Inout range You can enter a delta value with up to 99 999 mm representation of the tool The representation of the Delta values from the tool table influence the graphical workpiece remains the same in the simulation Delta values from the TOOL CALL block change the represented size of the workpiece during the simulation The simulated tool size remains the same Entering tool data into the program The number length and radius of a specific tool is defined in the TOOL DEF block of the part program To select tool definition press the TOOL DEF key E Tool number Each toolis uniquely identified by its tool DEF number Tool length Compensation value for the tool length Tool radius Compensation value for the tool radius tool length and tool radius directly into the input line by p In the programming dialog you can transfer the value for pressing the desired axis soft key Example HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 on 5 2 Tool Data j il 5 2 Tool Data Entering tool data in the table You can define and store
291. om four Nae points OF CIRCLE Example FN 24 Q20 CDATA Q30 The coordinate pairs of four points on a circle must be saved in Q30 and the following seven parameters in this case up to Q37 The TNC then saves the circle center of the reference axis X if spindle axis is Z In parameter Q20 the circle center in the minor axis Y if spindle axis is Z in parameter O21 and the circle radius in parameter Q22 Note that FN 23 and FN 24 automatically overwrite the resulting parameter and the two following parameters HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 5 Circle Calculations i il th Q Parameters ions WI 8 6 lf Then 8 6 If Then Decisions with Q Parameters Application The TNC can make logical If Then decisions by comparing a Q parameter with another Q parameter or with a numerical value If the condition is fulfilled the TNC continues the program at the label that is programmed after the condition for information on labels see Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats page 206 If it is not fulfilled the TNC continues with the next block To call another program as a subprogram enter a PGM CALL program call after the block with the target label Unconditional jumps An unconditional jump is programmed by entering a conditional jump whose condition is always true Example FN 9 IF 10 EQU 10 GOTO LBL1 Programming If Then decisions Press the JUMP soft key to call the If Then conditions The TNC then disp
292. on Software Option meee 2 p 6 Overview S The following touch probe cycles are available in the Manual Operation A m mode po Function Softkey Page Y e Calibrate the effective length cal Page 370 4 e 877777 Calibrate the effective radius cal Page 371 LL Measure a basic rotation using a line PROBING Page 373 Lal eb 2 S et the datum in any axis TIS Page 375 dees 77777 0 Ke Set a corner as datum PROBING Page 376 Q E T Set a circle center as datum PROBING Page 377 e Touch probe system data management Men Proe See User s ee Manual for Cycles active for coordinate transformation Cycle 7 DATUM Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 10 ROTATION Cycles 11 and 26 SCALING and Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE S When running touch probe cycles no cycles must be For more information about the touch probe table refer to the User s Manual tor Cycle Programming 12 5 Using 3 D Touch Probe 366 Manual Operation and Setup il Selecting probe cycles To select the Manual Operation or El Handwheel mode of operation Touch Select the touch probe functions by pressing the E7 TOUCH PROBE soft key The TNC displays additional soft keys see table above To select the probe cycle press the appropriate soft key for example PROBING ROT and the TNC displays the associated menu HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 12 5 Using 3 D Touch rrobes ipuct Probe Function Software Option j il Writing the m
293. on the tool Move to working depth Approach the contour at point 1 on a circular arc with tangential connection Move to point 2 Move to point 3 Move to point 4 Move to point 5 Move to point 6 Move to point 1 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 185 olar Coordinates 6 5 Path Contour N Pw oO d o o Q a amp O 6 5 Path Contour F x lt Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Transfer the last programmed position as the pole Move to working depth Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Helical interpolation Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 86 Programming Programming Contours il 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Advanced Programming Features Software Option Fundamentals Workpiece drawings that are not dimensioned for NC often contain unconventional coordinate data that cannot be entered with the gray path function keys For example Known coordinates on the contour element or in its proximity Coordinate data can be referenced to another contour element Directional data and data regarding the course of the contour You can enter such dimensional data directly by using the FK free contour programming function The TNC derives
294. on to approach the starting point Ps Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LCT soft key Coordinates of the first contour point Pa Radius R of the circular arc Enter R as a positive value Radius compensation RR RL for machining Q lt ao gt Oo Pw Oo Q Example NC blocks Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR radius R 10 End point of the first contour element Next contour element HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 163 il ch and Departure 6 3 Contour Appro Departing on a straight line with tangential connection DEP LT The tool moves on a straight line from the last contour point Pe to the end point Py The line lies on the extension of the last contour element Py is separated from Pe by the distance LEN gt Program the last contour element with the end point Pg and radius compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LT soft key LEN Enter the distance from the last contour element a Pg to the end point Py Example NC blocks Last contour element Pg with radius compensation Depart contour by LEN 12 5 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program Departing on a straight line perpendicular to the last contour point DEP LN The tool moves on a straight line from the last contour point Pe to the end point Py The line departs on a perpendicular path from the last contour point Pe Py is separated from Pe by the
295. only in French conversational Display text only in Italian conversational Display text only in Spanish conversational Display text only in Swedish conversational Display text only in Danish conversational Display text only in Finnish conversational Display text only in Dutch conversational Display text only in Polish conversational Display text only in Portuguese conversational Display text only in Hungarian conversational Display text only in Russian conversational Display text only in Slovenian conversational Display text independently of the conversational language Number of hours from the real time clock Number of minutes from the real time clock Number of seconds from the real time clock Programming Q Parameters il DAY Day from the real time clock MONTH Month as a number from the real time clock STR MONTH Month as a String abbreviation from the real time clock YEAR2 Two digit year from the real time clock YEAR4 Four digit year from the real time clock In the part program program FN 16 F PRINT to activate the output The TNC then outputs the file PROT1 A through the serial interface CALIBRAT CHART IMPELLER CENTER GRAVITY DATE 27 11 2001 TIME 8 56 34 NO OF MEASURED VALUES 1 X1 149 360 Y1 25 509 Z1 37 000 saves all texts in the file that you have defined with the first FN 16 function The file is not output until the TNC reads the END PGM block or you press the NC stop button or you close
296. only in the program in which they were defined With the FN37 EXPORT function you can export locally effective O parameters into another calling program Example The local Q parameter Q25 is exported Example The local Q parameters Q25 to Q30 are exported The TNC exports the value that the parameter has at the time of the EXPORT command The parameter is exported only to the presently calling program HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 tt Additional Functions j i N O Q O Y gt T 8 9 Accessing 8 9 Accessing Tables with SQL Commands Introduction Accessing of tables is programmed on the TNC with SQL commands in transactions A transaction consists of multiple SOL commands that guarantee an orderly execution of the table entries Names and designations required as parameters for SOL A Tables are configured by the machine manufacturer commands are also specified The following terms are used Table A table consists of x columns and y rows It is saved as a file in the File Manager of the TNC and is addressed with the path and file name table name Synonyms can also be used for addressing as an alternative to the path and file name Columns The number and names of the columns are specified when configuring the table In some SOL commands the column name is used for addressing Rows The number of rows is variable You can insert new rows There are no row numbers or other des
297. ons of the TNC The following tables will give you an overview of which functions are available Main menu for SPEC FCT special functions Manual operation P ro g ramm i n g 14 h Select the special functions FCT BEGIN PGM 14 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X Y 0 2 20 2 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 9 Z 53500 L Z 100 R FMAX M13 Y 50 RO FMAX m Define program defaults PEREA Page 315 D x Go ul x 1 Functions for contour and point contour Page 315 E cotiee as machining MACHINING 19 L 2100 Re FMAX Mae 20 END PGM 14 MM Define the PLANE function TILT Page 327 MACHINING PLANE r A Er a e Define different conversational SS Page 316 functions FUNCTIONS Define structure items Page 115 ee CONTOUR TILT POINT MACHINING DEFAULTS MACHINING PLANE DIAGNOSIS sistem 2 PROGRAM INSERT SECTION FUNCTIONS 314 Programming Special Functions Program defaults menu Bronte Select the program defaults menu DEFAULTS Define the workpiece blank Select datum table BLK FORM DATUM TABLE Page 79 See User s Manual for Cycles Functions for contour and point machining menu couTour Select the menu for functions for contour and point MACHINING machining Assign contour description Define a simple contour formula Select a contour definition Define a complex contour formula Define regular machining pattern Select the point file with m
298. ontours Caesien Coordinates 6 4 Path contours cM sian Coordinates 76 Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX Pre position the tool Move to working depth at feed rate F 1000 mm min Approach the contour at point 1 on a circular arc with tangential connection Point 2 first straight line for corner 2 Insert radius with R 10 mm feed rate 150 mm min Move to point 3 Starting point of the arc with CR Move to point 4 End point of the arc with CR radius 30 mm Move to point 5 Move to point 6 Move to point 7 End point of the arc circular arc with tangential connection to point 6 TNC automatically calculates the radius Programming Programming Contours il 6 4 Path vontours caeeien Coordinates HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Move to last contour point 1 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program k i 6 4 Path contours cM sian Coordinates 78 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Define the circle center Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth Approach the starting point of the circle on a circular arc with tangential connection Move to the circle end point circle starting point Depart the contour on a circular arc with
299. ontours the feed rate is not adjusted cycle with a number greater than 200 the adjusted feed rate is also effective for circular arcs within these machining cycles The initial state is restored after finishing or aborting a machining cycle If you define M109 or M110 before calling a machining Effect M109 and M110 become effective at the start of block To cancel M109 and M110 enter M111 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 9 4 Miscellaneous ung for Contouring Behavior j il 9 4 Miscellaneous run lns for Contouring Behavior Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 Miscellaneous functions software option Standard behavior If the tool radius is larger than the contour step that is to be machined with radius compensation the TNC interrupts program run and generates an error message M97 see Machining small contour steps M97 on page 301 inhibits the error message but this results in dwell marks and will also move the corner If the programmed contour contains undercut features the tool may damage the contour Behavior with M120 The TNC checks radius compensated paths for contour undercuts and tool path intersections and calculates the tool path in advance from the current block Areas of the contour that might be damaged by the tool are not machined dark areas in figure You can also use M120 to calculate the radius compensation for digitized data or data created on an external programmi
300. operating mode see the last line of the following table Shift workpiece blank in positive negative X direction X Shift workpiece blank in positive negative Y _ direction Shift workpiece blank in positive negative Z direction Zt Z Show workpiece blank referenced to the set datum a Switch monitoring function on or off ee monitoring HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 116 900 30 000 114 000 52 000 33 000 0 000 100 000 0 800 100 000 20 000 0 000 49 811 107 345 27 500 on A eS Ea ce in the Working Space Advanced Graphic Features Software Option ie 14 2 a Workp o il 14 3 Functions for Program Display 14 3 Functions for Program Display Overview In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run mode the TNC provides the following soft keys for displaying a part program in pages Go back in the program by one screen F Go forward in the program by one screen Y D Qo m Go to the beginning of the program oO m Qo H 2 Go to the end of the program m Z k 402 Test Run and Program Run il 14 4 Test Run Application In the Test Run mode of operation you can simulate programs and program sections to reduce programming errors during program run The TNC checks the programs for the following 14 4 Test Run E Geometrical incompatibilities Missing data I
301. operating mode is set to inactive The jog increment can be defined separately for linear and rotary axes Basic transformation translation and rotation of machine table system to workpiece system via the columns X Y and Z as well as spatial angles SPA SPB and SPC In addition the columns X_OFFS to W_OFFS can be used to define the axis offset of each individual axis The function of the axis offsets can be configured Presetting In a rotary axis has the same effect as an axis offset The offset is also effective for kinematics calculations and for tilting the working plane The machine parameter CfgAxisPropKin gt presetToAl ignAxis is used to define whether the axis offset Is to be taken into account internally after zero setting Independently of this an axis offset has always the following effects An axis offset always influences the nominal position display of the affected axis the axis offset is subtracted from the current axis value If a rotary axis coordinate is programmed in an L block then the axis offset is added to the programmed coordinate The programmed values are displayed in the 3 D ROT dialog even if the Tilt working plane function is set to inactive for both operating modes The jog increment applies for both linear and rotary axes Basic transformation translation of machine table system to workpiece system via the columns X Y and Z as well as a ROT basic rotation in the wor
302. osition capture by hard key Via the END soft key or the END hard key Via the END hard key at any time Permanently defined soft key row soft key row 1 is displayed Comparison Differences in Program Run operation Arrangement of soft key rows and soft keys within the rows Character set for PROGRAM screen layout Editing of program after program run was interrupted by switching to the Single block mode of operation Operating mode switchover after program run was Interrupted by switching to the Single block mode of operation Operating mode switchover after program run was interrupted by switching to the Single block mode of operation and canceled by INTERNAL STOP on the TNC 320 GOTO is used to go to FK sequences after program run was interrupted there before switching the operating mode Mid program startup Behavior after restoring the machine status Returning to the point of interruption with positioning logic Completing positioning for mid program startup Switching the screen layout for mid program startup HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Arrangement of soft key rows and soft keys varies depending on the active screen layout Small character set The INTERNAL STOP soft key must also be pressed to cancel the program The INTERNAL STOP soft key must also be pressed to cancel the program When you return to the Program Run mode of operation Error message Selected block not addressed Use mid pr
303. osition the touch probe near the first touch point on the first workpiece edge Select the probing direction via soft key Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to its starting point Use the axis direction keys to pre position the touch probe to a position near the second touch point on the first workpiece edge Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to its starting point Use the axis direction keys to pre position the touch probe to a position near the first touch point on the second workpiece edge Select the probing direction via soft key Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to its starting point Use the axis direction keys to pre position the touch probe to a position near the second touch point on the second workpiece edge Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to its starting point Then the TNC shows the coordinates of the measured corner point Set to 0 Press the SET DATUM soft key Press the END soft key to close the menu Further information on this topic Datum setting See Datum Setting with 3 D Touch Probe Touch Probe Function Software Option on page 375
304. ou will position the rotary axes later in a separate positioning block If you have selected the MOVE PLANE function is to position the axes automatically the following two parameters must still be defined Dist tool tip center of rot and Feed rate F If you have selected the TURN option PLANE function is to position the axes automatically without any compensating movement the following parameter must still be defined Feed rate F F As an alternative to defining a feed rate F directly by numerical value you can also position with FMAX rapid traverse or FAUTO feed rate from the TOOL CALL block position the rotary axes in a separate block after the PLANE p If you use PLANE AXIAL together with STAY you have to function 342 MOVE TURN Ady STAY Programming Multiple Axis Machining il gt Dist tool tip center of rot incremental The TNC tilts the tool or table relative to the tool tip The DISTANCE parameter shifts the center of rotation of the positioning movement relative to the current position of the tool tip Note f the tool is already at the given distance to the workpiece before positioning then relatively speaking the tool is at the same position after positioning see figure at center right 1 SET UP 1 f the tool is not at the given distance to the workpiece before positioning then relatively speaking the tool is offset from the original position after positioning s
305. ould always even without M126 choose the shortest path to the programmed position Examples 350 10 340 10 340 330 Behavior with M126 With M126 the TNC will move the axis on the shorter path of traverse for rotary axes whose display is reduced to values less than 360 Examples 350 10 20 10 340 30 Effect M126 becomes effective at the start of block To cancel M126 enter M127 At the end of program M126 is automatically canceled HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 11 3 weg aneous Functions for Rotary Axes C il 11 3 vidihaneous Functions for Rotary Axes Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool from the current angular value to the programmed angular value Example Current angular value 538 Programmed angular value 180 Actual distance of traverse 358 Behavior with M94 At the start of block the TNC first reduces the current angular value to a value less than 360 and then moves the tool to the programmed value If several rotary axes are active M94 will reduce the display of all rotary axes As an alternative you can enter a rotary axis after M94 The TNC then reduces the display only of this axis Example NC blocks To reduce display of all active rotary axes To reduce display of the C axis only To reduce display of all active rotary axes and then move the tool in the C axis to the programmed va
306. our G entry with the machine START button The spindle speed S with the entered rom is started with a miscellaneous function M Proceed in the same way to enter a miscellaneous function M Feed rate F After entering a feed rate F you must confirm your entry with the ENT key instead of the machine START button The following is valid for feed rate F If you enter F 0 then the lowest feed rate from the machine parameter manualFeed is effective If the feed rate entered exceeds the value defined in the machine parameter maxFeed then the parameter value is effective F is not lost during a power interruption Manual Operation and Setup il Changing the spindle speed and feed rate With the override knobs you can vary the spindle speed S and feed rate F from 0 to 150 of the set value ate F and Miscellaneous Functions M LL n oO Q Y O S Q Y a N HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 357 il thout a 3 D Touch Probe ing wi E T V z 12 4 12 4 Datum Setting without a 3 D Touch Probe Note Setting with 3 D Touch Probe Touch Probe Function S Datum setting with a 3 D touch probe see Datum Software Option on page 375 You fix a datum by setting the TNC position display to the coordinates of a known position on the workpiece Preparation Clamp and align the workpiece Insert the zero tool with known radius Into the spindle Ensure that the TNC is showing the actual posit
307. patial angle BEGIN PGM 14 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X Y 0 2 20 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 9 Z 53500 L Z 100 R FMAX M13 PLAN 6 L X 5 Y 50 R FMAX 7 L 2 2 RO FMAX 8 L 2 6 RO F2000 DAWNFO ul m 21 END PGM 14 MM Manual operation eae 2s 2 Nes Bde aes WE NE Ags SES Programming ot a DIAGNOSIS overview PGM LBL CYC m Pos gt RFNOML X 139 600 c Y 150 000 z 7 500 L R DL TAB DR TAB DL PGM DR PGM PH Pa ap amp LBL LBL REP PGM CALL Active PGM T 3 2 S mm min Ovr 57 5 MS 0 S IST 12 38 57 F O0VR M s F TOUCH PRESET 3D ROT PROBE TABLE TA gt ot 8 a BE 2 TOOL TABLE w 327 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function Reset the PLANE function SPEC FCT SPECIAL 4 EF i to FUNCTIONS TILT MACHINING PLANE RESET MOVE y amp 328 Show the soft key row with special functions Select special TNC functions Press the SPECIAL TNC FUNCTIONS soft key Select the PLANE function Press the TILT MACHINING PLANE soft key The TNC displays the available definition possibilities in the soft key row Select the Reset function This internally resets the PLA
308. permitted 1014 Touch point inaccessible 1015 Too many points 236 Programming Q Parameters il 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 Contradictory input CYCL incomplete Plane wrongly defined Wrong axis programmed Wrong rom Radius comp undefined Rounding off undefined Rounding radius too large Program start undefined Excessive nesting Angle reference missing No fixed cycle defined Slot width too small Pocket too small Q202 not defined Q205 not defined Q218 must be greater than Q219 CYCL 210 not permitted CYCL 211 not permitted Q220 too large Q222 must be greater than Q223 Q244 must be greater than 0 Q245 must not equal Q246 Angle range must be lt 360 Q223 must be greater than Q222 Q214 0 not permitted HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 tt Additional Functions o il EE Additional Functions 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 Traverse direction not defined No datum table active Position error center in axis 1 Position error center in axis 2 Hole diameter too small Hole diameter too large Stud diameter too small Stud diameter too large Pocket too small rework axis 1 Pocket too small rework axis 2 Pocket too large scrap axis 1 Pocket too large s
309. phic simulation 399 Measuring the machining time 400 14 2 Show the Workpiece in the Working Space Advanced Graphic Features Software Option 401 Application 401 14 3 Functions for Program Display 402 Overview 402 14 4 Test Run 403 Application 403 14 5 Program Run 405 Application 405 Running a part program 406 Interrupting machining 407 Moving the machine axes during an interruption 408 Resuming program run after an interruption 409 Mid program startup block scan 410 Returning to the contour 412 14 6 Automatic Program Start 413 Application 413 14 7 Optional Block Skip 414 Application 414 Insert the character 414 Erase the character 414 14 8 Optional Program Run Interruption 415 Application 415 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 29 il 15 1 Selecting MOD Functions 418 Selecting the MOD functions 418 Changing the settings 418 Exiting the MOD functions 418 Overview of MOD functions 419 15 2 Software Numbers 420 Function 420 15 3 Entering Code Numbers 421 Application 421 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces 422 Serial interfaces on the TNC 320 422 Application 422 Setting the RS 232 interface 422 Setting the baud rate baudRate 422 Set the protocol protocol 422 Set the data bits dataBits 423 Parity chec
310. pid traverse FMAX FU feed per revolution mm rev FZ tooth feed rate FT time in seconds for path FMAXT only for active rapid traverse pot time in seconds for path FK free contour programming Programming for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC programming Conversion of FK program to conversational dialog Program jumps Maximum number of label numbers Subroutines Nesting depth for subprograms Program section repeats Any desired program as subroutine HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Option 08 X option 08 X option 08 X option 08 X option 08 x X X 65535 20 X X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X FCL2 function X X option 44 X X X X X j il Q parameter programming Standard mathematical functions X X Formula entry X X String processing X X Local Q parameters QL X Nonvolatile Q parameters QR X Changing parameters during program interruption X FN15 PRINT X FN25 PRESET X FN26 TABOPEN X FN27 TABWRITE X FN28 TABREAD X FN29 PLC LIST X FN31 RANGE SELECT X FN32 PLC PRESET X FN37 EXPORT X FN38 SEND X Saving file externally with FN16 X FN16 formatting Left aligned right aligned string lengths X FN16 Standard behavior while writing the file if not defined with Each time F16 is Each time F1
311. piece center and in the tool axis on the top surface 14 1 Graphi 396 Test Run and Program Run il 3 D view The workpiece is displayed in three dimensions You can rotate the 3 D display about the vertical and horizontal axes The shape of the workpiece blank can be depicted by a frame overlay at the beginning of the graphic simulation The shape of the workpiece blank can be depicted by a frame overlay at the beginning of the graphic simulation In the Test Run mode of operation you can isolate details for magnification see Magnitying details page 398 Press the soft key for 3 D view Rotating and magnifying reducing the 3 D view Shift the soft key row until the soft key for the rotating and magnitication reduction appears Select functions for rotating and magnitying reducing Rotate in 15 steps about the vertical axis S S Rotate in 15 steps about the horizontal axis am dvanced Graphic Features Software Option r Q re g ue vr q HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 397 il dvanced Graphic Features Software Option 14 1 Graphi Magnifying details You can magnify details in all display modes in the Test Run mode and a Program Run mode The graphic simulation or the program run respectively must first have been stopped A detail magnification is always effective in all display modes Changing the detail magnification The soft keys are listed in the table
312. plane The TNC automatically activates the tilted working plane if this function was enabled when the control was switched off Then the TNC moves the axes in the tilted coordinate system when an axis direction key is pressed Position the tool in such a way that a collision is excluded during the subsequent crossing of the reference points To cross the reference points you have to deactivate the Tilt Working Plane function see Activating manual tilting page 385 If one of the two functions that were active before is active now the NC START button has no function The TNC outputs a corresponding error message Switch off To prevent data from being lost at switch off you need to shut down the operating system of the TNC as follows Select the Manual Operation mode EN gt Select the function for shutting down confirm again oH with the YES soft key When the TNC displays the message NOW IT IS SAFE TO TURN POWER OFF in a superimposed window you may cut off the power supply to the TNC 352 Manual Operation and Setup il 12 2 Moving the Machine Axes Note vary depending on the machine tool The machine tool D Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons can manual provides further information To traverse with the machine axis direction buttons w Select the Manual Operation mode x Press the machine axis direction button and hold it as long as you wish the axis to move or x T Move the a
313. play is active enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm ing wi E T Y Select the BASIC TRANSFORMATION AXIS OFFSET view The BASIC TRANSFORMATION view shows the X Y and Z columns Depending on the machine the SPA SPB and SPC columns are displayed additionally Here the TNC saves the basic rotation for the Z tool axis the TNC uses the SPC column The OFFSET view shows the offset values to the preset 12 4 Write the currently active datum to a selectable line in the table This function saves the datum in acl allaxes and then activates the appropriate row In the table automatically If inch display is active enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 363 il a Editing the preset table _Editingfunctionintablemode Softkey hon m Select beginning of table a c t Select end of table END O 4 j Sel in tabl elect previous page in table PAGE Q F yt Select next page in table PAGE J 5 Select the functions for preset entry lt lt PRESET gm Display Basic Transformation Axis Offset BASE S selection CRESTED O e Activate the datum of the selected line of the ACTIVATE E preset table PRESET Add the entered number of lines to the end of the APPEND V table 2nd soft key row N LINES z Copy the highlighted field 2nd soft key row copy Inser
314. position capture key 6 Keys for defining the feed rate slow medium fast the feed rates are set by the machine tool builder 7 Direction in which the TNC moves the selected axis 8 Machine function set by the machine tool builder The red indicator lights show the axis and feed rate you have selected It is also possible to move the machine axes with the handwheel during program run if M118 is active Procedure Select the Electronic Handwheel operating mode Press and hold a permissive button Select the axis x Select the feed rate z Move the active axis in the positive direction or Move the active axis in the negative direction HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 12 2 Moving the Machine Axes j il 12 3 Spindle Speed S redikate F and Miscellaneous Functions M 12 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M Function In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel operating modes you can enter the spindle speed S feed rate F and the miscellaneous functions M with soft keys The miscellaneous functions are described in Chapter 7 Programming Miscellaneous Functions The machine tool builder determines which O miscellaneous functions M are available on your control and what effects they have Entering values Spindle speed S miscellaneous function M Ea To enter the spindle speed press the S soft key 1000 Enter the desired spindle speed and confirm y
315. programming and add necessary information If desired you can have the programming graphics show the programmed paths of traverse OovoOuUDWNeE Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Program ry m o m v E ie 4 x lt I u a N 7 D x 17 L Y 50 RO PGM Left program right program structure PROGRAM SECTS y K Left program blocks right graphics Ea Test Run In the Test Run mode of operation the TNC checks programs and eee Test run program sections for errors such as geometrical incompatibilities Pat h missing or incorrect data within the program or violations of the work BLK FORM 2 1 Z X30 V0 2 20 space This simulation is supported graphically in different display modes Advanced Graphic Features software option TOOL CALL 3 Z 52000 L Z 10 RO FMAX M3 L X 50 Y 50 RO FMAX CYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG1 F333 WOOVOUDBUONPH Soft keys for selecting the screen layout see Program Run Full 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS Sequence and Program Run Single Block page 62 13 L242 RO FMAX MOS cer 15 CYCL DEF 5 1 SET UP2 16 CYCL DEF 5 2 DEPTH 19 17 CYCL DEF 5 3 PLNGNG19 F333 18 CYCL DEF 5 4 RADIUS15 19 CYCL DEF 5 5 F888 DR 20 L 2 8 R FMAX M99 21 L Z 2 R FMAX 22 CYCL DEF 3 0 SLOT MILLING 23 CYCL DEF 3 1 SET UP2 24 CYCL DEF 3 2 DEPTH 8 2 CYCL
316. pt it S mek LoT xo v az pnimtAtimETET E 5 To call Q parameter functions Press the Q INFO soft it Fer os ez gt Fron a fe toa fd a a key in the Programming and Editing mode of ia For eo 9 22 Oe operation 15 DEP LCT xo v so A Ka 20 L X 0 Y 0 27 L Z 100 R FMAX M3 28 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING a pas QZ200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 20 D Q206 15 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG EPTH a pegs See 2 copy PASTE ok CANCEL FIELD FIELD In the Program Run Single Block Program Run Full Sequence and Test Run modes of operation select 2 the screen layout Program Status ae Select the STATUS OF Q PARAM soft key Q Q PARAM z Select the Q PARAMETER LIST soft key O The TNC opens a pop up window in which you can enter the desired range for display of the Ss Q parameters or string parameters 0 ao With the Q PARAMETER REQUEST soft key available REQUEST only in Manual Operation Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block you can request individual O parameters To assign a new value overwrite the displayed value and confirm with OK 234 Programming Q Parameters 8 8 Additional Functions Overview Press the DIVERSE FUNCTION soft key to call the additional functions The TNC then displays the following soft keys FN 14 ERROR Ee Page 236 Output of error messages ERROR FN 16 F PRINT Es Page 241 Formatted output of texts or Q parameter ay values FN 18
317. r generates an electrical signal The TNC evaluates this signal and calculates the precise actual position of the machine axis If there is a power interruption the calculated position will no longer correspond to the actual position of the machine slide To recover this association incremental position encoders are provided with reference marks The scales of the position encoders contain one or more reference marks that transmit a signal to the TNC when they are crossed over From that signal the TNC can re establish the assignment of displayed positions to machine positions For linear encoders with distance coded reference marks the machine axes need to move by no more than 20 mm for angle encoders by no more than 20 With absolute encoders an absolute position value is transmitted to the control immediately upon switch on In this way the assignment of the actual position to the machine slide position is re established directly after switch on Reference system A reference system is required to define positions in a plane or in space The position data are always referenced to a predetermined point and are described through coordinates The Cartesian coordinate system a rectangular coordinate system is based on the three coordinate axes X Y and Z The axes are mutually perpendicular and intersect at one point called the datum A coordinate identifies the distance from the datum in one of these directions A position in a plane
318. r of the QS parameter whose length the TNC is to ascertain and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Find the length of QS15 280 Programming Q Parameters il Comparing alphabetic priority With the STRCOMP function you can compare string parameters for alphabetic priority FORMULA STRCOMP Select Q parameter functions Select the FORMULA function Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the result of comparison Confirm with the ENT key Shift the soft key row Select the function for comparing string parameters Enter the number of the first OS parameter to be compared and confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the second QS parameter to be compared and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key The TNC returns the following results 0 The compared OS parameters are identical 1 The first OS parameter precedes the second OS parameter alphabetically 1 The first OS parameter follows the second OS parameter alphabetically Example QS12 and QS14 are compared for alphabetic priority HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 11 String Parameters i il d Q Parameters assigne 8 12 Preassigned Q Parameters The Q parameters Q100 to Q199 are assigned values by the TNC The following are assigned to Q parameters
319. ramming mode the contour of the NC blocks is drawn on screen while they are being entered 2 D pencil trace graphics even while another program is running Program Run graphics Display modes Machining time Calculation of the machining time in the Test Run mode of operation Returning to the contour Mid program startup in any block in the program returning the tool to the calculated Program interruption contour departure and return HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Cycles for drilling and conventional and rigid tapping Roughing of rectangular and circular pockets Cycles for pecking reaming boring and counterboring Cycles for milling internal and external threads Finishing of rectangular and circular pockets Cycles for clearing level and inclined surfaces Cycles for milling linear and circular slots Linear and circular point patterns Contour parallel contour pocket Contour train OEM cycles special cycles developed by the machine tool builder can also be integrated Scaling factor axis Sspecific Tilting the working plane software option Logical comparisons lt gt Calculating with parentheses tan a arc sine arc cosine arc tangent a e In log absolute value of a number the constant m negation truncation of digits before or after the decimal point Functions for calculation of circles String parameters Online calculator Complete list of all current error messages Context sensitive help funct
320. re ignored The approach departure movements are calculated for the first or last valid contour element Q60 to Q99 or QS60 to QS99 are always local Effective in the machine based coordinate system Available function If possible the blocks are executed in the defined working plane error message for APPRLN APPRLT APPRCT APPRLCT Error message Tool radius 0 and compensation direction RR are assumed An error message is issued if a contour element with length O is programmed after the APPR block relative to the first contour point programmed in the APPR block For a contour element with length O before a DEP block the TNC does not issue an error message but uses the last valid contour element to calculate the departure movement Q60 to Q99 or QS60 to QS99 are local or global depending on MP7251 in converted cycle programs cyc Nested calls may cause problems j il Automatic cancelation of tool radius compensation NC blocks with M91 Tool shape compensation Paraxial positioning blocks Mid program startup in a point table Empty CC block pole of last tool position is used in NC program Axis specific scaling of RND block Reaction if a contour element with length O is defined before or after a RND or CHF block Circle programming with polar coordinates 490 Block with RO DEP block END PGM No consideration of tool radius compensation Tool shape compensation is not supported
321. re depends on the distance from the tool center to the center of axis rotation The larger this distance becomes the greater the contouring feed rate Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes with M116 The machine geometry must be specified by the machine F tool builder in the description of kinematics M116 works only on rotary tables M116 cannot be used with swivel heads If your machine is equipped with a table head combination the TNC ignores the swivel head rotary axes M116 is also effective in an active tilted working plane The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate of a rotary axis in degrees min or 1 10 inch min In this case the TNC calculates the feed for the block at the start of each block With a rotary axis the feed rate is not changed during execution of the block even if the tool moves toward the center of the rotary axis Effect M116 is effective in the working plane With M117 you can reset M116 M116 is also canceled at the end of the program M116 becomes effective at the start of block 346 Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Shorter path traverse of rotary axes M126 Standard behavior The standard behavior of the TNC while positioning rotary axes whose display has been reduced to values less than 360 is dependent on machine parameter shortestDistance 300401 This machine parameter defines whether the TNC should consider the difference between nominal and actual position or whether it sh
322. rees center offset Rapid traverse Measuring feed rate Programming Q Parameters il TT tool touch probe Reference point from touch probe cycle 360 Value from the active datum table in the active coordinate system 500 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 56 57 70 71 72 75 76 77 78 10 Line 1to9 X Y Z A B C U V W 1to9 X Y Z A B C U V W 1to9 X Y Z A B C U V W 1to9 Ar TrA AB CU V W Column Maximum measuring range Safety clearance Line in the touch probe table Touch probe type Line in the touch probe table Center point in reference axis REF system Center point in minor axis REF system Center point in tool axis REF system Probe contact radius Rapid traverse Measuring feed rate for stationary spindle Measuring feed rate for rotating spindle Maximum measuring range Safety clearance for linear measurement Safety clearance for radial measurement Spindle speed Probing direction Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle 0 without probe length compensation but with probe radius compensation workpiece coordinate system Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle O without stylus length or stylus radius compensation machine coordinate system Result of measurement of the touch probe cycles 0 and 1 without probe radius or probe length compensation Last reference point of
323. ress the pao BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key To select the O parameter function MULTIPLICATION press the FNS X Y soft key 12 Enter the number of the Q parameter e g 12 O ol mi ot 49 am O Ol h O s ot a gt 49 h pm 09 ot lt a C 49 7 ENT m ct 49 N O ct a gt 49 ep 99 Q O lt eb 49 N 28 Call the Q parameter functions by pressing the Q key IT FN 3 Q12 405 4700 Example Program blocks in the TNC Programming Q Parameters il 8 4 Trigonometric Functions Definitions Sine cosine and tangent are terms designating the ratios of sides of right triangles In this case Sine sina a c Cosine cosa b c Tangent tanao a b sina cosa where c is the side opposite the right angle a is the side opposite the angle o b is the third side The TNC can find the angle from the tangent arc tan a b arc tan sin cos o Example a 25mm b 50 mm arctan a b arctan 0 5 26 57 Furthermore a2 b c where a2 a x a c J a2 b HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 gooner Functions f il pL Programming trigonometric functions Oo Press the ANGLE FUNCTION soft key to call the angle functions The TNC then displays the following soft keys Programming Compare Example Programming fundamental operations LL Function Sf Key hr FN 6 SINE Example FN 6 Q20 SIN Q
324. ress the APPR DEP key The TNC shows a soft key row with approach and departure functions Select the approach function APPR CT Enter the coordinates of the contour starting point 1 in Xand Y e g 5 5 Confirm with the ENT key Center angle Enter the approach angle e g 90 and confirm with the ENT key Circle radius Enter the approach radius e g 8 mm and confirm with the ENT key Confirm the Radius comp RL RR no comp with the RL soft key Activate the radius compensation to the left of the programmed contour Feed rate F Enter the machining feed rate e g 700 mm min and confirm your entry with the END key Machine the contour and move to contour point 2 You only need to enter the information that changes In other words enter only the Y coordinate 95 and save your entry with the END key Move to contour point 3 Enter the X coordinate 95 and save your entry with the END key Define the chamfer at contour point 3 Enter the chamfer width 10 mm and save with the END key Move to contour point 4 Enter the Y coordinate 5 and save your entry with the END key Define the chamfer at contour point 4 Enter the chamfer width 20 mm and save with the END key Move to contour point 1 Enter the X coordinate 5 and save your entry with the END key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 1 3 Programming the First T 1 3 Programming the First APPR Depart the contour Select the departure function DEP CT Center angle Enter the depart
325. reted as coordinates of the rotary axes or as angular components of a tilted plane Refer to your machine tool manual D The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced to The TNC supports the tilting functions on machine tools with swivel heads and or tilting tables Typical applications are for example oblique holes or contours in an oblique plane The working plane is always tilted around the active datum The program is written as usual in a main plane such as the X Y plane but is executed in a plane that is tilted relative to the main plane There are three functions available for tilting the working plane 3 D ROT soft key in the Manual Operation mode and Electronic Handwheel mode see Activating manual tilting page 385 Tilting under program control Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE in the part program see User s Manual Cycles Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE Tilting under program control PLANE function in the part program see The PLANE Function Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 on page 325 The TNC functions for tilting the working plane are coordinate transformations The working plane is always perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis 382 Manual Operation and Setup il When tilting the working plane the TNC differentiates between two machine types Machine with tilting table You must tilt the workpiece into the desired position for machining by positioning the tilting table for
326. ring formulas directly ee Page 269 Function for machining complex cane See User s contours ee Manual for Cycles HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 225 il 8 2 Part Families Q Parameters Place of Numerical Values 8 2 Part Families Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values Function The Q parameter function FN 0 ASSIGN assigns numerical values to Q parameters This enables you to use variables in the program instead of fixed numerical values Example NC blocks Assign Q10 is assigned the value 25 Means L X 25 You need write only one program for a whole family of parts entering the characteristic dimensions as O parameters To program a particular part you then assign the appropriate values to the individual Q parameters Example Cylinder with Q parameters Cylinder radius R Ol Cylinder height A O72 Cylinder Z1 Q1 30 Q2 10 Cylinder Z2 Q1 10 Q2 50 226 02 Programming Q Parameters il 8 3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations Application The Q parameters listed below enable you to program basic mathematical functions in a part program Select a O parameter function Press the O key in the numerical keypad at right The Q parameter functions are displayed in a soft key row To select the mathematical functions press the BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key The TNC then displays the following soft keys Overview FN 0 ASSIGN Example FN 0 Q5 60 Assigns a numerical value F
327. rol Spindle and Coolant on page 297 42 First Steps with the TNC 320 il Create a cycle program The holes depth of 20 mm shown in the figure at right are to be drilled with a standard drilling cycle You have already defined the workpiece blank TOOL CALL CYCL DEF DRILLING THREAD 200 be Call the tool Enter the tool data Confirm each of your entries with the ENT key Do not forget the tool axis Retract the tool Press the orange axis key Z in order to get clear in the tool axis and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Confirm with the ENT key Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Activate the radius compensation Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX Confirm the Miscellaneous function M with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block Call the cycle menu Display the drilling cycles Select the standard drilling cycle 200 The TNC starts the dialog for cycle definition Enter all parameters requested by the TNC step by step and conclude each entry with the ENT key In the screen to the right the TNC also displays a graphic showing the respective cycle parameter HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 100 90 X 10 20 80 90 100 Program run full sequence Programming Set up clearance BEGIN PGM EX11 MM 7 ANY COMMENT BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 135 Y 40 Z 5 2 8 UBUNeES w E A 7 e a N x
328. roperties and designations of the various display filters BEGIN a m oO PAGE aie v D Qo m RESET POCKET TABLE RESET COLUMN BEGIN LINE mO SIMULATED TOOL CHANGE SELECT t EDIT CURRENT FIELD SORT D The machine manufacturer defines the features The machine tool manual provides further information 144 Programming Tools Calling tool data A TOOL CALL block in the part program is defined with the following data Select the tool call function with the TOOL CALL key TOOL 07 10 E Tool number Enter the number or name of the tool The tool must already be defined in a TOOL DEF block or in the tool table Press the TOOL NAME soft key to enter the name The TNC automatically places the tool name in quotation marks The tool name always refers to the entry in the active tool table TOOL T If you wish to call a tool with other compensation values also enter the index you defined in the tool table after the decimal point There is a SELECT soft key for calling a window from which you can select a tool defined in the tool table TOOL T directly without having to enter the number or name Working spindle axis X Y Z Enter the tool axis Spindle speed S Enter the spindle speed in rom Alternatively you can define the cutting speed Vc in m min Press the VC soft key Feed rate F F mm min or 0 1 inch min is effective until you program a new feed rate in a po
329. s such as for face milling or pre positioning mdi h overview pam Lar eve M pos m 1 CYCL DEF 207 RIGID TAPPING NEW M Soft keys for selecting the screen layout 0200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE a L Q201 18 DEPTH OF THREAD Q239 1 THREAD PITCH z Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE 3 Ss 2 CYCL CALL M3 DL TAB DR TAB lt 8 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z 5222 BESEGM DREEGH Program S TCH PROBE 0 0 REF PLANE O1 Xt yen PGM 6 TCH PROBE 1 X Y 50 2 20 A gp t 7 TCH PROBE 400 BASIC ROTATION Z x Q263 0 71ST POINT 1ST AXIS Q264 8 71ST POINT 2ND AXIS AEE Left program blocks right status display PROGRAM S 18T 12 43 E BNA 57 F OVR 33 631 Y 72 542 Z 9 749 E 0 000 S 85 860 AcTL 1 okey r mm min Our 57 9 M 5 b STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS COORD OVERVIEW STATUS TRANSP 60 Introduction Programming and Editing Program run 7 full sequence Programming EX4 H BEGIN PGM EX4 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 100 Y 50 2 5 MODE BLK FORM 0 2 X 5 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 6 Z 52000 FN Q55 200 STARTING ANGLE L X Y 50 F500 Ta o MODE APPR LCT X Y 32 RZ RL F300 L IX 75 P 25 TOOL CALL 5 Z 52500 eg 27 L Z 100 R FMAX M3 28 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Q200 2 3SET UP CLEARANCE Q2 1 20 DEPTH Q2 6 15 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG In this mode of operation you can write your part programs The FK free programming feature the various cycles and the O parameter functions help you with
330. s in the direction of the tilted tool axis The three points define the slope of the plane The position of the active datum is not changed by the TNC Parameter description for the positioning behavior See Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 342 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function j il Input parameters X coordinate of 1st plane point X coordinate P1X Ns of the 1st plane point see figure at top right Y coordinate of 1st plane point Y coordinate P1Y of the 1st plane point see figure at top right Z coordinate of 1st plane point Z coordinate P1Z of the 1st plane point see figure at top right X coordinate of 2nd plane point X coordinate P2X of the 2nd plane point see figure at center right Y coordinate of 2nd plane point Y coordinate P2Y of the 2nd plane point see figure at center right Z coordinate of 2nd plane point Z coordinate P2Z of the 2nd plane point see figure at center right X coordinate of 3rd plane point X coordinate P3X of the 3rd plane point see figure at bottom right Y coordinate of 3rd plane point Y coordinate P3Y of the 3rd plane point see figure at bottom right Z coordinate of 3rd plane point Z coordinate P3Z of the 3rd plane point see figure at bottom right orking Plane Software Option 1 Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the posi
331. s repeated a total of 4 times Retract in the tool axis end program Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il Program sequence E Approach the groups of holes in the main program E Call the group of holes subprogram 1 E Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Tool call Retract the tool Cycle definition drilling Examples D c o i Move to starting point for group 1 Call the subprogram for the group Move to starting point for group 2 Call the subprogram for the group Examples Move to starting point for group 3 Call the subprogram for the group End of main program D z Beginning of subprogram 1 Group of holes Hole 1 Move to 2nd hole call cycle Move to 3rd hole call cycle Move to 4th hole call cycle End of subprogram 1 7 6 N 18 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il Examples Program sequence E Program the fixed cycles in the main program E Call the entire hole pattern subprogram 1 E Approach the groups of holes in subprogram 1 call group of holes subprogram 2 E Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 2 D c Call tool center drill Retract the tool Cycle definition CENTERING Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 219 il
332. s require entry of the username workgroup and password parameters Connect the TNC port X26 with a network or a PC In the file manager PGM MGT select the Network soft key Press the MOD key Then enter the keyword NET123 Press the DEFINE NETWORK CONNECTN soft key It opens the dialog window for the network configuration Connection over NFS Directory name to be mounted This is formed from the network address of the device a colon a slash and the name of the directory Entry of the network address as four decimal numbers separated by points dotted decimal notation e g 160 1 180 4 PC When entering the path name pay attention to capitalization To connect individual Windows computers via SMB Enter the network name and the share name of the computer e g PC1791NT PC Device name The device name entered here is displayed on the control in the program management for the mounted network e g WORLD The name must end with a colon File system type NFS Network File System SMB Windows network rsize Packet size in bytes for data reception wsize Packet size for data transmission In bytes time0 Time in tenths of a second after which the control repeats an unanswered Remote Procedure Call soft If YES is entered the Remote Procedure Call is repeated until the NFS server answers If NO is entered it is not repeated Manual operation Programming Pat h BS TNC GO nc_prog HO 25X Atomia
333. separate block 113 Functions for editing of the comment 114 4 3 Structuring Programs 115 Definition and applications 115 Displaying the program structure window Changing the active window 115 Inserting a structuring block in the left program window 115 Selecting blocks in the program structure window 115 4 4 Integrated Pocket Calculator 116 Operation 116 4 5 Programming Graphics 118 Generating Not generating graphics during programming 118 Generating a graphic for an existing program 118 Block number display ON OFF 119 Erasing the graphic 119 Magnifying or reducing a detail 119 4 6 Error Messages 120 Display of errors 120 Open the error window 120 Close the error window 120 Detailed error messages 121 INTERNAL INFO soft key 121 Clearing errors 122 Error log 122 Keystroke log 123 Informational texts 124 Saving service Tiles 124 Calling the TNCguide help system 124 4 7 Context Sensitive Help System 125 Application 125 Working with the TNCguide 126 Downloading current help files 130 16 5 1 Entering Tool Related Data 132 Feed rate F 132 Spindle speed S 133 5 2 Tool Data 134 Requirements for tool compensation 134 Tool numbers and tool names 134 Tool length L 134 Tool radius R 134 Delta values for le
334. siders the traverse movements of the parallel axis in the position display of the associated principal axis sum display Therefore the position display of the principal axis always displays the relative distance from the tool to the workpiece regardless of whether you move the principal axis or the minor axis Proceed as follows for the definition Show the soft key row with special functions FCT a Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS fu nections AEREN Select FUNCTION PARAX FUNCTION Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP ae Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP DISPLAY Define the parallel axis whose movements the TNC is to take into account in the associated principal axis 318 Example NC block Programming Special Functions il FUNCTION PARAXCOMP MOVE The PARAXCOMP MOVE function can be used only in connection with straight line blocks L The TNC uses the PARAXCOMP MOVE function to compensate for the movement of a parallel axis by performing a compensation movement in the associated principal axis For example if a parallel axis moves in the negative W axis direction the principal axis Z simultaneously moves in the positive direction by the same value The relative distance from the tool to the workpiece remains the same Application in gantry type milling machine Retract the spindle sleeve to move the cross beam down simultaneously Proceed as follows for the definition T Show the soft key row with sp
335. sition window NOML ACTL RFACTL REF NOML LAG DIST Type of position display in the status display NOML ACTL RFACTL REF NOML LAG DIST Definition of decimal separator for position display Feed rate display in Manual operating mode At axis key Display feed rate only if axis direction key is pressed Always minimum Always display feed rate Display of spindle position in the position display During closed loop Display spindle position only if spindle is in position control loop During closed loop and M5 Display spindle position only if spindle is in position control loop and with M5 hidePresetTable True Soft key preset table is not displayed False Display soft key preset table 440 Tables and Overviews il DisplaySettings Display step for the individual axes List of all available axes Display step for position display in mm or degrees 0 1 0 05 0 01 0 005 0 001 0 0005 0 0001 0 00005 Display step software option 0 00001 Display step software option Display step for position display in inches 0 005 0 001 0 0005 0 0001 0 00005 Display step software option 0 00001 Display step software option DisplaySettings Definition of the unit of measure valid for the display Metric Use metric system Inch Use inch system 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters DisplaySettings Format of the NC programs and cycle display Program entry in HEIDENHAIN plain language or in DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN Program entry in plai
336. sitioning or TOOL CALL block Tool length oversize DL Enter the delta value for the tool length Tool radius oversize DR Enter the delta value for the tool radius Tool radius oversize DR2 Enter the delta value for the tool radius 2 Example Tool call Call tool number 5 in the tool axis Z with a spindle speed of 2500 rom and a feed rate of 350 mm min The tool length is to be programmed with an oversize of 0 2 mm the tool radius 2 with an oversize of 0 05 mm and the tool radius with an undersize of 1 mm The character D preceding L and R designates a delta value Tool preselection with tool tables If you are working with tool tables use TOOL DEF to preselect the next tool Simply enter the tool number or a corresponding O parameter or type the tool name In quotation marks HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 on 5 2 Tool Data i il 5 3 Toff ompensation 5 3 Tool Compensation Introduction The TNC adjusts the spindle path in the spindle axis by the compensation value for the tool length In the working plane it compensates the tool radius If you are writing the part program directly on the TNC the tool radius compensation is effective only in the working plane The TNC accounts for the compensation value in up to five axes including the rotary axes Tool length compensation Length compensation becomes effective automatically as soon as a tool is called and the spindle axis moves To cancel length compensation call a too
337. starting point 4 Inthe tool axis position the tool above the workpiece or pre position immediately to workpiece depth If required switch on the spindle coolant 5 Move to the contour 6 Machine the contour 7 Leave the contour 8 Retract the tool end the program Further information on this topic E Contour programming See Tool Movements on page 152 Recommended program layout for simple cycle programs oo fh WN Call tool define tool axis Retract the tool Define the machining positions Define the fixed cycle Call the cycle switch on the spindle coolant Retract the tool end the program Further information on this topic E Cycle programming See User s Manual for Cycles HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 3 m m gt gt lt 3 3 oT ST D D p D amp s D A 3 fe h lt 3 e z pas oO o 3 z D F ke gt O re a 5 8 3 D 5 amp 3 co 1 3 Programming the First j 1 3 Programming the First Program a simple contour The contour shown to the right is to be milled once to a depth of 5mm You have already defined the workpiece blank After you have initiated a dialog through a function key enter all the data requested by the TNC in the screen header TOOL Call the tool Enter the tool data Confirm each of your CALL entries with the ENT key Do not forget the tool axis Retract the tool Press the orange axis key Z In order to get clear in the tool axis and e
338. straight lines and circular arcs Miscellaneous functions M With the TNC s miscellaneous functions you can affect the program run e g a program interruption the machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and off the path behavior of the tool Subprograms and program section repeats If a machining sequence occurs several times in a program you can save time and reduce the chance of programming errors by entering the sequence once and then defining it as a subprogram or program section repeat If you wish to execute a specific program section only under certain conditions you also define this machining sequence as a subprogram In addition you can have a part program call a separate program for execution Programming with subprograms and program section repeats is described in Chapter 7 152 Programming Programming Contours il Programming with Q parameters Instead of programming numerical values in a part program you enter markers called Q parameters You assign the values to the Q parameters separately with the Q parameter functions You can use the Q parameters for programming mathematical functions that control program execution or describe a contour In addition parametric programming enables you to measure with the 3 D touch probe during program run Programming with Q parameters is described in Chapter 8 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 e m a Q gt e 8
339. t If the table of contents at left is active Select the entry above it or below it If the text window at right is active Jump to the next link HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 4 7 Context Sensi vous System i il g Select the page last shown BACK V lt 1 gt Y Page forward If you have used the select page FORWARD ot last shown function j Move up by one page PAGE Move down by one page PAGE Display or hide table of contents DIRECTORY Switch between full screen display and reduced display With the reduced display you can see some of the rest of the TNC window The focus is switched internally to the TNC WEEE application so that you can operate the control when the TNCguide is open If the full screen is active the TNC reduces the window size automatically before the change of focus Close the TNCguide 2 O eb ad gt K eb ad Q Q N a 128 Programming Programming Aids il Subject index The most important subjects in the Manual are listed in the subject rir Inhalt Index Suchen index Index tab You can select them directly by mouse or with the SchiUsseluor t probes 7 3 D compensation fl Cursor keys Delta values Face milling The following touch probe cycles are available in the manual modet Normalized vector Calibrate the effective length Calibrating the effective length Peripheral millin alibrate the effective lengi Sie alibrating the eff
340. t 256 Rectangular stud complete machining 257 Circular stud complete machining 262 Thread milling 263 Thread milling countersinking 264 Thread drilling milling 265 Helical thread drilling milling 267 Outside thread milling 460 Miscellaneous functions MoO M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Ms M9 M13 M14 M30 M89 M91 M92 M94 M97 M98 M99 M109 M110 M111 M116 M117 M118 M120 M126 M127 M130 Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Optional program STOP Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Clear status display depending on machine parameter Go to block 1 Spindle ON clockwise Spindle ON counterclockwise Spindle STOP Tool change Stop program run depending on machine parameter Spindle STOP Coolant ON Coolant OFF Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON Same function as M2 Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modally effective depending on machine parameter Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine tool builder such as tool change position Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below 360 Machine small contour steps Machine open contours completely Blockwise cycle call Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge increase and decrease feed rate Constant contouring speed at tool cutting
341. t occurrence of the text press the REPLACE soft key To replace all text occurrences press the REPLACE ALL soft key To skip the text and move to its next occurrence press the FIND soft key End the search function Programming Fundamentals File Management il 3 3 File Management Fundamentals Files Programs In HEIDENHAIN format H In DIN ISO format Tables for Tools A Tool changers TCH Pallets P Datums D Points PNT Presets PR Touch probes iP Backup files BAK Texts as ASCII files A Log Tiles TXT Help files CHM When you write a part program on the TNC you must first enter a file name The TNC saves the program to the hard disk as a file with the same name The TNC can also save texts and tables as files The TNC provides a special file management window in which you can easily find and manage your files Here you can call copy rename and erase files With the TNC you can manage and save files up to a total size of 300 MB Depending on the setting the TNC generates a backup file bak after editing and saving of NC programs This can reduce the memory space available to you HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 runde s 3 3 File Management rund ontas 3 3 File Management File names When you store programs tables and texts as files the TNC adds an extension to the file name separated by a point This extension indicates the file type PROG20 File name File type File names should not
342. t Make network connection CAD Cast table tnceguide SMB option Mount Auto Mount point Mount device al PC N Nde 1pc5323 transfer Mount device de 1pc5323 transfer PC SMB S Mount point File system IP isoja z4s 57 username Workgroup Password Further options sockopt 50 RCYTIME0 10 gt 50ckopt 50 5NDTIME0 10 NO CANCEL Automatic connection ele TT ot A _ EA 2 PASTE FIELD MOD Functions SMB option Options that concern the SMB file system type Options are given without space characters separated only by commas Pay attention to capitalization Options ip IP address of the Windows PC to which the control is to be connected username User name with which the control should log in workgroup VVorkgroup under which the control should log in 15 5 Ethernet Interface password Password with which the control is to log on up to 80 characters Further SMB options Input of further options for the Windows network Automatic Automount YES or NO Here you specify connection whether the network will be automatically mounted when the control starts up Devices not automatically mounted can be mounted anytime later in the program management It uses the communications protocol according to RFC You do not need to indicate the protocol with the TNC 320 894 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 431 il Settings on a PC with Windows 2000 Int
343. t correspond to that of the TNC 4xx and 1TNC 530 series of controls Therefore machining programs created on HEIDENHAIN contouring controls starting from the TNC 150 B may not always run on the TNC 320 If NC blocks contain invalid elements the TNC will mark them as ERROR blocks when the Tile is opened between the iITNC 530 and the TNC 320 see Comparison Functions of the TNC 320 and the ITNC 530 on page 463 Please also note the detailed description of the differences 56 Introduction 2 2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard Visual display unit The TNC is delivered with a 15 inch TFT color flat panel display see figure at top right 1 oO oh W co N Header When the TNC is on the selected operating modes are shown in the screen header the machining mode at the left and the programming mode at right The currently active mode Is displayed in the larger box where the dialog prompts and TNC messages also appear unless the TNC is showing only graphics Soft keys In the footer the TNC indicates additional functions in a soft key row You can select these functions by pressing the keys immediately below them The lines immediately above the sott key row indicate the number of soft key rows that can be called with the black arrow keys to the right and left The active soft key row Is indicated by brightened bar Soft key selection keys Shift between soft key rows Sets the screen layout Shift key for
344. t is operated in the same manner as the Windows Explorer Linked text positions cross references are shown underlined and in blue Clicking the link opens the associated page Of course you can also operate the TNCguide through keys and soft keys The following table contains an overview of the corresponding key functions the control hardware and not on the programming The key functions described below are only available on station If the table of contents at left is active select the entry above it or below it If the text window at right is active Move the page downward or upward if texts or graphics are not shown completely If the table of contents at left is active Open a branch of the table of contents If the branch is at its end jump into the window at right If the text window at right is active No function If the table of contents at left is active Close a branch of the table of contents If the text window at right is active No function If the table of contents at left is active Use the cursor key to show the selected page If the text window at right is active If the cursor is on a link jump to the linked page If the table of contents at left is active Switch the tab between the display of the table of contents display of the subject index and the full text search function and switching to the screen half at right If the text window at right is active Jump back to the window at lef
345. t key in the Manual Operation mode Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane Feature content level upgrade functions Along with software options significant further improvements of the TNC software are managed via the Feature Content Level FCL upgrade functions Functions subject to the FCL are not available simply by updating the software on your TNC All upgrade functions are available to you without surcharge when you receive a new machine Upgrade functions are identified in the manual with FCL n where n indicates the sequential number of the feature content level You can purchase a code number in order to permanently enable the FCL functions For more information contact your machine tool builder or HEIDENHAIN HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 TNC Model Software and Features TNC Model Software and Features Intended place of operation The TNC complies with the limits for a Class A device in accordance with the specifications in EN 55022 and is intended for use primarily in industrially zoned areas Legal information This product uses open source software Further information is available on the control under Programming and Editing operating mode MOD function LICENSE INFO soft key New Functions of Software 340 55x 04 The PLANE function for flexible definition of a tilted working plane was introduced see The PLANE Function Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 on page 325 The context sens
346. t of thread Shape of the helix The table below illustrates in which way the shape of the helix is determined by the work direction direction of rotation and radius compensation Right handed Z DR RL Left handed Z DR RR Right handed Z DR RR Left handed Z DR RL Right handed Z DR RR Left handed Z DR RL Right handed Z DR RL Left handed Z DR RR HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 olar Coordinates 6 5 Path Contours o il Programming a helix rotation and the incremental total angle IPA The tool may Always enter the same algebraic sign for the direction of otherwise move in a wrong path and damage the contour For the total angle IPA you can enter a value of TSE SEIS SSS ie aE Gis Ze Ci ese P gt Polar coordinates angle Enter the total angle of tool traverse along the helix in incremental dimensions After entering the angle specify the tool axis with an axis selection key olar Coordinates Coordinate Enter the coordinate for the height of the helix in incremental dimensions gt Direction of rotation DR Clockwise helix DR Counterclockwise helix DR Enter the radius compensation according to the table above Example NC blocks Thread M6 x 1 mm with 5 revolutions 6 5 Path Contour 184 Programming Programming Contours il HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Define the datum for polar coordinates Retract the tool Pre positi
347. t screen key Allowed everywhere renumbering possible after request Empty line is inserted must be filled with zeros manually Not available Not available Not available With the Edit the current field function and the on line keyboard With X Y coordinates independent of machine type switchover with FUNCTION PARAXMODE Relative references in contour subprograms are not corrected automatically Error message Key non functional Terminates the editing process and calls the file manager The basic sott key row is selected when the file manager is exited Not available Not available Available Switchover by toggle soft key Only allowed at end of table Line with value 0 in all columns Is inserted Available Available Available Via ASCII keyboard Machine dependent with the existing parallel axes All relative references are corrected automatically Handling of error messages Help for error messages Help for error messages while a block is being edited Switching the operating mode while help menu is active Selecting the background operating mode while helo menu is active Identical error messages Acknowledgment of error messages Access to protocol functions Saving service files Find function List of words recently searched for Show elements of active block Show list of all available NC blocks Starting the find function with the up down arrow keys when highlight is on a block
348. t the copied field 2nd soft key row Eq N N Reset the selected line The TNC enters in all RESET columns 2nd soft key row Insert a single line at the end of the table 2nd ced soft key row LINE Delete a single line at the end of the table 2nd soft key row LINE 364 Manual Operation and Setup il Activating a datum from the preset table in the Manual Operation mode resets the active datum shift mirroring rotation and When activating a datum from the preset table the TNC scaling factor However a coordinate transformation that was programmed tn Cycle 19 Tilted Working Plane or through the PLANE function remains active o Select the Manual Operation mode Display the preset table Select the datum number you want to activate or With the GOTO key select the datum number that you want to activate Confirm with the ENT key ACTIVATE Activate the preset PRESET Confirm activation of the datum The TNC sets the display and if defined the basic rotation 5 Leave the preset table Activating the datum from the preset table in an NC program To activate datums from the preset table during program run use Cycle 247 In Cycle 247 you define the number of the datum that you want to activate see User s Manual Cycles Cycle 247 SET DATUM HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 thout a 3 D Touch Probe ing wi E T Y 12 4 j il 12 5 Using 3 D Touch Probes Touch Probe Functi
349. tatus display goes out In this case the program must be restarted from the program beginning Sj Program run stopped aO Z B Interrupting the machining process by switching to the Program Run Single Block mode of operation You can interrupt a program that is being run in the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation by switching to the Program Run Single Block mode The TNC interrupts the machining process at the end of the current block HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 407 il 14 5 Program Run Moving the machine axes during an interruption You can move the machine axes during an Interruption in the same way as in the Manual Operation mode Application example Retracting the spindle after tool breakage Interrupt machining Enable the external direction keys Press the MANUAL TRAVERSE soft key Move the axes with the machine axis direction buttons START button after the MANUAL OPERATION soft key to enable the axis direction buttons Refer to your machine tool manual A On some machines you may have to press the machine 408 Test Run and Program Run il Resuming program run after an interruption program must be resumed from the beginning of the cycle This means that some machining operations will be repeated If a program run is interrupted during a fixed cycle the If you interrupt a program run during execution of a subprogram or program section repeat use the RESTORE POS AT N function to return to the pos
350. te dimensions Display and entry in mm or Inches 16 3 Technical Information Tool compensation Tool radius in the working plane and tool length Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks M120 Tool tables Multiple tool tables with any number of tools Constant cutting speed With respect to the path of the tool center With respect to the cutting edge Parallel operation Creating a program with graphical support while another program is being run Contour elements Straight line Chamfer Circular path Circle center point Circle radius Tangentially connected arc Corner rounding Approaching and departing Via straight line tangential or perpendicular the contour Via circular arc FK free contour programming FK free contour programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC Program jumps Subroutines Program section repeat Any desired program as subroutine 448 Tables and Overviews il Fixed cycles Coordinate transformation Datum shift rotation mirroring Q parameters Mathematical functions sin cos root calculation Programming with variables Programming aids Actual position capture Actual positions can be transferred directly into the NC program Program verification graphics Graphic simulation before program run even while another program is being run Display modes Programming graphics In the Prog
351. the control as a client in your network The TNC transmits data via the Ethernet card with the smb protocol server message block for Windows operating systems or the TCP IP protocol family Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol and with support from the NFS Network File System Connection possibilities 15 5 Ethernet Interface You can connect the Ethernet card in your TNC to your network through the RJ45 connection X26 100BaseTX or 10BaseT or directly to a PC The connection is metallically isolated from the control electronics For a 100BaselX or 10Basel connection you need a Twisted Pair cable to connect the TNC to your network depends on the quality grade of the cable the sheathing The maximum cable length between TNC and a node and the type of network 100BaseTX or 10BaseT No great effort is required to connect the TNC directly to a PC that has an Ethernet card Simply connect the TNC 10BaseT 100BaseT port X26 and the PC with an Ethernet crossover cable aac a trade names crossed patch cable or STP cable HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 427 il Connecting the control to the network Function overview of network configuration In the file manager PGM MGT press the Network soft key Manual operation Programming ae TNC Mount Auto Mount point Mount device GO nc_prog M 25X 1 o PC NNde 1pcS5323 transfer J 25X TEST Auto_Tast
352. the file with M_ CLOSE If you use FN 16 several times in the program the TNC In the FN 16 block program the format file and the log file with their respective extensions If you enter only the file name for the path of the log file the TNC saves the log file in the directory in which the NC program with the FN 16 function is located You can output up to 32 O parameters per line in the format description file HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 tt Additional Functions i il EE Additional Functions Displaying messages on the TNC screen You can also use the function FN 16 to display any messages from the NC program in a pop up window on the TNC screen This makes it easy to display explanatory texts including long texts at any point in the program in a way that the user has to react to it You can also display Q parameter contents if the protocol description file contains such instructions For the message to appear on the TNC screen you need only enter SCREEN as the name of the protocol file If the message has more lines than fit in the pop up window you can use the arrow keys to page in the window To close the pop up window press the CE key To have the program close the window program the following NC block All the previously described conventions apply for the protocol description file If you output to the screen more than one text in the program the TNC appends all texts to the end of the text already
353. the network The DHCP server identifies the control by its hostname Your company network must be specially prepared for this function Contact your network administrator IP ADDRESS Network address of the control In each of the four adjacent input fields you can enter 3 digits of the IP address With the ENT key you can jump into the next field Your network specialist can give you a network address for the control SUBNET MASK Serves to distinguish the net and host ID of the network Your network specialist assigns the subnet mask of the control BROADCAST The broadcast address of the control is needed only if it is different from the standard setting The standard setting is formed from the net and host ID in which all bits are set to 1 ROUTER Network address of default router This entry is required only if your network consists of several subnetworks interconnected by routers effective until the control is rebooted After the network configuration is concluded with the OK button or soft key the control asks for confirmation and reboots The entered network configuration does not become HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 429 eb Q jm hom eb ad 4 b eb Z ra LLI L LO q Mount device Mount point File system NFS option 430 Configuring network access to other devices mount Make sure that the person configuring your TNC is a network specialist Not all Windows operating system
354. the workpiece press the machine START button Position the touch probe near the first touch point on the second workpiece edge Select the probe direction by soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Position the touch probe near the second touch point on the same workpiece edge To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Datum Enter both datum coordinates into the menu window and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key or see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table page 369 To terminate the probe function press the END soft key Manual Operation and Setup il Circle center as datum With this function you can set the datum at the center of bore holes circular pockets cylinders studs circular islands etc Inside circle The TNC automatically probes the Inside wall in all four coordinate axis directions For incomplete circles circular arcs you can choose the appropriate probing direction Position the touch probe approximately in the center of the circle PROBING Select the probe function by pressing the ol PROBING CC soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button four times The touch probe touches four points on the inside of the circle Datum In the menu window enter both coordinates of the circle center confirm with the SET DATUM soft key or write the values to a table see Writing the measured
355. ther directory on your PC If you want to control data transfer from the PC establish the connection with your PC in the following manner Select lt File gt lt Setup connection gt TNCremoNT now receives the file and directory structure from the TNC and displays this at the bottom left of the main window 2 To transfer a file from the TNC to the PC select the file in the TNC window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file into the PC window 1 To transfer a file from the PC to the TNC select the file in the PC window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file into the TNC window 2 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces If you want to control data transfer from the TNC establish the connection with your PC in the following manner Select lt Extras gt lt TNCserver gt TNCremoNT is now in server mode It can receive data from the TNC and send data to the TNC You can now call the file management functions on the TNC by pressing the PGM MGT key see Data transfer to or from an external data medium on page 106 and transfer the desired files End TNCremoNT Select the menu items lt File gt lt Exit gt where all of the functions are explained in more detail The Refer also to the TNCremoNT context sensitive help texts help texts must be called with the F1 key 426 MOD Functions 15 5 Ethernet Interface Introduction The TNC is shipped with a standard Ethernet card to connect
356. tion o il uoIZdnNwu9 U UNY WiebOi1dg jeuoindo 8 1 Test Run and Program Run il 416 MOD Functions 15 1 Selecting MOD Functions 15 1 Selecting MOD Functions The MOD functions provide additional input possibilities and displays The available MOD functions depend on the selected operating mode Selecting the MOD functions Call the operating mode in which you wish to change the MOD functions Press the MOD key to select the MOD functions The oo figures at right show typical screen menus in Programming and Editing mode figure at upper right Test Run mode figure at lower right and in a machine operating mode see figure on next page Changing the settings Select the desired MOD function in the displayed menu with the arrow keys There are three possibilities for changing a setting depending on the function selected Enter a numerical value directly e g when determining the traverse range limit Change a setting by pressing the ENT key e g when setting program Input Change a setting via a selection window If more than one possibility is available for a particular setting you can superimpose a window listing all of the given possibilities by pressing the GOTO key Select the desired setting directly by pressing the corresponding numerical key to the left of the colon or by using the arrow keys and then confirming with ENT If you don t want to change the setting close the window again with END
357. tioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 342 re NC block i j Abbreviations used POINTS 11 2 The PLANE Function 338 Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Defining the machining plane with a single incremental space angle PLANE RELATIVE Application Use the incremental space angle when an already active tilted machining plane is to be tilted by another rotation Example machining a 45 chamfer on a tilted plane The defined angle is always effective in respect to the active working plane irrespective of the function you have used to activate it Before programming note the following You can program any number of PLANE RELATIVE functions in a row If you want to return to the machining plane that was active before the PLANE RELATIVE function define the PLANE RELATIVE function again with the same angle but SPA SPB SPC with the opposite algebraic sign If you use the PLANE RELATIVE function on an untilted machining plane then you simply rotate the untilted plane about the space angle defined in the PLANE function orking Plane Software Option 1 Parameter description for the positioning behavior See Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 342 re Input parameters O REL SPA Incremental angle Space angle about which the active machining plane is to be rotated additionally pe see figure at right Use a soft key to select
358. tive during traverse in M103 is also effective in an active tilted working plane the negative direction of the tilted tool axis Example NC blocks The feed rate for plunging is to be 20 of the feed rate in the plane Actual contouring feed rate mm min 500 500 100 141 500 500 WO 04 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution M136 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate F in mm min Behavior with M136 In inch programs M136 is not permitted in combination with the new alternate feed rate FU The spindle is not permitted to be controlled when M136 is active With M136 the TNC does not move the tool in mm min but rather at the programmed feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution If you change the spindle speed by using the spindle override the TNC changes the feed rate accordingly Effect M136 becomes effective at the start of block You can cancel M136 by programming M137 Feed rate for circular arcs M109 M110 M111 Standard behavior The TNC applies the programmed feed rate to the path of the tool center Behavior at circular arcs with M109 The TNC adjusts the feed rate for circular arcs at inside and outside contours so that the feed rate at the tool cutting edge remains constant Behavior at circular arcs with M110 The TNC keeps the feed rate constant for circular arcs at inside contours only At outside c
359. to the beginning of a word Words must be MOVE O separated by a space O lt q Jump to the end of a word Words must be Move N separated by a space gt Switch between insert mode and overwrite ee mo d e OVERWRITE 114 Programming Programming Aids il 4 3 Structuring Programs Definition and applications This TNC function enables you to comment part programs in structuring blocks Structuring blocks are short texts with up to 37 characters and are used as comments or headlines for the subsequent program lines With the aid of appropriate structuring blocks you can organize long and complex programs in a clear and comprehensible manner This function is particularly convenient if you want to change the program later Structuring blocks can be inserted into the part program at any point They can also be displayed in a separate window and edited or added to as desired The inserted structure items are managed by the TNC in a separate file extension SEC DEP This speeds navigation in the program structure window Displaying the program structure window Changing the active window PROGRAM To display the program structure window select the SECTS screen display PROGRAM SECTS To change the active window press the Change window soft key Inserting a structuring block in the left program window Select the block after which the structuring block is to be inserted Press the INSERT SECTION s
360. tool axis is decisive for the assignment of the principal and minor axes X Y Z Y Z X Z X Y HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 3 1 runge s N rar eb 3 1 Fun Polar coordinates If the production drawing is dimensioned in Cartesian coordinates you also write the part program using Cartesian coordinates For parts containing circular arcs or angles it is often simpler to give the dimensions in polar coordinates While the Cartesian coordinates X Y and Z are three dimensional and can describe points in space polar coordinates are two dimensional and describe points in a plane Polar coordinates have their datum at a circle center CC or pole A position in a plane can be clearly defined by the Polar Radius the distance from the circle center CC to the position and the Polar Angle the value of the angle between the reference axis and the line that connects the circle center CC with the position Setting the pole and the angle reference axis The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates in one of the three planes These coordinates also set the reference axis for the polar angle PA X Y X Y Z R7 Z X 4Z 76 Programming Fundamentals File Management Absolute and incremental workpiece positions Absolute workpiece positions Absolute coordinates are position coordinates that are referenced to the datum of the coordinate system origin Each position on the workpiece is uniquely defined by i
361. ts absolute coordinates Example 1 Holes dimensioned in absolute coordinates Hole 1 Hole 2 Hole 3 X 10mm X 30mm X 50 mm Y 10mm Y 20 mm Y 30 mm Incremental workpiece positions Incremental coordinates are referenced to the last programmed nominal position of the tool which serves as the relative imaginary datum When you write a part program in incremental coordinates you thus program the tool to move by the distance between the previous and the subsequent nominal positions Incremental coordinates are therefore also referred to as chain dimensions To program a position in incremental coordinates enter the function before the axis Example 2 Holes dimensioned in incremental coordinates Absolute coordinates of hole 4 X 10 Mmm Y 10mm Hole 5 with respect to 4 Hole 6 with respect to 5 X 20 Mm X 20 mm Y 10 mm Y 10 mm Absolute and incremental polar coordinates Absolute polar coordinates always refer to the pole and the reference axis Incremental coordinates always refer to the last programmed nominal position of the tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 10 77 entals gt LL E m a er 3 1 Fun Setting the datum A production drawing identities a certain form element of the workpiece usually a corner as the absolute datum When setting the datum you first align the workpiece along the machine axes and then move the tool in each axis to a define
362. tum at inside corner Datum at circle center Datum In touch probe axis Datum at center of 4 holes HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 X X KL XI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XI XI X X XI X X X X X X X XI X X X X X X X X X X XJ X k il 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 430 431 440 441 450 451 452 480 481 482 483 484 480 Datum in one axis Measure angle Measure hole Measure circle outside Measure rectangle from inside Measure rectangle outside Measure inside width Measure ridge outside Boring Measure bolt hole circle Measure plane Measure axis shift Fast probing Save kinematics Measure kinematics Preset compensation Calibrate TT Measure Inspect the tool length Measure Inspect the tool radius Measure Inspect the tool length and the tool radius Calibrate infrared TT X KX KL XI X X XI X XI OK X lt XJ X X X X X X X XI KL X XI X X XI X X X X XI X XI X X Comparison Differences in programming Input of texts comments program names structure items network addresses etc Switching the operating mode while a block is being edited PGM CALL SEL TABLE SEL PATTERN SEL CONTOUR Selection of file in a pop up window File handling Save file function Save file as function Discard changes File management Mouse operation Sorting function Entry of name Support of short cuts
363. u a Q S 2 3 D D Z x lt g i S J 5 A Subprogram within a subprogram WW N A 01 N Main program SUBPGMS is executed up to block 17 Subprogram SP1 is called and executed up to block 39 Subprogram 2 is called and executed up to block 62 End of subprogram 2 and return jump to the subprogram from which it was called Subprogram 1 is executed from block 40 up to block 45 End of subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program SUBPGMS Main program SUBPGMS is executed from block 18 up to block 35 Return jump to block 1 and end of program Call the subprogram marked with LBL SP1 Last program block of the main program with M2 Beginning of subprogram SP1 Call the subprogram marked with LBL 2 End of subprogram 1 Beginning of subprogram 2 End of subprogram 2 12 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il Repeating program section repeats Example NC blocks Program execution 1 Main program REPS is executed up to block 27 2 Program section between block 20 and block 27 is repeated twice 3 Main program REPS is executed from block 28 to block 35 4 Program section between block 15 and block 35 Is repeated once including the program section repeat between 20 and block 27 5 Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50 end of program HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 7 5 Nesting Beginning of program section repeat 1 Beginning of program section repeat 2 The pro
364. u can decide whether you want to compensate the center misalignment by calibrating the effective radius The TNC rotates the 3 D touch probe by 180 for calibrating the center misalignment The rotation is initiated by a miscellaneous function that is set by the machine tool builder in Machine Parameter mStrobeUTurn Proceed as follows for manual calibration In the Manual Operation mode position the ball tip in the bore of the ring gauge CAL To select the calibration function for the ball tip radius and the touch probe center misalignment press the CAL R soft key Select the tool axis and enter the radius of the ring gauge To probe the workpiece press the machine START button four times The 3 D touch probe contacts a position on the hole in each axis direction and calculates the effective ball tip radius If you want to terminate the calibration function at this point press the END soft key In order to be able to determine ball tio center misalignment the TNC needs to be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer The machine tool manual provides further information i 180 If you want to determine the ball tip center ts misalignment press the 180 soft key The TNC rotates the touch probe by 180 To probe the workpiece press the machine START button four times The 3 D touch probe contacts a position on the hole in each axis direction and calculates the ball tip center misalignment HEIDENHAIN TN
365. u that the operation was not correct The TNC clears this note upon the next valid input Saving service files If necessary you can save the Current status of the TNC and make it available to a service technician for evaluation A group of service files is saved error and keystroke log files as well as other files that contain information about the current status of the machine and the machining If you repeat the Save service data function the previously saved group of service data files is overwritten Saving service files Open the error window m Press the LOG FILES soft key sawe To save service files press the SAVE SERVICE FILES ier soft key Calling the TNCguide help system You can call the TNC s help system via soft key Immediately the help system shows you the same error explanation that you receive by pressing the HELP soft key system the TNC shows an additional MACHINE MANUFACTURER soft key with which you can call this separate help system There you will find further more detailed information on the error message concerned D If your machine manufacturer also provides a help Ea Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages MACHINE Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages if E available 124 Programming Programming Aids il 4 7 Context Sensitive Help System Application The TNCguide context sensitive help system includes the user documentation in HTML format The TN
366. umber that you want to edit With the rightward or leftward arrow keys you can select the tool data that you want to edit To leave the tool table press the END key Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC See Operating Modes on page 60 Working with the tool table See Entering tool data in the table on page 136 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 49 1 5 Tool coll The pocket table TOOL_P TCH The function of the pocket table depends on the machine F Your machine manual provides more detailed information In the pocket table TOOL_P TCH permanently saved under TNC TABLE you specify which tools your tool magazine contains To enter data in the pocket table TOOL_P TCH proceed as follows Display the tool table TOOL TABLE Display the pocket table Edit the pocket table Set the EDITING soft key to ON With the upward or downward arrow keys you can select the pocket number that you want to edit POCKET TABLE With the rightward or leftward arrow keys you can select the data that you want to edit To leave the pocket table press the END key Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC See Operating Modes on page 60 Working with the pocket table See Pocket table for tool changer on page 142 50 Pocket table editing Tool number File tne table tool_p tch v RSV ST F E DOC WKZ 20 WKZ 30 WKZ 1 PROBE PPPOOVOUDWN
367. undamentals File Management il Choosing one of the last files selected Call the file manager PGM MGT LAST FILES an Display the last 10 files selected Press the LAST FILES soft key Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to select Press the ENT key Moves the highlight up and down within a window To select the file press the OK soft key or Deleting a file Once you delete files they cannot be undeleted Move the highlight to the file you want to delete To select the erasing function press the DELETE soft key The TNC inquires whether you really intend to delete the file To contirm press the OK soft key or To cancel deletion press the CANCEL soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Program run full sequence Programming 1GB H TNC nc_progNCast H Bytes Status Date Time BO 25X TEST e File name Auto_Tast AD t 24 06 2009 12 41 17 Cast 1 h 173 24 06 2009 12 28 31 CYCLES 1110 H 951 z7 34 2009 14 04 56 ex Sates Raa 6 Fk Last files TNC nc_progNCast NEUGL I PLA TNC nc_prog Cast 333 I1 BO scr TNC nc_prog Cast 113 h 215 T ak 9 09 11 47 N 9 12 28 18 9 14 05 32 DELETE CANCEL tnegu a COPY PASTE DELETE CANCEL FIELD FIELD 15 file s 195 5 MB vacant 101 th the BA niii ing wi 3 4 Work th the anager ing wi 3 4 Work Deleting a directory O
368. up to 9999 tools and their tool data in a tool table Also see the Editing Functions later in this Chapter In order to be able to assign various compensation data to a tool indexing tool number insert a line and extend the tool number by a dot and a number from 1 to 9 e g T 5 2 You must use tool tables if you wish to use indexed tools such as stepped drills with more than one length compensation value your machine tool has an automatic tool changer you want to rough mill the contour with Cycle 22 see User s Manual for Cycle Programming ROUGH OUT you want to work with Cycles 251 to 254 see User s Manual for Cycle Programming Cycles 251 to 254 Tool table Standard tool data R2 DL DR DR2 LCUTS ANGLE TL RT TIME1 136 Number by which the tool is called in the program e g 5 indexed 5 2 Name by which the tool is called in the program no more than 16 characters all capitals no spaces Compensation value for tool length L Compensation value for the tool radius R Tool radius R2 for toroid cutters only for 3 D radius compensation or graphical representation of a machining operation with spherical or toroid cutters Delta value for tool length L Delta value for tool radius R Delta value for tool radius R2 Tooth length of the tool for Cycle 22 Maximum plunge angle of the tool for reciprocating plunge cut In Cycles 22 and 208 Set tool lock TL for Tool Locked Number of
369. ure angle e g 90 and confirm with the ENT key Circle radius Enter the departure radius e g 8mm and confirm with the ENT key Feed rate F Enter the positioning feed rate e g 3000 mm min and confirm with the ENT key Miscellaneous function M Switch off the coolant e g M9 with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block 7 Retract the tool Press the orange axis key Z in order to get clear in the tool axis and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Confirm with the ENT key Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX Miscellaneous function M Enter M2 to end the program and confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block Further information on this topic Complete example with NC blocks See Example Linear movements and chamfers with Cartesian coordinates on page 175 Creating a new program See Creating and Writing Programs on page 9 Approaching departing contours See Contour Approach and Departure on page 158 Programming contours See Overview of path functions on page 166 Programmable feed rates See Possible feed rate input on page 83 Tool radius compensation See Tool radius compensation on page 147 Miscellaneous functions M See Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Cont
370. ured values are then stored referenced to the machine based coordinate system REF coordinates The preset table has the name PRESET PR and is saved in the directory TNC table Select any probe function Enter the desired coordinates of the datum in the appropriate input boxes depends on the touch probe cycle being run Enter the preset number in the Number in table input box Press the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key The TNC saves the datum in the preset table under the entered number HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 12 5 Using 3 D Touch rrobes ipuct Probe Function Software Option j il uch Probe Function Software Option 12 6 Calibrating 3 D Touch Probe 12 6 Calibrating 3 D Touch Probes Touch Probe Function Software Option Introduction In order to precisely specify the actual trigger point of a 3 D touch probe you must calibrate the touch probe otherwise the TNC cannot provide precise measuring results Always calibrate a touch probe in the following cases Commissioning Stylus breakage Stylus exchange Change in the probe feed rate Irregularities caused for example when the machine heats up Change of active tool axis During calibration the TNC finds the effective length of the stylus and the effective radius of the ball tio To calibrate the 3 D touch probe clamp a ring gauge of known height and known internal radius to the machine table Calibrating the effective length referenced
371. urements 0 002 to 0 999 mm Range within which the measured value must be during multiple measurements CfgloolMeasurement M function for spindle orientation 1 Spindle orientation directly by the NC 0 Function inactive 1 to 999 Number of the M function for spindle orientation Probing direction for tool radius measurement X_Positive Y_Positive X_Negative Y_Negative depending on the tool axis Distance from lower edge of tool to upper edge of stylus 0 001 to 99 9999 mm Offset of stylus to tool Rapid traverse in probing cycle 10 to 300 000 mm min Rapid traverse in probing cycle Probing teed rate for tool measurement 1 to 3 000 mm min Rapid traverse during tool measurement Calculation of the probing feed rate 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters ConstantTolerance Calculation of the probing feed rate with constant tolerance VariableTolerance Calculation of the probing feed rate with variable tolerance ConstantFeed Constant probing feed rate Max permissible surface cutting speed at the tooth edge 1 t0129 m min Permissible surface cutting speed at the circumference of the milling tool Maximum permissible speed during tool measurement 0 to 1 000 1 min Maximum permissible speed Maximum permissible measuring error for tool measurement 0 001 to 0 999 mm First maximum permissible measurement error Maximum permissible measuring error for tool measurement 0 001 to 0 999 mm Second maximum permissible m
372. us R Coordinates of the arc end point Radius R Note The algebraic sign determines the size of the arc Direction of rotation DR Note The algebraic sign determines whether the arc is concave or convex Miscellaneous function M Feed rate F Full circle For a full circle program two blocks in succession The end point of the first semicircle is the starting point of the second The end point of the second semicircle is the starting point of the first 172 Programming Programming Contours il Central angle CCA and arc radius R The starting and end points on the contour can be connected with four arcs of the same radius Smaller arc CCA lt 180 Enter the radius with a positive sign R gt 0 Larger arc CCA gt 180 Enter the radius with a negative sign R lt 0 The direction of rotation determines whether the arc Is curving outward convex or curving Inward concave Convex Direction of rotation DR with radius compensation RL Concave Direction of rotation DR with radius compensation RL Example NC blocks s a y The distance from the starting and end points of the arc diameter cannot be greater than the diameter of the arc The maximum radius is 99 9999 m You can also enter rotary axes A B and C HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 6 4 Path vontours caesien Coordinates i i 6 4 Path Contours cM sian Coordinates Circular path CT with tangential connection The tool moves on an arc that starts t
373. us RBREAK PLC value Center misalignment in reference axis CAL OF1 Probe center offset in minor axis CAL OF2 Spindle angle for calibration CAL ANG Tool type for pocket table Maximum speed NMAX Tool number Special tool O no 1 yes Fixed pocket O no 1 yes Locked pocket O no 1 yes PLC status Pocket number Tool magazine number Tool number T Active tool axis O X6 U ic ee a 2 Z8 W tt Additional Functions C il 7 Additional Functions Values programmed immediately after TOOL DEF 61 Active tool compensation 200 Active transformations 210 248 1 AJ W 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and oversize from TOOL CALL 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and oversize from TOOL CALL 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and oversize from TOOL CALL Spindle speed S Oversize in tool length DL Oversize in tool radius DR Automatic TOOL CALL 0 yes 1 no Oversize for tool radius DR2 Tool index Active feed rate Tool number T Length Radius Index Tool data programmed in TOOL DEF 1 yes 0 no Active radius Active length Rounding radius R2 Basic rotation in MANUAL OPERATION mode Programmed rotation with Cycle 10 Active mirrored axes 0 mirroring not active 1 X axis mirrored 2 Y axis mirrored 4 Z axis mirrored Programming Q Parameters il Active datum shift 220 Traverse
374. used before program start 410 Program run ash BEGIN PGM 113 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X Y 0 2 20 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 3 Z 52000 L 2 1 R FMAX M3 L X 50 Y 50 R FMAX OvNOUDWNP CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UP2 9 CYCL DEF 4 R 10 CYCL DEF 4 Main program 11 CYCL DEF 4 Start up at 12 CYCL DEF 4 Program 13 L Z 2 R Repetitions 14 CYCL DEF CYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING CYCL DEF APENN Mee e Fatde full sequence Programming i p PE 113 h N TNC nc_prog Cast 113 h j1 x t33 5631 C 0 000 S 85 860 TEKE ACcTL QO okk rT 3 Z 6 o F omm min Ouvr 57 9 M 5 Y t 2 542mMzZ 9 749 a ADVANCED OK CANCEL OFF ON Test Run and Program Run To go to the first block of the current program to start a block scan enter GOTO 0 BLOCK To select block scan press the BLOCK SCAN soft key or Start up at N Enter the block number N at which the block scan should end Program Enter the name of the program containing block N Repetitions If block N is located in a program section repeat or in a subprogram that is to be run repeatedly enter the number of repetitions to be calculated in the block scan 14 5 Program Run To start the block scan press the machine START button Contour approach see following section Entering a program with the GOTO key If you use the GOTO block number key for goi
375. used for positioning to the next previous column Pressing the key adds the soft key row as the last row To exit the menu press the SPEC FCT key again then the TNC shows the last active soft key row Pressing the key adds the soft key row as the last row To exit the menu press the APPR DEP key again then the TNC shows the last active soft key row Exits the respective menu i il Calling the file manager while the CYCLE DEF and TOUCH PROBE menus are active Calling the file manager while CYCL CALL SPEC FCT PGM CALL and APPR DEP menus are active Datum table Sorting function by values within an axis Resetting the table Hiding axes that are not present Switching the list form view Inserting individual line Transfer of actual position values in individual axis to the datum table per keystroke Transfer of actual position values in all active axes to the datum table per keystroke Using a key to capture the last positions measured by TS Entry of comment in DOC column FK free contour programming Programming of parallel axes Automatic correction of relative references 482 Terminates the editing process and calls the file manager The respective soft key row remains selected when the Tile manager is exited Terminates the editing process and calls the file manager The respective soft key row remains selected when the Tile manager is exited Available Available Not available Switchover via spli
376. ustrates the elements of a block The TNC numbers the blocks in ascending sequence The first block of a program is identified by BEGIN PGM the program name and the active unit of measure The subsequent blocks contain information on The workpiece blank Tool calls Path function Approaching a safe position Feed rates and spindle speeds as well as Path contours cycles and other functions Block number The last block of a program Is identified by END PGM the program name and the active unit of measure After each tool call HEIDENHAIN recommends always traversing to a safe position from which the TNC can position the tool for machining without causing a collision Define the blank BLK FORM Immediately after initiating a new program you define a cuboid workpiece blank If you wish to define the blank at a later stage press the SPEC FCT key the PROGRAM DEFAULTS soft key and then the BLK FORM soft key This definition is needed for the TNC s graphic simulation feature The sides of the workpiece blank lie parallel to the X Y and Z axes and can be up to 100 000 mm long The blank form is defined by two of its corner points MIN point the smallest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute values MAX point the largest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute or incremental values You only need to define the blank form if you wish to run a graphic test for the program HEI
377. vision i Parenthetic calculations 4 4 Integrated Pocket Arc cosine ARC sine SIN Cosine COS Tangent TAN Powers of values XAY Square root SORT Inversion 1 x pi 3 14159265359 PI Add value to buffer memory M Save the value to buffer MS memory Recall from buffer memory MR Delete buffer memory contents MC Natural logarithm LN Logarithm LOG Exponential function e x Check the algebraic sign SGN Form the absolute value ABS 116 Programming Programming Aids Truncate decimal places INT Truncate integers FRAC Modulus operator MOD Select view View Delete value GE Unit of measure MM or INCH Display mode for angle values DEG degree or RAD radian measure Display mode of the numerical DEC decimal or HEX value hexadecimal To transfer the calculated value into the program Use the arrow keys to select the word into which the calculated value is to be transferred Superimpose the on line calculator by pressing the CALC key and perform the desired calculation Press the actual position capture key for the TNC to superimpose a soft key row Press the CALC soft key for the TNC to transfer the value into the active input box and to close the calculator HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 4 4 Integrated roci sloulator Graphics pe O O pee A LO vr 4 5 Programming Graphics Generating Not generating graphics during programming While you are writing the part program you can have the TNC g
378. whether the new or old TNC API is used Enter the name of the symbolic operand as string to wait for the defined condition of the symbolic operand HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 tt Additional Functions k il EE Additional Functions The following conditions are permitted in the FN 20 block Equal Less than lt Greater than gt Less than or equal lt Greater than or equal gt In addition the FN20 WAIT FOR SYNC function is available WAIT FOR SYNC is used whenever you read for example system data via FN18 that require synchronization with real time The TNC stops the look ahead calculation and executes the subsequent NC block only when the NC program has actually reached that block Example Stop program run until the PLC sets marker 4095 to 1 Example Stop program run until the PLC sets the symbolic operand to 1 Example Pause internal look ahead calculation read current position in the X axis FN29 PLC Transferring values to the PLC The function FN 29 PLC transfers up to eight numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC Increments and units 0 1 um or 0 0001 Example Transfer the numerical value 10 which means 1 um or 0 001 to the PLC 256 Programming Q Parameters il FN37 EXPORT You need the FN37 EXPORT function if you want to create your own cycles and integrate them in the TNC The Q parameters 0 to 99 are effective only locally This means that the O parameters are effective
379. xis continuously Press and hold the machine axis direction button then press the machine START button 0 To stop the axis press the machine STOP button You can move several axes ata time with these two methods You can change the feed rate at which the axes are traversed with the F soft key see Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M page 356 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 12 2 Moving the Machine Axes j il Incremental jog positioning With incremental jog positioning you can move a machine axis by a preset distance A Select the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel mode a Shift the soft key row INCRE Select incremental jog positioning Switch the MENT oN INCREMENT soft key to ON Enter the jog increment in mm and confirm with the ENT key 12 2 Moving the Machine Axes x Press the machine axis direction button as often as desired mp The maximum permissible value for infeed is 10 mm 354 Manual Operation and Setup il Traversing with the HR 410 electronic handwheel The portable HR 410 handwheel is equipped with two permissive buttons The permissive buttons are located below the star grip You can only move the machine axes when a permissive button Is depressed machine dependent function The HR 410 handwheel features the following operating elements 1 EMERGENCY STOP button 2 Handwheel 3 Permissive buttons 4 Axis address keys 5 Actual
380. y The TNC goes into the Programming and Editing mode Further information on this topic Operating modes See Programming and Editing on page 61 The most important TNC keys Confirm entry and activate the next dialog prompt Ignore the dialog question ms Z d End the dialog immediately Abort dialog discard entries Soft keys on the screen with which you select functions appropriate to the active state Further information on this topic Writing and editing programs See Editing a program on page 85 Overview of keys See Controls of the TNC on page 2 36 First Steps with the TNC 320 il Create a new program file management carr Press the PGM MGT key the TNC displays the file ee Su Programming MGT management The Tile management of the TNC is 16B H arranged much like the file management on a PC with TBa ne pros i See the Windows Explorer The file management enables aie Tost swe eee eek CAD t 24 06 2009 12 41 17 you to manipulate data on the TNC hard disk cast i aye ig cece cee 2 ee l l l Sz an t418 24 e6 2009 12 39 34 wD Use the arrow keys to select the folder in which you Retest KH 288 2204 2009 08 01 46 want to open the new file a ae St eeaeee 08 11 r e l l l i HEBEL H 519 24 08 2008 09 29 04 5 Enter a file name with the extension H The TNC then ete STATH a72 22 05 209 13 35 20 STAT1 H 601 22 06 2009 13 38 34 tch h 1320 24 06 2009 12 27 53 DIAGNOSIS 15 file
381. y Gray CTR White Green White Green o CO NII oO AJ OI N gt o NI cy AIAI OINI WT gt 09 Hsg Ext shield Hsg Ext shield Hsg Hsg Hsg Hsg Ext shield Hsg 446 Tables and Overviews il Non HEIDENHAIN devices The connector pin layout of a non HEIDENHAIN device may differ considerably trom that of a HEIDENHAIN device It depends on the unit and the type of data transfer The table below shows the connector pin layout on the adapter block Yellow White Brown Black Violet Gray White Green Green CO NI co AJI O1 MD NM W gt CO CO N OD O11 BI WY N gt Hsg Hsg Hsg External Hsg shield Ethernet interface RJ45 socket Maximum cable length Unshielded 100 m Shielded 400 m 1 TX Transmit Data 2 TX Transmit Data 3 REC Receive Data 4 Vacant 5 Vacant 6 REC Receive Data 7 Vacant 8 Vacant HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 16 2 Pin hi and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces il 16 3 Technical Information Explanation of symbols Standard Axis option Software option 1s Short description Basic version 3 axes plus closed loop spindle 1st additional axis for 4 axes plus closed loop spindle 2nd additional axis for 5 axes plus closed loop spindle Program entry In HEIDENHAIN conversational format and DIN ISO over soft keys or USB keyboard Position data Nominal positions for lines and arcs in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates Incremental or absolu
382. y repeatedly until see the correct contour element is displayed Use the zoom function 2nd soft key row If you cannot distinguish possible solutions in the standard setting If the displayed contour element matches the drawing select the contour element with SELECT SOLUTION If you do not yet wish to select a green contour element press the EDIT soft key to continue the FK dialog with the SELECT SOLUTION soft key This way you can Select the green contour elements as soon as possible reduce the ambiguity of subsequent elements The machine tool builder may use other colors for the FK graphics NC blocks from a program that you called with PGM CALL are displayed in another color Show block number in graphic window To show a block number in the graphic window Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to SHOW soft key row 3 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ry 8 FCT DR R10 CLSD CCX CCY 19 FSELECT1 20 DEP LCT X 30 Y Z 100 RS FMAX 21 END PGM HEBEL MM P EEE Programming HEBEL H 3 TOOL CALL 2 Z 53500 F580 4 L Z 100 RO FM M 5 0 R FMAX 6 Z 5 R FMAX M3 7 APPR LCT X 10 Y R5 RL 8 FPOL X 100 0 9 FC DR R10 CLSD CCX 0 z 10 FLT 11 FCT DR R15 CCX 100 CCY 0 12 FLT D 13 FOT DR R12 CCPR 40 COPA 110 14 FLT PDX 100 PDY 0 D15 m 15 FSELE M LY T Br 16 FCT DR RS J i 17 FLT PDX 1 PDY D15 and 4 fa a DIAGNOSIS SHOW SELECT START es SOLUTIO

TNC 320 - heidenhain

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents